Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D08-011 - WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER MALL - LUCKY BRAND - TENANT IMPROVEMENT
LUCKY BRAND 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL D08 -011 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY This certificate is issued pursuant to the requirements of Section 110.2 of the 2006 edition of the International Building Code. At the time of issuance, this structure or portion thereof has been inspected for compliance with the requirements of this code for the occupancy and division of occupancy and the use for which the proposed occupancy is classified. Building Permit No.: D08 -011 Occupant /Tenant: LUCKY BRAND Building Address: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL, SUITE NO. Parcel No.: 6364200010 Property Owner: WEA SOUTHCENTER LLC 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD , LOS ANGELES CA 90025 Use: RETAIL Occupancy Group /Division: M Type of Construction: II -B Automatic Sprinkler System: Provided: Y Required: Y Design Occupant Load: 72 a6e- ‘rig BUILDING OFFICIAL DATE THIS CERTIFICATE TO BE CONSPICUOUSLY POSTED ON THE PREMISES City litf Tukwila Parcel No.: 6364200010 Address: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: Name: LUCKY BRAND Address: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL , TUKWILA WA Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Owner: Name: WEA SOUTHCENTER LLC Address: 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD , LOS ANGELES CA 90025 Phone: Contact Person: Name: JAMES MOORE Address: 833 SE MAIN #242 , PORTLAND OR 97213 Phone: 503 577 -8859 Contractor: Name: HORIZON RETAIL CONST INC Address: 1516 S GREEN BAY RD , RACINE WI 53406 Phone: Contractor License No: HORIZRC072N5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: NEW TENANT IMPROVEMENT doc: IBC -10/06 DEVELOPMENT PERMIT * * continued on next page ** • Permit Number: D08 - 011 Issue Date: 04/21/2008 Permit Expires On: 10/18/2008 Expiration Date: 04/15/2009 Value of Construction: $80,000.00 Fees Collected: $1,814.55 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS /AFA International Building Code Edition: 2006 Type of Construction: IIB Occupancy per IBC: 0019 008 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Water Meter: Permit Center Authorized Signature: construction or the ; f work. Signature: Print Name: doc: IBC -10/06 City a"Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http://www.c.i.tukwila.wa.us Fire Loop Hydrant: N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0 Flood Control Zone: Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y. Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Profit: N Non - Profit: N Water Main Extension: Private: Public: N The granting of this permit does not presume to give authori ty to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating I hereby certify that I have read and ed this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied , whether specified herein or not. i u i kin ho ed t Permit Number: D08 -011 Issue Date: 04/21/2008 Permit Expires On: 10/18/2008 Date: CA iTt V D ign and obtain this development permit. Date: f " R � 1 � �[S b This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. D08 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 • City of Tukwila Parcel No.: 6364200010 Address: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: LUCKY BRAND 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us PERMIT CONDITIONS • Permit Number: D08 -011 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 01/08/2008 Issue Date: 04/21/2008 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design requirements of ASCE 7. 6: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. 7: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 8: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Thkwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 9: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 10: A Certificate of Occupancy shall be issued for this building upon fmal inspection approval by Tukwila building inspector. 11: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof Tukwila Permit Center. 12: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431- 3670). 13: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Thkwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 14: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206- 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 15: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 16: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3 -2.1) 17: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 18: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 19: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 20: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4) 21: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 22: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 23: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.8.1) 24: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 25: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 26: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I ", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 nun). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.5.1) doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us • 27: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 28: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot -candle (11 lux) at the floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 29: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) 30: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding sprinlder heads. (IFC 901.4) 31: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3) 32: All new sprinlder systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by the City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050) 33: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2051. 34: Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2051) 35: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051) 36: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 37: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this project. 38: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 39: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 40: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code. 41: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us • 42: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. 43: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 44: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. doc: Cond -10/06 * *continued on next page ** D08 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. Signature: Print Name: doc: Cond -10/06 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us › /6/44,1 • Date: D08 -011 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 CITY OF TUKWII' Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http: / /www. ci. tukwila. wa. us Site Address: Tenant Name: 1-4,41..c., Property Owners Name: Mailing Address: (R a O [ L �� Company Name: fib Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: Contact Person: 1tc IVA t-t Contact Person: L .( A.3' WY )i�1br�L E -Mail Address: Q:Wpplications\Forms- Applications On Line 3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh tiCr*Ft r City E -Mail Address: No. Building Permit Mechanical Pe Plumbing /Gas Perm Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** Company Name: Lr C.- • cen �r e d Mailing Address: f S �`� cf' . r IA G ' I d Y✓ City Public Works Permit No. (F office use only) King Co Assessor's Tax No.: (J 2 { - t Z' . 1 U Suite Number: IvS 6 S Floor: New Tenant:.... Yes j ..No State Zip CONTACT PERSON - ct when you is ready to be issu Name:,\CAV \.C/S I'Y)cTo IBC Day Telephone: 3 / Mailing Address: Se ' r I tA, r\ 2_ - Por-41 "tt ck 172_ 3 City State Zip E -Mail Address: t—c-, (� tfi,S { elrTer l11 1 1 . 5, COw\-- Fax Number: 5 2_10 - 2403 GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION — (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5)) Mailing Address: cit Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: ARCHITECT OF RECORD -Ail plans be wet stamped by: Architect", of Record. State Zip N � 2 (7 State Zip Day Telephone: ( 141 ^ 6' /400 Fax Number: e ifq '" k; 4( 3 ENGINEER OF RECORD All plans Mist be wet sl roped by Engineer Company Name: +1 ` r sL.k { c,1 Mailing Address: lO / )fJ (;1� (�°j (7 A' 2 (1 ar c\ e . 6 ove.. C,- ci L?4 t City State Zip Day Telephoner 14- - z' ) -( 21 s - 7 s7 Fax Number: 1 ( i ' O "! 4 - 72..q `l Page 1 of 6 BUILDING PERMIT INFO1 &TIUN — 206 - 431 -3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ k Existing Building Valuation: $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): ' T I - ��� t ( - l V 1 ^ mar > ' t, � ti' l rNGc� ' c - f - 0 r I � � c. �r QQ Will there be new rack storage? k ... Yes Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below I at Floor 2r Floor 3ra loot Floors Basement! Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carp Detached Carpo Covered Deck U overed Deck Interior Remodel 1653 Addition to Existing Structure Type of struction per IBC I1 -5 Type of Occupancy per IBC 11 PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Sprinklers : Automatic Fire Alarm Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes No If `yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safe ata Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Q:Wpplications\Forms- Applications On Line\3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bit .. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Compact: Handicap: ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Page 2 of 6 gERLIC WORKS PERMIT INORMATION — 206 -433 -0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): r I . For__ F es 1 (i'i4E -- fb \ALLT / Sc..l ers 0x. , r cc.`- J - 'aow■_ 4o - &l-t— d Water District ❑ ...Tukwila 0... Water District #125 ❑ ... Water Availability Provided Sewer District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right -of -way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right -of -way Use - No Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right -of -way Non Right -of -way ❑ ...Total Cut ❑ ...Total Fill FINANCE INFORMATION Water Meter Refund/Billing: Name: Mailing Address: Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. cubic yards cubic yards ❑...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ ...Cap or Remove Utilities ❑ ...Frontage Improvements ❑...Traffic Control ❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection Irrigation Domestic Water Q: \ApplicationsWomis- Applications On Line U-2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh Call before you Dig: 1- 800 - 424 -5555 ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ .. Pavement Cut ❑ .. Looped Fire Line ❑ .. Highline ❑... ValVue ❑ .. Renton 0... Sewer Availability Provided Septic System: ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply): ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34 ") ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑...Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s) ❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑ ... Hold Harmless — (SAO) 0... Hold Harmless — (ROW) ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... WO # ❑ ...Temporar Water Meter Size.. WO # ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size WO # ❑ ... Sewer Main Extension Public Private ❑ ...Water Main Extension Public Private ❑ .. Right -of -way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right -of -way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ .. Work in Flood Zone ❑ .. Storm Drainage City City ❑ ...Renton ❑ ...Seattle ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑...Deduct Water Meter Size Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) ❑ ...Water ❑ ...Sewer ❑ ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: State Zip Day Telephone: State Zip Page 3 of 6 Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: Qty Unit Type: Qty Boiler /Compressor: Qty Furnace <100K BTU Air Handling Unit >10,000 CFM Fire Damper 0 -3 HP /100,000 BTU Furnace>100K BTU Evaporator Cooler Diffuser 3 -15 HP/500,000 BTU Floor Furnace Ventilation Fan Connected to Single Duct I Thermostat 15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU Suspended/Wail/Floor Mounted Heater Ventilation System Wood /Gas Stove 30 -50 HP/1,750,000 BTU Appliance Vent Hood and Duct Emergency Generator 50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU Repair or Addition to Heat/Refrig/Cooling System Incinerator - Domestic Other Mechanical Equipment Air Handling Unit <10,000 CFM i Incinerator — Comm/Ind MECl AN CAL PERMIT 1 T1€N - 206 =431 -3674 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Mailing Address: Cit State Zip Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: Valuation of Mechanical work (contractor's bid price): $ Scope of Work (please pro de detailed information): 1 ) L Use: Residential: New .... Replacement .... Commercial: New ... Replacement .... Fuel Type: Electric Gas ....0 Other: Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: Q 1Applications1Forms- Applications On Line13.2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Page 4 of 6 • Fixture'Type: Qty. Fixture Type: Qty Fixture Type: Qty Fixture Type: Qty Bathtub or combination bath /shower Drinking fountain or water cooler (per head) Wash fountain Gas piping outlets Bidet Food -waste grinder, commercial Receptor, indirect waste Clothes washer, domestic Floor drain 1 Sinks 44 Dental unit, cuspidor Shower, single head trap Urinals Dishwasher, domestic, with independent drain Lavatory Water Closet Building sewer or trailer park sewer Rain water system — per drain (inside building) Water heater and/or vent Additional medical gas inlets/outlets — six or more Industrial waste pretreatment interceptor, including its trap and vent, except for kitchen type grease interceptors Repair or alteration of water piping and /or water treating equipment Repair or alteration of drainage or vent piping Medical gas piping system serving one to five inlets /outlets for specific gas P1 UMBING AND GAS PIPIN RMIT INFORMATION - 206 -431.0 PLUMBING AND GAS PIPING CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Mailing Address: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: Valuation of Plumbing work (contractor's bid price): $ (V J Valuation of Gas Piping work (contractor's bid price): $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): (, l"(r /CWT I t,)C— I j Building Use (per Int'l Building Code): Occupancy (per Int'l Building Code): Utility Purveyor: Water: Q \Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh Ofxrai".LI e_ M Sewer: city Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Indicate type of plumbing fixtures and /or gas piping outlets being installed and the quantity below: State Zip Page 5 of 6 PERMIT APPLICATION N Date Application Accepted: 01 Q.1Applications\Forms- Applications On Linea -2006 - Permit Apptication.doc Revised: 9 -2006 bh S — Applicable to all permits in this a City li'cation Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER O / J HORIZED AGENT: Signature:a' Print Name:(q,x■A_Cfj Mx f'@-- Ray Telephone: COS' s • b Mailing Address: ?] ca tAn y 4 14Z rt i l „pk a IL at? Date: 1 U • Q State Date Application Expires: 0,4 D`b i, Staff Initials: Zip Page 6 of 6 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Parcel No.: 6364200010 Permit Number: D08 -011 Address: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 01/08/2008 Applicant: LUCKY BRAND Issue Date: Receipt No.: R08 -01249 Payment Amount: $1,101.50 Initials: JEM Payment Date: 04/21/2008 11:37 AM User ID: 1165 Balance: $0.00 Payee: HORIZON RETAIL CONSTRUCTION, INC TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 156369 1,101.50 BUILDING - NONRES 000/322.100 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 000/386.904 RECEIPT Account Code Current Pmts 1,097.00 4.50 Total: $1,101.50 1395 04/21 9710 TOTAL 1101.50 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 04 -21 -2008 RECEIPT NO: R08 -00052 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payee: PRECISION PERMIT SERVICE SET ID: S000000935 SET NAME: LUKCY BRAND SET TRANSACTIONS: Set Member Amount • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: //www. ci. tukwila. wa. us D08 -011 713.05 EL08 -023 143.50 M08 -007 70.97 PG08 -006 29.00 TOTAL: 956.52 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description ELECTRICAL PLAN - NONRES PLAN CHECK - NONRES SET RECEIPT • Payment Date: 01/08/2008 Total Payment: 956.52 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 5323 956.52 TOTAL: 956.52 Account Code Current Pmts 000.345.832.00.0 143.50 000/345.830 813.02 TOTAL: 956.52 6971 01/08 9710 TOTAL 956.52 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: b ) - 7 MI4I Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 7/, p m. Requester: Phone No: I INSPE I O ION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION '0'- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 tid Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Perfryti7 ;let,/ Inspector: 1 ' T INSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid : •300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaLL to schedule reinspection. Receipt Vo.. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Date: Date: Dc earl PERMIT NO. ti Project (t / B� ti � �,}/� Type of Inspection: -, rr r Address: / Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: //� p.m. Requester: Phone No: 6,2 3a ® /163 t� INSPECTION NO. COMMENTS' INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit A il u^�'r1r�s r,Ji 1 he PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION V 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Receipt No.: 'Date: 'Date: /,4 6 7 $6I : REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be p- at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Project: L Type of Inspection: 4 / a Addres :)- 7 iti� // � Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 7/�/ ®� / / (a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION V 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS:` /4 +0 5 itIcA/clicer (Inspector: I Date 7 l , 4 gee ❑ $60EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project: 1C -\i-•- • . cv..t_ Type of Inspection: \ , 'J\ \, Address: (y t.- Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Cc.. Z. . Q$ a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: )% s ,dc7 �...11 .t• C�^ V� INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO (206)431 -36 Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspecto Date � ri $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE E Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: (Date: Projftct: C _ / 9 ,�� 2(e C 6r yp Iyr: Type nspectio � � 11,•9' '? Ad ess Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted; C>!/ 2 °` 61. p.m. Requester: Phon N o ` 3a; /dG j PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Ei Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. D $60 S�.R FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: COMMENTS: rei°h -tr , e!�� b Project: 6 Awn' Type of Inspection: Sub Eed4e Address 2 ,�¢� 6 .7 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted / 3off / lc Requester: Phone No: 9 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit DOCC-al PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION �- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: $66 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Da 6/� a e. Proje t: / 7/ 47 C3�� Type of Inspection: .s ?,6s iteore<4=7/ Address: 2 7/1i/ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. ReqGester: Phone No: ,2 2 -3d/ -Am 5 o no INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 El Approved per applicable codes. r PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 ® Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: • Date: f - 2 ^A� 008.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project: -2 /�', , f ?/19A) Type of Inspection: G(1 , Address: e2 7 a Date Called: a Special Instructions: Date Wanted: ∎„J —/5'0 ° p.m. Requester: Phone 3 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 El Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p/ dtrti rt Or L�441 ccp r(ji/c4 /� Date: 'Jf #0, 4_4s0.0 $58.4(REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior o inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: COMMENTS: TyPe of Inspection: oPi 6. . Address: f // 4' 4/7 4, 6,a ' s — A0 Date Wanted a . :_n /'- d F p.m. Requester: ) ! ' ✓K /UV CJ — 41//WItil 40-(55/,v) — 4 1 4744 44."c--, 1 3/ /;/) Z4 /47. a — 4 /7/144// 4 Projec : ,04 2 /e ,!•'"4% TyPe of Inspection: oPi 6. . Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted a . :_n /'- d F p.m. Requester: Phone No 262 — . ?3/ ..CG IN ION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 8- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. 0 REINSPECTION ' E REQUIR '. Prior o inspection. fee must be p at 6300 Southcente Blvd.. Suit - 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Rece pt No.: 'Date: Project: Z 7i / 3/ / Type ectioo�n: 4)"J Addr ss: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted s 7- d p p.m. Requester: Phone // n No: 36 - 4 6- 3 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. g- (206)431-3670 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: / 9 0 :1-- Inspect r: Date �+ 00 REINSPECTION \ EE RE IRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. R eipt No.: Date: • Project: L ?'(i 5 94 (/ Type of Inspection: f-- 17,9.r77i4/ Address: 62-7 17) A Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: - 7_oP Requester: Phone No: ,44.E _ 3 a1 -/6 y INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit JDPa/ PE IT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION R 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 5 /esti 5- ‘5 ( 4,4 /414.1— ho�,4%.› ❑ .00 REINSPECTION ` EE REQ ED. Prior o inspection, fee must be r : id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project: � L2 to 9 Rr iet-Nl f Type of Inspection: 24- yx i Address: (. 7 vin A Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a .m. L 2 Cr O , .m. Requester: Phone No �, Ca7- O ) id 6 2) INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 1 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. U Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: pA Fr- S 4: I <.s a4- . ak Inspector: , � ' �, Date: `# - 2 / - 28 El $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior o inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Proj ct: Type of Inspection: Address: CoZ. wi A ! I Date Called: Special Instructions: D ate Wanted: a.m. Requester: Phone s 3 vc s - t C) 6 OP, INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION V- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p� 1� Pi•+.'!. i.S f,„. l ( t k COff.in L..A t M de CO «.44i c,' II .7 F, « Pr,,r0 > Inspector: Date: 2/ IFS $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: COMMENTS: I'N Type of Inspection: r , .„„••,. „ V/ /S1- / ..,4'..5 I.. -ai anti rot i..i,/1 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: q 2 /(N ifc No r I- r;/ 1 a I ;r, s41La,,i io Arse t.' 1t Phone No: 2,2 3 7 / a . ) Project: (.4e(e e.,,,/ Type of Inspection: r , .„„••,. „ Address: 0 ,7 S- t. i4e,,, Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: q 2 'S a.m. Requester: PA. c. Phone No: 2,2 3 7 / a . ) INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: — Date: El $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior o inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: f� 1 1 R l 1 1 21 ''440 Ty rg of c Ac Inspection: 1 a 6 llot 7 S.a Address: LL / 1v.7 7_r. f! e o'Ji -' fit /' Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit b o --4.)t( PERMIT NO. INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 ® Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 1 SSc ,› A- see <rr / t/.'714 ( .i1•z Inspecto • - Date: •,_ z 2 El $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: A L-1 . •to -- -- :dam., sJ� 1 iter4:a '- — Project: tVC v Lf ta l2 i 4.1.11 5 Type of Inspection: N A- (-- Address: 6,2 7 Suite #: SC M, - t-c.— Contact Person: Special Instructions: Permits: . Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm : Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: . Occupancy Type: INSPECTION NUMBER Approved per applicable codes. spector: cr, u J5f I' Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 ri Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: I Date: g/ / 08 - DOZ- o%l PERMIT NUMBERS Hrs.: I rs.. N } $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from The City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: L L4 c..141 A eitod 3 eo. o 5 Type of Inspection: / r [ Gr/Ke/ �Q A+t. r i 5tAf i/� Address: 6,a---) Suite # : s , }L L , Co tact Piersor1 I Special Instructions: Phone No.: (94 , . .g - (ft? 4,3 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: .;4.:ifMxM112. INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKINILA FIRE DEPARTMENT +bog -t�11 PERMIT NUMBERS 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 I4 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: oL# s- ,c4c Inspector: Date: 7 /'y/ Hrs.: • n $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: Luck ir Siet Sprinklers: a Type of Inspection: / i j. Address: 642_7 . 7 Suite #: - C , r,-i. �. Contact Person: / Special Instructions: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: •� Permits: Occupancy Type: INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKVVILA FIRE DEPARTMENT PERMIT NUMBERS 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 Approved per applicable codes. 6g c....orrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: L- -,'i ,at, rl1 A .t S 00 i L -e t<I 'Mkw eNv L. Date: -7 /�' 46 Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: / te wl y p►,JD t ,.Type of Inspection: F4 /1iItc, g.Q/�vt--- Address: 627 5, K Suite #: /14 Contact Person: F ids- j3 #h9N /) Special Instructions: Permits: Phone No.: .42 - 368- /gib Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: - Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: !Ws-- flu4egweadagaiSai" 3 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 'bog (..)/ CE3-F-Zot Mori PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tekwila, W. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 Approved per applicable codes. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc Inspector: I , ' /5/2 Date: 4125/08, Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: / 4.01 c'Afett . / Hrs.: n $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: L L r. kv er k ,,id Type of Inspection: ) eMp -Q 1\I ( - 4 -I / 1 1 1 , 1i Address: -� ; . c . n• \r L L Suite #: e ct 4son`. iqti` J Special Instructions: Phone No.: 0Gc) -3c - /n4 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: i INSPECTION NUMBER Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKUVILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Approved per applicable codes. 1/13/06 d os - c� PERMIT NUMBERS 444 Andover Park East. Tukwila. Wa. 98188 206 -575 -4407 cl required prior to approval. COMMENTS: IIghrii O.O u 4 I -c- 44- ADD - k - rvp 1"0 o +iA I N J Inspector: /4 31) Date: ch 7 Hrs.: 'Ili $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department.''lIto schedule a reinspection. T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 h Project: L- L ) Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Type of Inspection: Address: La. Suite #: S . . m q- L f Contact Person: ‘12- Special Instructions: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: 3 INSPECTION NUMBER 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKVVILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 7» -6 s- PERMIT NUMBERS Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: p ., i 14 . .,_ Inspector: V Date: & /-2d/4 Hrs.: n $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: 1 Uc K y g 0 �N Type Inspection: a. ip.4 Hood & Duct: Address: 6 27 Suite #: t ° , 614,4„. Co �tact Person: ff (-'ii-o- :r- >> - ,, �II ", : Special Instructions: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: . •.€cd'�,rr�v> -.rt. ., ;r^.ti,.v INSPECTION NUMBER CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -4407 );;tApproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Srmir - 220(, 11 To / 14 Q 220 & /3zv y� ,o d / / ' ii <-7/c• f V && Inspector: 0.11.14/4) Z- INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Date: 57 f e the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Poe— €m PERMIT NUMBERS LI Corrections required prior to approval. Z - Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 ci Project: �� T ype of Inspection: sf d o Address: 6 9, Suite #: 5-c . f+ ti4 L- L._- Contact Person: CIA() Special Instructions: Pre -Fire: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: ' M.; 4 1 INSPECTION NUMBER 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 V1 -Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: s+7 p "V • . J. Inspector: Date: S` // 2 l8 Hrs.: /14 the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT �a - d 8 - PERMIT NUMBERS Corrections required prior to approval. .00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 azan & ASSOCIATES, INC. June 9, 2008 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING CONST ION TESTING & INSPECTION RECE I�� ' �d IJUN 7000 DEVELOr "w NT Ms. Jaclyn Schneider Horizon Retail Construction 1458 Horizon Blvd Racine, WI 53406 RE: In Process Inspection Report Lucky Brand Jeans Tukwila, WA Dear Ms. Schneider, KA No. 066 -08094 Permit No. D08 -011 Enclosed are copies of the compressive strength test results regarding the above referenced project. If you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact our office at (253) 939 -2500. Respectfully submitted, KRAZAN & ASSOCIATES, INC Kathryn E. Gordon Project Manager Puyallup Division CC: City of Tukwila Offices Serving The Western United States 922 Valley Avenue NW Suite 101 • Puyallup, Washington 98371 • (253) 939 -2500 • Fax: (253) 939 -2556 08094 Break Template I.1 ot.611I LA •OOVNIU\G•, II 1%.•. Project No. 066 -8094 Cyl. Code 80601 Pour Date 5/7/2008 Report No. 21226 Weather Inside Jurisdiction City of Tukwila Permit No. D08 -011 Project Lucky Brand Jeans Location 627 Southcenter Mall Tukwila Client Horizon Retail Construction Inspector Mike Allen Laboratory Data 80601 -1 5/14/2008 80601 -2 6/4/2008 80601 -3 6/4/2008 80601 -4 80601 -5 80601 -6 80601 -7 80601 -7 Remarks Results Reviewed By /lG/_ Codes for Break Types: I�� --((�� .Iii va11Gy nvcnu0 Ivvv, 4.11.111S7 lu 1, r uyallut.o, •vn, QVJ1 1, tiJJ� aJa - LJVV Design Strength 4,000 @ 28 days Engineer Architect Contractor Horizon Construction Field Data CYLINDER REPORT Concrete X Other Supplier Cadman Plant No. 54 Site Mix Mix Air Unit Slump Temp. Temp. Wt. Time Truck# Ticket # % Air (in.) (F) (F) (pcf) 10:46am 259 8838247 4 62 44 Placement Area Location 5 SOG w/ vapor barrier for three slab cutouts. Remarks Placed via wheel barrel, consolidated by hand finish. 2 cubic yards total. Please refer to field report #82510. Date Reviewed Measurement Uncertainties: ASTM C -39 +1- 8% Forth 03101 Revision 3 ERed the Date 5112/04 The Infonnaton provided on this report Is prepared for the exclusive use of the client. This report may not be reproduced In any format without the wrttten permission of the dent and Krozan d.4ssocb Reported Batch Data Design Actual Weights Weights Mix No. 631081 Cem. lbs. F. Ash lbs. BATCH WEIGHTS C. agg. lbs. 1 NOT C. agg. lbs. 2 AVAILABLE C. agg. lbs. 3 Sand lbs. Water lbs. Air Ent. (oz) Other (oz) Other (oz) Other (oz) Other (oz) Water Added on Job (gals.) Field Test Methods X ASTM C143 ASTM C138 X ASTM C1064 ASTM C173 X ASTM C31 ASTM C172 OTHER ASTM C231 Date Specimens Rec'd. Cyl. Test Field Max. Comp. Tested Break Code Date Cure Age Dim. Area C.F. Load Str. (psi) Set # By Type 7 4.01 12.63 68135 5,390 1 MT 28 4.011 12.64 90795 7,180 1 MT 28 4.011 12.64 91475 7,240 1 MT H 1 Laboratory Test Methods X ASTM C39 ASTM C109 ASTM C617 X ASTM C1231 ASTM C780 Other Test Results X Conforming Non - Conforming 1: Cone 2: Cone & Split 3: Cone & Shear 4: Shear 5: Columnar (Split) & ASSOCIATES, INC. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION TESTING & INSPECTION May 16, 2008 RECEIVED KA No. 066 -08094 Ms. Jaclyn Schneider Horizon Retail Construction 1458 Horizon Blvd Racine, WI 53406 RE: In Process Inspection Report Lucky Brand Jeans Tukwila, WA Dear Ms. Schneider, MAY 2 2 2008 COMMUNITY DEVELOPP4ENT Permit No. D08 -011 Enclosed are copies of the compressive strength test results regarding the above referenced project. If you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact our office at (253) 939 -2500. Respectfully submitted, KRAZAN & ASSOCIATES, INC Kathryn E. Gordon Project Manager Puyallup Division CC: City of Tukwila Offices Serving The Western United States 922 Valley Avenue NW Suite 101 • Puyallup. Washington 98371 • (253) 939-2500 • Fax: (253: 939 -2556 08094 Break remplme r razan 6c Mssoclates, inc. uzz valley Avenue NVV, June iui, ruyaiup, vvi, boil /, (13i) USU - 6:iuu "P roject No. 066 -8094 Cyl. Code 80601 Pour Date 5/7/2008 _.......... _ . Report No. 2 1226 Weather Inside Jurisdiction City of Tukwila Permit No. D08 -011 Project Lucky Brand Jeans Location 627 Southcenter Mall Tukwila Client Horizon Retail Construction Field Data CYLINDER REPORT Concrete X Other Supplier Cadman Plant No. 54 Site Mix Mix Air Unit Slump Temp. Temp. Wt. Time Truck# Ticket # % Air (in.) (F) (F) (pcf) 10:46am 259 8838247 4 62 44 Placement Area Location 5" SOG w/ vapor barrier for three slab cutouts. Remarks Placed via wheel barrel, consolidated by hand finish. 2 cubic yards total. Please refer to field report #82510. Inspector Mike Allen Laboratory Data 80601 -1 5/14/2008 80601 -2 6/4/2008 80601 -3 6/4/2008 80601 -4 80601 -5 80601 -6 80601 -7 80601 -7 Remarks Results Reviewed Byy 28 28 H Engineer Architect Contractor Horizon Construction Reported Batch Data Design Strength 4,000 @ 28 days Date Specimens Recd. Design Actual Weights Weights Mix No. 631081 Cem. lbs. F. Ash lbs. BATCH WEIGHTS C. agg. lbs. 1 NOT C. agg. lbs. 2 AVAILABLE C. agg. lbs. 3 Sand lbs. Water lbs. Air Ent. (oz) Other (oz) Other (oz) Other (oz) Other (oz) Water Added on Job (gals.) Date Reviewed Field Test Methods X ASTM C143 ASTM C138 X ASTM C1064 ASTM C173 X ASTM C31 ASTM C172 OTHER ASTM C231 Cyl. Test Field Max. Comp. Tested Break Code Date Cure Age Dim. Area C.F. Load Str. (psi) Set# By Type 7 4.01 12.63 68135 5,390 1 MT 1 1 1 Form 03101 Revision 3 Effective Date 5/12i0c The information provided on this report s prepared for the exclusive use of the client. This report may not he reproduced in any format witi-oct the written permission of the client and Krazan & Assoc Laboratory Test Methods X ASTM C39 ASTM C109 ASTM C617 X ASTM C1231 ASTM C780 Other Codes for Break Types: 1: Cone 2: Cone & Split 3: Cone & Shear 4: Shear 5: Columnar (Split) Measurement Uncertainties: ASTM C - +1 - 8% Test Results 1 Conforming Non- Conformir..r• • WM. ala_d6S7013 1 & ASSOCIATES, INC. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION TESTING & INSPECTION May 16, 2008 KA No. 066 -08094 Permit No. D08 011 Ms. Jaclyn Schneider Horizon Retail Construction 1458 Horizon Blvd Racine, WI 53406 RE: Special Inspection Lucky Brand Jeans Tukwila, WA Dear Ms. Schneider, In accordance with your request and authorization, our firm performed special inspections for the above - referenced project. The inspections were performed by our inspectors from May 6 through May 7, 2008. Copies of our inspector's field reports are attached. Unless otherwise indicated, the structural activities noted on the attached daily field reports were in accordance with the approved project plans and specifications. A guarantee that the contractor has necessarily constructed the structure in full accord with the plans and specifications is neither intended nor implied. If you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact our office at (253) 939 -2500. Respectfully submitted, KRAZAN & ASSOCIATES, INC Kathryn E. Gordon Project Manager Puyallup Division CC: City of Tukwila Offices Serving The Western United States 922 Valley A‘cnue NW Suite 101 • Puyallup. Washington 98371 • (253) 939 -2500 • Fax: 1253) 939 -2556 UN(r)4 DH T.,nuu:r 0 MI OM I(raZaJ1T1 & Associates, Inc. Superintendent /Representative: GEO CkNICAL ENGINEERING • ENVIRONME.N - AL ENGINEERING CONS'RUC "ION TESTNG AND INSPECT ON DATE: S - - 0 8 CONTRACTOR: ND /t an PROJECT #: O G 6 - C7 8 0 9 JURISDICTION: 7 i.✓ilc PROJECT: L vC /c y 23.- »i .s,s' PERMIT #: b06-0// LOCATION: Sp* i & a 7 S. 60 , 7,4.. 4f /i .7i '/ INSPECTOR: /At. A //en KRAZAN PROJECT MANAGER: 7 1 4 f WEATHER: //Isj a"y TEMP: j o 4 />7-941ete 4 . C c 'LV S e Py o x7 co 74— /tire.# 5hI c4-7 oc.f r • re,'" 74 ey6 Pfd c9ie/ ; Ali _ , G/ [� ../.f � 0 • C / � a • Lv ere Cam' -, / cy clfr c/ e mo o ., de, s' t Ir,s "-►'' S r 44. g; // ros• t WO /A Lt / ., 4 /it /r • reZer•rce !y / 1 /21 4 f .4 z. � y C700 e Y. - c - re cesr f , rr • 'edge the cN, • I l/+ J7 1 c% / @)4;$ J;' 74."‘",e241 .1 . P X p�r d74e.9 / o /sVc. 9 . Equipment/Asset Number(s): Technician: l AA Serving the Western United States FIELD REPORT NO: 8 2 415 S .?',- AAS NOT cerforr - ed r ' ;CCCr C.rC° ro "tie cccrc`,ed OICrs. scec:hccticrs• ❑rd reg ulctcr, requlrefe A - -- GEO ENGNEEP:r.0 • Evv aONMENT?L ENGINEERING CcNSTR:.CT'cN TEST NC ANC `NSRECT GN DATE: - 7 ^' 8 PROJECT #: UG 6 - )•9 PROJECT: GideA S LOCATION: Si# 6 z 7 5 KRAZAN PROJECT MANAGER: C -e- OM _564 O S .° 7 , e,r - e j4/ 6f9/7 1e 0/ GLA �i,¢' //1..5/0 • (4/f /re / /ice' for d s,62/1, 41,E s ad/ .3', / 4 , 7ry V eu4 / : ya..�� /9 7 6 Ca ,70.7 4 %Y A % ! 63 8 / a a S r ,0 /g e of fw W h e / / 4 a rre / a/f al Go/rSe / /ei 74 Afy 4 e /1d ,+, s.l . rod- 3" J.0 3 a .4 mss/^ �� Co+�� // � ��e .rr -i/ To � /jar- Q S/ ' 4 G ,7I � !' S . �S 74.. s Sa 4es V d v /05/ P 2 B G/ . � - 74 e - , , */ 2 /z 2 - ,- - Equipment Asset Number(s): man & Associates, Inc. .c e ces' a < ^c A:'ecce , N AS N0 pEr`cr recd r accerdarce •,,.t` he cccrc',ec cars spec.tccncrs. crd - eg - ecurermyts Superintendent /Representative: Technician: CONTRACTOR: Asp / Z G h JURISDICTION: PERMIT #: INSPECTOR: WEATHER: Serving the Western United States FIELD REPORT NO: 8 2 5 10 J)DB -G) // /fl S /We, TEMP: L/V erc" ;tit lit' . & ASSOCIATES, INC. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION TESTING & INSPECTION MalaE,QE VED 'tvIAY 16 2008 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT Ms. Jaclyn Schneider Horizon Retail Construction 1458 Horizon Blvd Racine, WI 53406 RE: Special Inspection Lucky Brand Jeans Tukwila, WA Dear Ms. Schneider, KA No. 066 -08094 Permit No. D08-011 In accordance with your request and authorization, our firm performed special inspections for the above - referenced project. The inspections were performed by our inspectors on May 5, 2008. Copies of our inspector's field reports are attached. Unless otherwise indicated, the structural activities noted on the attached daily field reports were in accordance with the approved project plans and specifications. A guarantee that the contractor has necessarily constructed the structure in full accord with the plans and specifications is neither intended nor implied. If you have any questions, or if we can be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact our office at (253) 939 -2500. Respectfully submitted, KRAZAN & ASSOCIATES, INC t 61 Kathryn E. Gordon Project Manager Puyallup Division CC: City of Tukwila Offices Serving The Western United States 922 ' Valle:. Avenue NW Suite If)! • Puyallup. Washington 98371 • (253)939-250C n FaX 7 X3)939 -2536 ••4■4 JF4 rnnp■atc 45......u...=1( 8, Associates, Inc CEO ENciNEEINc: • EviRo: E-J:=NEE:Nc CoNs-Ruc rEsT,NG AND ks PERMIT #: 400 DATE. S7572eZ el PROJECT #: PROJECT: hiek eiL - eN/ INSPECTOR: ,......416,4c.7 Jr,- WEATHER: TEMP: 7 KRAZAN PROJECT MANAGER: .5.11. LOCATION:. 1 , 27 FIELD REPORT NO: 8 (-1 1. fe' CONTRACTOR: hle,rigap, JURISDICTION: ;L:cleigidet.. 1,441- a7 5 ile_ as reee.es/ed ...e./ ... s l ___ - 4,-1,/ ..,* ... _ .e..■ Ar _ / etitd Zel'eAvi /dee 1 ,fa/ !LAP! i . /-'" 42 _'. - .f' / r, ■..e.// AG, / of/. / IV . MALP 111 97fi l MZ21 41 Equipment/Asset Number(s): re cest of rny . 4^cwedge. The cc Superintendent/Rewesentative: PS N0 :::erfcrr r. cccoraorce te prc..ed ccrs scec' • Tech Serving the Western United States rs arc: - eguc+cr/ -eautre,r*-er—s. • February 29, 2008 Mr. Allen Johannessen City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter Blvd., # 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Project: Lucky Brand Jeans Southcenter Mall 627 Southcenter Mall Tukwila, WA 98188 Reference: Development Application D08 -011 Dear Mr. Johannessen, The following are responses to your review dated February 4 2008: 1. Drinking fountains shall be required where the occupant load exceeds 30. Drinking fountains shall meet barrier free requirements. Please provide at least one drinking fountain.. Drinking fountain added, See attached revised plans (Sheet FF.1) 2. Please provide specifications with details that meet ASCE standards for the new suspended ceiling. Identify type of perimeter supporting enclosure angle. Ceiling details added, See attached revised plans (sheet A2.1) 3. Provide a floor plan that identifies means of egress emergency lighting along the common path of travel to required exits. Emergency lighting shall meet means of egress illumination requirements. See attached revised plans (sheet CS 2) 4. Show an 18" vertical grab bar for accessible toilet. Vertical bar added, See attached revised plans (sheets FF.1 & A5.5) If you have any questions about the above responses, please feel free to me at (949) 698 -1414. Sincerely, Little Matthew Walsh 1901 Newport Boulevard. Slits 396 Costa Mesa. CA 92527 Tclephore: 949 6917.1 490 Fax. 940 698. 1 4 33 3,e/c S • LITTL DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING F February 6, 2008 James Moore 833 SE Main, #242 Portland, OR 97213 RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Development Application Number D08 -011 Lucky Brand — 627 Southcenter Mall Dear Mr. Moore, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building Department. At this time the Building, Fire and Public Works Departments have no comments. Building Department: Allen Johannessen, at 206 - 433 -7163 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans, specifications and /or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be acce ' ted throu - h the mail or b a messen ' er service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator encl City of Tukwila Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director [6- xc: File No. D08 -011 P:\Permit Center \Correction Letters \2008\D08 -011 Correction Ltr #1.DOC wer • • Jim Haggerton, Mayor 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Building Division Review Memo • • Date: February 4, 2008 Project Name: Lucky Brand Permit #: D08 -011 Plan Review: Allen Johannessen, Plans Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and /or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet stamped, not copied.) 1. Drinking fountains shall be required where the occupant load exceeds 30. Drinking fountains shall meet barrier free requirements. Please provide for at least one drinking fountain. (IBC 2903.4.1, 2903.4.2 & 2003 ANSI 305) 2. Please provide specifications with details that meet ASCE standards for the new suspended ceiling. Identify type of perimeter supporting enclosure angle (typically 2 "). (ASCE Standards 9.6.2.6.2.2.) 3. Provide a floor plan that identifies means of egress emergency lighting along the common path of travel to required exits. Emergency lighting shall meet means of egress illumination requirements. (IBC Section 1006, Section 1016 & 1025.8) 4. Please provide four complete sets with all sheets combined for the new revisions. 5. Show an 18" vertical grab bar for the accessible toilet. (2003 ANSI 604.5.1) Tukwila Building Division II Allen Johannessen, Plan Examiner Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206 -431- 3670. No further comments at this time. Jennifer Marshall - Lucky Brand Jeans From: "Rob Humphrey" <rob @fasterpermits.com> To: <jmarshall @ci.tukwila.wa.us> Date: 01/23/2008 8:44 AM Subject: Lucky Brand Jeans Permits PermitNumber D08 -011 M08 -007 PG08 -006 EL08 -023 Jennifer, Our client had asked us to submit revised plans for this project, which resulted in changing the review status to "on hold ". They have since changed back to the original plan that is currently submitted and in your possession. Can you please place the plan review status back to "under review'? Please reply when this has been completed. Were any checksheets written for any of the reviews prior to this request? Please let me know if you require anything further. Kindest regards, ROB HUMPHREY I Owner FASTER PERMITS rob @fasterpermits.com www.fasterpermits.com 833 SE Main Street # 242 Portland OR 97214 503- 320 -5030 503 - 296 -2630 fax • • "Forgiveness is the fragrance that the violet sheds on the heel that has crushed it." - Mark Twain No virus found in this outgoing message. Checked by AVG Free Edition. Version: 7.5.516 / Virus Database: 269.19.7/1234 - Release Date: 1/20/2008 2:15 PM Page 1 of 1 file: / /C:\ Documents %20and %20Settings \j ennifer -m\ Local %20Settings \Temp\XPGrpWis... 01/23/2008 1.3.08 Tukwila Building Division/Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Bl, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Tenant improvement permit for Lucky Brand Jeans, Tukwila Permit No. 1 -- o ( is issued subject to the following condition: Final inspection approval of this permit and approval of occupancy for the herein named tenant space will not be issued until the "shell" Building Permit No. D06 -147 has received final inspection approval from the Building Division. r' T This condition is hereby acknowledged by: ' Acknowledgement to be signed by the responsible officer of the tenant • Print Name: eve, Title Tenant Project Manager Tenant Name: Lucky Brands Jeans Kind of Fixture Fixture Units No. of Fixtures Total Fixture Units Public Private Public Private Bathtub and Shower 4 4 Shower, per head 2 2 Dishwasher 2 2 Drinking fountain (each head) 1 .5 Hose bibb (interior) 2.5 2.5 Clotheswasher or laundry tub 4 2 Sink, bar or lavatory 2 1 ' ,. Sink, Clinic flushing 8 8 Sink, kitchen 3 2 Sink, other (service) 3 1.5 Sink, wash fountain, circle spray 4 3 Urinal, flush valve, 1 GPF 5 2 Urinal, flush valve, >1 GPF 6 2 Urinal, waterless 0 0 Water closet, tank or valve, 1.6 GPF 6 3 j CO Water closet, tank or valve, >1.6 GPF 8 4 rell King County Department of Natural Resources and Parks Wastewater Treatment Division Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification • To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or change of use of existing connections. • This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing sewer connections within five years of disconnect. Please Print or Type (o21 So c.te.A:w �J 1 Stree I Address fry; a City t-Ut wner� r Subdivision Name Lot # Subdiv. # Block # Building Name (if applicable) (S ) -- ) 4 6 44S Owner's Phone Number (with Area Code) ame r State ZIP Property Contact Phone Number (with Area Code) Owner's Mailing Address I kj, I Skak tic A. Fixture Uniis Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Units Total Fixture Units Residential Customer Equivalent (RCE) 20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE Total No. of Fixture Units = 1058 (Rev. 9/07) 20 RCE Property Tax ID # Party to be Billed (if different from owner) City or Sewer District Date of Connection Side Sewer Permit # Please report any demolitions of pre - existing building on this property. Credit for a demolition may be given under some circumstances. Demolition of pre- existing building? ❑ Yes ❑ No Was building on Sanitary Sewer? ❑ Yes ❑ No Was Sewer connected before 2/1/90? ❑ Yes ❑ No Sewer disconnect date: Type of building demolished? Request to apply demolition credit to multiple buildings? ❑ Yes ❑ No B. Other Wastewater Flow (in addition to Fixture Units identified in Section A) Type of Facility /Process: Estimated Wastewater Discharge: Gallons /days Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE): 187 gallons per day equals 1.0 RCE Total Discharge (gal /day) __ 187 C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents: (add A & B) A B RCE RCE RE CITY OF TUKKWILA JAN 0 8 2008 PEHMI) CENT -ou Pursuant to King County Code 28.84, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities shall be subject to a capacity charge. The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council at a rate per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for new sewer customers. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. Questions regarding the capacity charge or this form should be referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at 206 - 684 -1740. I certify that the information given is correct. I understand that the capacity charge levied will be based on this information and any deviation will require resubmission of corrected a 1 : for determination of a revised capacity charge. Signature of Owner /Representative ''!. CG1 4 A Date I ' ' 0 Print Name of Owner /Representative k �C-'S i i I t�(,� ! I White - Kino County Yellow - Local Sewer Aaencv Pink - Sewer Customer . �bw ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08 -011 PROJECT NAME: LUCKY BRAND SITE ADDRESS: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 DATE: 03 -07 -08 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: g Division Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete In Comments: 4111 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete n Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Structural Review Required APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved n Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: n Planning Division Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 03-11 -08 Not Applicable n No further Review Required DATE: DATE: DUE DATE: 04-08-08 Not Approved (attach comments) n Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: � PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08 -011 DATE: 01 -08 -08 PROJECT NAME: LUCKY BRAND SITE ADDRESS: 627 SOUTHCENTER MALI X Original Plan Submittal Public Work Response to Correction Letter # DEPARTMENTS: g i Buil ing Division 51( ,dUljC/ F ire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 Incomplete n Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued PMning Division Permit Coordinator n DUE DATE: 01-10-08 Not Applicable n Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: TUES/THURS ROU ING: Please Route Structural Review Required n No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DATE: DUE DATE: 02-07-08 Approved n Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) ►f Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg r Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: &,./ • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: - ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Er Response to Correction Letter # I ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: LLL ck y — 6ra n et Jeq n .s Project Address: G, Q7 &Gc 7 i n ,1- th4 II Tt ktui / IDA X98-/k, Contact Person: / afhei 1.04 /511 Phone Number: g' - 4,9k — l ` OO Summary of Revision: / SPA el tta e.2 e /7 4 4 �7 ✓ P SheetNumber(s): CS.4 1: F.1 An.h - A0.4 > P11,0 A2..6 A2,t A3v -As.C, "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revis including date of rev A4..45 -d 4. .2 TY1 L . � Au • L S F.1 - SP. 8 • r _ Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Permits Plus on 151 lapplications\fotms- applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 R Plan Check/Permit Number: Dog —6 // Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director 4 �. 1 MAR 0 7 2 008 osgm,T r+C1 ,TrQ License Information License HORIZRC072N5 Licensee Name HORIZON RETAIL CONST INC Licensee Type CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR UBI 601483044 Ind. Ins. Account Id Business Type CORPORATION Address 1 1458 HORIZON BLVD Address 2 City RACINE County OUT OF STATE State WI Zip 53406 Phone 2626386000 Status ACTIVE Specialty 1 GENERAL Specialty 2 UNUSED Effective Date 8/25/1993 Expiration Date 4/15/2009 Suspend Date Separation Date Parent Company Previous License Next License Associated License Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date HENDERSEN, JON E 01/01/1980 GUSTIN, ROBERT L 01/01/1980 HENDERSON, JON E 01/01/1980 JAWORT, DAN AGENT 01/01/1980 Look Up a Contractor, Electrii or Plumber License Detail Washington State Department of Labor and Industries General/Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. • Bond Information Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date Page 1 of 2 https: // fortress. wa. gov /lni/bbip /printer.aspx ?License= HORIZRC072N5 04/21/2008 AGENCY CODE REVIEW ELEVATION MARKER HEIGHT TYPE O ROOM TAG SPACE #1535 LEVEL 1 OF 3 ; ^,`:'. fh�9&�'S #a'.3..2°•,S�:Y�itY,T�! BUILDING CODE ELECTRICAL CODE MECHANICAL CODE PLUMBING CODE FIRE CODE ACCESSIBILITY CODE ENERGY CONSERVATIO LOCAL ORDINANCES ABBREVIATIONS ACCESSORY ACOUSTIC ALUMINUM ARCHITECT AT BOARD CABINET CEILING CENTERLINE CERAMIC TILE COLUMN CONCRETE DETAIL DIMENSION DOOR DOWN DRAWING EACH ELEVATION EMERGENCY ENGINEER EXHAUST EXISTING FINISH Fl OOR FIRE RATED IBC 2006 NEC 2006 IMC 2006 UPC 2006 IFC 2006 Chapter 11 IBC Energy Code 2006 www.ci.tukwila.wa.us ACC ACST ADJ ARCH BD CAB CLG CL CT COL CONC DET DIM DR DN DWG EA EL POWER EM ENGR EXH EXIST. FIN FL I-H GYPSUM GYP GYPSUM WALL BOARD GWB HANDICAPPED HDCP HARDWARE HDW HOLLOW METAL HM HOT WATER HEATER HWH VENDOR NOTES INCH IN FORMATION INSULATED, INSULATION INTERIOR LAVATORY LANDLORD IN INFO INSUL INT LAV LL MAINTENANCE MAINT MANUFACTURER MFR MAXIMUM MAX MECHANICAL MECH METAL MTL NOT IN CONTRACT NIC NOT TO SCALE NTS NUMBER #,NO NOT APPLICABLE N/A ON CENTER OC PAINTED PTD PANEL PNL REQUIRED REQD ROOM RM ROUGH OPENING RO SCHEDULE SCHED SECTION SECT SPECIFICATION SPEC SUSPENDED CEILING SUSP TYPICAL TYP VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VCT VERIFY IN FIELD VIF WIRE MANAGEMENT GROMMET WMG 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE DELIVERY (DATE AND TIME) AND INSTALLATION OF ALL PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BY THE LISTED VENDORS, WHERE APPLICABLE. 2. ALL VENDORS SHALL VERIFY DATE OF DELIVERY WITH CONTRACTOR UPON RECEIPT OF AN APPROVED PURCHASE ORDER FROM LUCKY BRAND. SEE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX, 3. IT IS THE VENDOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO INSURE THAT THEIR MATERIALS OR FIXTURES ARE DELIVERED TO THE JOBSITE UNDAMAGED. IN THE EVENT THAT THE DAMAGED OCCURS DURING SHIPPING, THE VENDORS SHALL IMMIDIATELY REPLACE ALL DAMAGED MATERIALS OR FIXTURES AT NO COST TO THE LUCKY BRAND OR THE CONTRACTOR. ALL CLAIMS MADE FOR DAMAGES DURING SHIPPING WILL MADE BY THE VENDOR DIRECTLY WITH THE SHIPPING AGENT. 4. UPON DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE VENDOR SUPPLIED PRODUCTS, IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO MAINTAIN THE ITEM IN LIKE NEW CONDITION UNTIL STORE TURNOVER. 5. UPON COMPLETION OF THE CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY LUCKY BRAND MANAGER. LUCKY SECURITY WILL REPLACE EXISTING CORES WITH BEST CYLINDERS. 6. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INVENTORY THE LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS UPON RECEIPT OF SHIPMENT FROM LIGHTING VENDOR. SHOULD ANY INACCURACIES OR DAMAGED ON SHIPMENT OCCUR, THE CONTRACTOR MUST CONTACT THE LIGHTING VENDOR. UPON ACCEPTANCE OF SHIPMENT, LIGHTING FIXTURES ARE THE RESPONSIBILTY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF WATER DISPENSER, SEE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX AND VENDOR DIRECTORY. 8. FIREMASTER SHALL PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AS REQUIRED BY THE GOVERNING FIRE AUTHORITY. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE INSTALLATION. SYMBOLS TENANT IMPROVEMENT SOUTHCENTER MALL SPACE #1535 627 SOUTHCENTER MALL SEATTLE, WA 98188 -2888 BID SET - 02/29/08 DO NOT PERMIT /LANDLORD BID SETS FOR CONSTRUCTION: ALL CONSTRUCTION SHOULD FOLLOW THE CONSTRUCTION SET ONLY INCLUDING ALL COMMENTS BY LANDLORD'S MARKUPS, UNLESS DIRECTED BY OWNER OWNER'S VENDORS SECURITY: ADT -LIZ CLAIBORNE - SECURITY 1 CLAIBORNE AVENUE BERGEN, NJ 07047 CONTACT: MAX LUCIANO PH: (201) 295 -6267 TELECOMMUNICATIONS: . LIZ CLAIBORNE TELECOMMUNICATIONS 1 CLAIBORNE AVENUE BERGEN, NJ 07047 CONTACT: PAUL SULSE PH: (201) 295 -7770 HELP DESK: LIZ CLAIBORNE HELP DESK 1 CLAIBORNE AVENUE BERGEN, NJ 07047 CONTACT: 24 HOUR STAFF PH: (201) 295 -7878 INFORMATION TECH: LIZ CLAIBORNE IT (EMERGENCY ONLY) 1 CLAIBORNE AVENUE BERGEN, NJ 07047 CONTACT: TAHSEEN BUKHARI PH: (201) 295 -6132 CELL: (201) 481 -7915 PROJECT DIRECTORY 0 LANDLORD/ DEVELOPER WESTFIELD, CORP. 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD., 14TH FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CA 90025 CONTACT: JOSH KIMMEL PH: (310) 478.4456 / (310) 893.4761 EM: JKIMMEL @WESTFIELD.COM / SBURNHAM @WESTFIELD.COM MALL MANAGEMENT : SOUTHCENTER MALL 633 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA CONTACT: RON HOPKINS PH: (206) 246.0423 LUCKY BRAND JEANS 2516 - 49th STREET VERNON, CA 90058 DESIGN MANAGER: AMBER LU TEL: (323) 282 -2505 LIZ CLAIBORNE CONSTRUCTION DEPARTMENT 3340 LEONIS BLVD VERNON, CA 90058 CONTACT: VICTOR SCHLAGER PH: 714.348.2018 LOCATION PLAN "z. MUSIC: DMX MUSIC 900 EAST PINE ST. SEATTLE, WA 98122 CONTACT: ELLEN WAHLE PH: (508) 439 -5034 FX :(508) 393 -5137 MILLWORK: A HIGH COUNTRY MILLWORK 4076 SPECIALTY PLACE LONGMONT, CO 80504 CONTACT: GARY JOHNSTON PH: (303) 532 -2587 MILLWORK: B DOGS WOOD SHOP 13th STREET 12398 SUITE A Yucaipa, CA 92399 CONTACT: GLENN HOLDEN PH: (909) 797.5111 FX: (909) 797.1751 SIGNAGE: SIGNTECH ELECTRICAL ADVERTISING, INC. 4444 FEDERAL BLVD. SAN DIEGO, CA 92102 CONTACT: CORKY SCHAUER PH: 619.527.6100 FAX: 866.851.0447 DRAWING COPIES: PLAN EXPRESS 3003 AIRWAY BLVD. SUITE 2145 MEMPHIS, TN 38131 -0632 CONTACT: PH: (800) 752 -6390 WEB: www.planexpress.net E -MAIL: order @planexpress.net LIGHTING: CAPITAL LIGHTING 270 LOCUST STREET HARTFORD, CT 06141 CONTACT: SIMON ATKINSON PH: (800) 688 -1230 - EXT. 2351 FX: (860) 560 -8315 SHELVING: PIPP MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEMS INC. 2966 WILSON DRIVE NW GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49534 TEL: 616.988.4074 FAX: 616.791.9916 WWW.Pippmobile.com <httpi /www.pippmobile.com /> CONTACT: JOHN RITTER NOTE: ALL BIDDER INQUIRIES ARE TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR DIRECTLY. BIDDERS ARE NOT TO CONTACT THE OWNER. dog LITTLE DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 WESTPARK DRIVE CHARLOTTE, NC 28217 ARCHITECT OF RECORD: JOHN CLIFFORD KOMISIN PROJECT MANAGER: MATTHEW WALSH PH: (949) 698 -1400 FX: (949) 698 -1433 HIRSCH ENGINEERING ELIAS MENDEZ 7077 ORANGEWOOD AVE. Suite 211 GARDEN GROVE, CA 92841 Tel. (714)893 -6157 x 237 Fax (714)894 -7294 BUILDING DIVISION 6300 SOUTHCENTER BLVD., #100 TUKWILA, WA 98188 PH: (206) 431.3670 WWW.CI.TUKWILA.WA.US FIRE DEPARMENT TUKWILA FIRE PREVENTION 444 ANDOVER PARK EAST TUKWILA, WA 98188 PH:(206) 575.4404 No changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. NOTE. Revisions wiii require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees HE - SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: e Mechanical St Electrical Plumbing El(Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDJN 3 PiVISICN LUCKY BRAND JEANS SPACE #1535 GENERAL NOTES FILE COP Permit No Filar review approval is subject to errors and omission3. Approval of construe documents does not authorize the violation of any adopted code or ordinance. Receipt of approved Field is : ' ' edged: By ,�. Date:, : Z : 07" City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1. REFER TO OWNER SUPPLIED MATERIAL SCHEDULE ISSUED AT THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. 2. SCHEDULE CANNOT BE ALTERED BY GC UNLESS REVIEWED & APPROVED BY THE LUCKY BRAND DIRECTOR OF CONSTRUCTION. 3. WITHIN TWO (2) DAYS OF START OF CONSTRUCTION, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE TENANT AND ARCHITECT: A DIMENSIONAL SKETCH SHOWING ANY EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS WHICH CONFICT WITH THE CONTRACT. IF ARCHITECT IS NOT NOTIFIED WITHIN THIS PERIOD OF ANY CHANGE ORDERS REQUIRED DUE TO EXISTING CONDITIONS. IT SHALL BECOME THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. THE CONTRACT AMOUNT WILL NOT BE ADJUSTED FOR THESE ISSUES. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND ACKNOWLEDGE RECIEPT OF THE TENANT CONSTRUCTION MANUAL AND SHALL BECOME FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONSTRUCTION RULES AND PROCEDURES AS SET FORTH BY THE LANDLORD AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIIES PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. WORK REQUIRED TO TAKE PLACE AT NIGHT OR DURING OFF HOURS SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH THE LANDLORD'S REPRESENTATIVE AND ITS COST TO BE INCLUDED IN THE BID. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING MALL FINISHES THAT ARE TO REMAIN. 5. INSURANCE CERTIFICATES, LIST OF SUBCONTRACORS AND BUILDING PERMITS MUST BE COPIED AND FILED WITH THE TENANT COORDINATOR PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. 6. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS MUST NOTIFY THE TENANT COORDINATOR AT LEAST 48 HOURS PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK. 7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT A COMPLETE WORK SCHEDULE TO THE ARCHITECT, OWNER AND THE LANDLORD CONTACT BEFORE CONSTRUCTION BEGINS. 8. THERE SHALL BE A PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ATTENDED BY THE TENANT COORDINATOR, TENANT CONTRACTOR AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR, AND APPROPRIATE SUBCONTRACTORS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK. 9. IF ANY CONFLICTS OR DISCREPANCIES EXIST WITHIN THESE DRAWINGS, THE CONTRACTOR IS TO NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND UNLESS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE IN WRITING, ASSUME THE MORE EXTREME CONDITION APPLIES. 10. DO NOT USE PERMIT /LANDLORD BID SETS FOR CONSTRUCTION: ALL CONSTRUCTION SHOULD FOLLOW THE CONSTRUCTION SET ONLY INCLUDING ALL COMMENTS BY LANDLORD'S MARKUPS, UNLESS DIRECTED BY OWNER. 11. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND OF THE VARIOUS TRADES UNDER HIS CONTRACT. 12. AIA DOCUMENTS A201 & A101 (LATEST EDITION) SHALL APPLY TO ALL WORK AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETION OF THIS PROJECT. 13. THE CONTRACTOR MUST COMPREHEND AND COMPLY WITH THE NATURE, LOCATION, GENERAL CONDITIONS AND LOCAL CONDITIONS INCLUDING THOSE BEARING UPON TRANSPORTATION CODES AND ORDINANCES, DISPOSAL, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS, AVAILABILITY OF LABOR, TYPE OF PAYMENT AND FACILITIES REQUIRED TO DO SO PROPERLY. 14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT FOR, OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, FEES AND LICENSES REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK. A COPY OF SUCH PERMITS SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE NOTICES AND PAY FOR INSPECTIONS AND TESTS. 15. THE WORK SHALL BE LAID OUT FROM DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ONLY. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL WORK FROM MOST RECENT DRAWINGS SUPPLIED BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT. 16. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS MUST BE LICENSED IN THE STATE IN WHICH THIS PROJECT IS LOCATED, AND CONTRACTORS OBTAINING PERMITS SHALL HAVE A CITY BUSINESS LICENSE, OR AS REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT. 17. REFER TO THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FUTURE INFORMATION. 18. ALL SUSPENDED GWB OR ACOUSTICAL TILE OR WOOD CEILINGS OVER 144 SQUARE FEET IN AREA SURROUNDED BY WALLS ATTACHED TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE, OR ANY LAY -IN PANEL CEILING SURROUNDED BY WALLS NOT ATTACHED TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE MUST BE LATERALLY BRACED AND INCLUDE COMPRESSION STRUTS. THE HORIZONTAL RESTRAINT POINTS SHALL BE PLACED 12' -0" ON CENTER, WITH THE FIRST POINT AT 6-0" FROM EACH WALL. PERIMETER WIRES TERMINATE 8" OUT FROM FACE OF WALLS. WIRES SHALL BE SPACED A MINIMUM OF 6" FROM ALL HORIZONTAL PIPING OR DUCTWORK THAT IS NOT PROVIDED WITH BRACING RESTRAINTS FOR HORIZONTAL FORCES. BRACING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE GRID AND TO THE STRUCTURE WITH A MINIMUM OF THREE TURNS, TO SUPPORT A DESIGN LOAD OF 200 POUNDS WITH A SAFETY FACTOR OF 2. ATTACHED EACH LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLED IN ACOUSTIC TILE OR SUPPORTED BY AN INTERMEDIATE OR HEAVY DUTY CEILING SYSTEM WITH 12 GAUGE WIRE TO THE GRID WITHIN 3" OF EACH CORNER OF THE FRAME. EACH FIXTURE WEIGHING LESS THAN 56 POUNDS SHALL ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE W/ TWO 12 GAUGE SLACK WIRES CONNECTED TO FIXTURE HOUSING. EACH FIXTURE WEIGHING 56 POUNDS OR MORE SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. PER UBC STANDARD 47 -18 AND ICBO REPORT #4071 "METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY -IN PANEL CEILINGS ". VERIFY WITH LANDLORD. LANDLORD NOTES: 1. TENANT CONTRACTOR MUST HAVE COPIES OF LANDLORD APPROVED DRAWINGS FOR PRE CONSTRUCTION MEETING AND ON SITE AT ALL TIMES. 2. BIDDERS TO CONTACT MALL MANAGEMENT FOR COPIES OF MALL RULES & REGULATIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING PROJECT. TENANT IS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE SURVEY OF ENTIRE PREMISES PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. ANY VARIANCE BETWEEN THESE APPROVED DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS WILL BE TENANT RESPONSIBILITY. 3. THIS DRAWING APPROVAL IS CONTINGENT OF COMMENTS IN PRELIMINARY DESIGN APPROVAL AND ARE TO BE CONSIDERED PART OF THIS SET EVEN IF COMMENTS ARE NOT PRESENT IN FINAL WORKING DRAWINGS . DRAWING INDEX ARCHITECTURAL CS.1 COVER SHEET CS.2 CODE AND EGRESS PLAN CS.3 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX CS.4 ACCESSIBILITY NOTES FF.1 FIXTURE PLAN A0.0 PERSPECTIVES A0.1 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS A0.2 DOOR DETAILS A0.3 FINISH SCHEDULE & FINISH NOTES A0.4 MATERIAL FINISHES & MOLDING PROFILES A1.0 FLOOR PLAN A2.0 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A2.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN DETAILS A3.0 FLOOR PATTERN PLAN A4.0 STOREFRONT PLAN, ELEVATIONS & D ETAILS A4.1 STOREFRONT DETAILS 1 A4.2 STOREFRONT SIGNAGE AND DETAILS A5.0 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A5.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A5.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A5.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A5.4 FITTING ROOM ELEVATIONS A5.5 FITTING RM, TOILET, & STOCK ROOM PLAN & ELEVATIONS A5.6 STOCKROOM SHELVING DE A L A6.0 A6.1 A6.2 ML.1 ML.2 SP.1 SP.2 SP.3 SP.4 SP.5 SP.6 SP.7 SP.8 SP.9 ENGINEERING M1.0 MECHANICAL PLAN M1.1 MECHANICAL 3D VIEW M2.0 GENERAL NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS, CALCULATIONS, AND DETAILS E1.0 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E1.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING COMPLIANCE FORMS E2.0 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E3.0 DATA CLOSET PLAN E4.0 ELECTRICAL PANELS AND RISER DIAGRAM E5.0 SPECIFICATIONS E6.0 FIRE ALARM PLAN P1.0 DETAILS - BASE AND CROWN DETAILS - SALES FLOOR COLUMNS BUILDING DETAILS MILLWORK DETAILS MILLWORK DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING PLAN REVIEWED FOR APPROVE C° ® VED a MAR 21 NOB 01 Ibloile P2.0 PIPING DIAGRAMS, DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS LUCKY BRAND USES A PRINTING DEVICE FOR THIS PROJECT THAT ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW THE DRAWINGS AND ORDER PRINTS ONLINE. PLAN EXPRESS ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW THE DRAWINGS ONLINE WITH A PAN AND ZOOM FEATURES, USING STANDARD WEB BROWSER SUCH AS INTERNET EXPLORER. ANYONE FROM THE TEAM CAN ORDER DRAWINGS PRINTED DIRECTLY FROM PLAN EXPRESS. PLAN EXPRESS WILL PRINT THE REQUESTED DRAWINGS AND SHIP THEM OUT USING FEDEX TO ANY LOCATION IN THE U.S. THE CUT OFF TIME IS 8:00 P.M. TO OPEN AN ACCOUNT, CALL (8 -5) 800 -752 -6390 OR USE A CREDIT CARD FOR PLAN ORDERS. SEE PROJECT DIRECTORY FOR AN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. VICINITY MAP •. 5 . 12 .^.d r4 oh 5.'s4 - DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL` CONSULTING 5815 .Westpark Drive .. Charlotte, NC 28217 www.IittleonIine.corn ! !' r d anti,v .7i ;;:! ::%r , own air the p;r.;; n/ i 2.'i ,' Diversified Ar'c hiii=f'.!lrl! l.. ii %,J'u/th.'1`. i .b, R; ii??!/serfio , i t l'.' ; {{ of r?t/ ;Pr N.rP ,, ;!i ... n.• a1.y ?ctzt: arrLierrr t m/V%<u, ,r ;: ,ci! fog r1.: 8746 1;,. O Little 2007 JOHN C. KOWSI STATE OFW'ASH'113 i D': CLIENT NAME c'7 DUNGAREES roo roucx �ro n�i? r , . PROJECT NAME MPW DRAWN BY BJS PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER 12/21 /07 RE"" - CITY OF TUKVVILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE COVER SHEET PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE .SHEET NO. CS.1 DATE 0 Ui cc tr o PLUMBING FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS METHOD OF COMPLIANCE: i REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS LAVATORIES: WATER CLOSET: 1 PER 750 OCCUPANTS 1 PER 500 OCCUPANTS (1) REQUIRED: ACCESSIBLE UNISEX RESTROOM (1) PROVIDED: ACCESSIBLE UNISEX RESTROOM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT METHOD OF COMPLIANCE: REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, SERVICE SYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT METHOD OF COMPLIANCE: REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS BRIEF DESCRIPTION : LUCKY BRAND JEANS STORE Lucky Brand Jeans designs and produces denim, sportswear, knits, wovens, outerwear, T- shirts and active wear. Additional Lucky Brand licensed products include swimwear and accessories for men and women. The Lucky Brand collections are carried at better department and specialty stores, and at over 110 company -owned stores nationwide and three internationally. CONSTRUCTION TYPE NEW RENOVATION TYPE 2B, NON - COMBUSTIBLE FULLY SPRINKLERED LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS EMERGENCY LIGHTING: ❑ No EXIT SIGNS: ❑ No FIRE ALARM: ❑ No SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS: ❑ No PANIC HARDWARE: ❑ No OCCUPANCY GROUP EXISTING BUILDING NE TEN • = M = CHANTILE (M) OCCUPANT LOAD TOTAL FLOOR AREA: 2337 SQ. FT. SALES AREA: 2104 S.F. / 30 SF PER PERSON STOCKROOM / SUPPORT AREAS: 233 S.F. / 300 ■ Yes • Yes O Yes • Yes • Yes 0 1 = 71 PER PERSON = TOTAL OCCUPANTS SALES AREA = 71 TOTAL OCCUPANTS STOREROOM AREA = 1 TOTAL OCCUPANTS: 72 -_ i r ..ice : 1 EXIT REQUIREMENTS NUMBER AND ARRANGEMENT OF EXITS (1 EXIT PER 50 OCCUPANTS TABLE 1004 2.1) FLOOR, ROOM OR SPACE DESIGNATION MINIMUM NUMBER OF EXITS TRAVEL DISTANCE ARRANGEMENT MEANS OF EGRESS REQUIRED SHOWN ON PLANS ALLOWABLE TRAVEL DISTANCE W /SPRINKLER (TABLE 1004.2.4) DEAD END LIMIT REQUIRED DISTANCE BETWEEN EXIT DOORS ACTUAL STRAIGHT LINE DISTANCE BETWEEN EXITS 1st Floor 2 2 250' 20' DISTANCE BETWEEN EXfTS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE DIAGONAL DISTANCE DIVIDED BY 2. SECTION 1004.2.2.1 EXCEPTIONS 2 = 43' -9• 64' -8" EXIT WIDTH NUMBER OF INCHES OF DOORS REQUIRED 34" REQUIRED (TABLE 10032.3) (.2 x OCCUPANT LOAD) NUMBER OF INCHES OF DOORS PROVIDED 106" PROVIDED (ADD LENGTH OF OPENINGS) Afi 4 Protruding objects shall not reduce the minimum clear width of accessible routes or clear aisle width of 36 inches. (ANSI 307.5 & IBC 1003.3.4) Clear width of and accessible route shall be maintained at a minimum of 32 inches wide within <24 inch ran or 36 inches wide >24 inch rum (ANSI Table 403.5) CS.2 1/8" = 1' -0" - IL6.. Z.z z:z./ ..zzzi.Z..I..z.lT..l..T..1lI.. ` 1. 11• l.. T. 1.. T. l.. T..lT..I...I:r.I.:l.I..I.•�T.1Z •..T. IT.. .Z zz.z: •!..zl.'1:.zzz..zzzzz zzz72..77" /7. 72777ZL _Ir2Zll:"1 ZZZ.ZZZZ..I C AREA CALCULATION MINIMUM REQUIRED MANEUVERING CLEARANCE AT DOOR LUCKY BRAND JEANS EXIT 2 CLEAR WIDTH = 36" MINIMUM REQUIRED MANEUVERING CLEARANCE AT DOOR 1 CS.2 EGGRESS PLAN 1/4" = 1' - H 8 E N EXITS � O/S r& � D`P G ON2� \S1 G 11' )1- ANCE AGENCY CODE REVIEW NOTE: EMERGENCY LIGHTING SHALL MEET MEANS OF EGRESS ILLUMINATION REQUIREMENTS. EGRESS EMERGENCY LIGHTING SHALL COVER THE COMMON PATH OF TRAVEL TO REQUIRED EXITS. lllll.. TRAVEL DISTANCE FROM MOST REMOTE POINT = 70' -6" . 4 P _ LUCKY B AND JEANS E IT 1 CLEAR IDTH = 70" DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte; NC 28217 ... f tifinV1p and fie Sie_ H shown a/in t;,/. property „ r I.J /trP i i:!'i'7:r/1:'tf Irch:r'a;/lf(u/ f.oNsa fsf,' x'1.2 ropying fir o/i ' we l?! thh drain' ;1'1t l::l/ l(;vir ;1' tt /!'?7 (iiu r? t is prohibited and any infrigeNeNt :pa be sni to legal athon. JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGHR MPW DRAWN BY BJS www.littleonline.corn EUNGA TEES Alw'1ER1C A TOUGH TO Di$ Little 2007 REVISIONS NO REASON DATE I Landlord I City Revisions 12/21/07 RF CITY OF TUKVVILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER M T W .1 o co Q CO J c0 LU Z cc u j � J W V? c� a = N IA co 0 U) 625- 4089 -01 CS.2 02.21.08 CODE AND EGRESS PLAN PROJECT NUMBER ISSUE DATE:. SHEET NO. RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX N /A: NOT APPLICABLE EX: EXISTING F: FURNISH I: INSTALL RESPONSIBILITY NOTES 1. GC MUST USE LANDLORD'S DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR FOR ANY REQUIRED SLAB X -RAYS AND ROOF REPAIR WORK (IF APPLICABLE) (IF REQUIRED). 2. GC TO COORDINATE W/ VENDOR. 3. GC TO COORDINATE WORK WITH MILLWORK CONTRACTOR. 4. GC TO UNLOAD, ASSEMBLE, AND INSTALL ALL VENDOR FIXTURES AND MILLWORK. 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR MAY PATCH & REPAIR OR REPLACE EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD AT DEMISING PARTITIONS AT HIS OPTION, PROVIDED THAT FIRE RESISTIVE, STRUCTURAL, & FINISHING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET. 6. GC TO VERIFY WITH LANDLORD, IF MAIN SERVICE IS NOT PROVIDED, GC TO FURNISH AND INSTALL. 7, GC TO COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO STOREFRONT SIGNAGE BY SIGN CONTRACTOR TO GC PROVIDED J -BOX. 8. GC TO INSTALL PER CODE REQUIREMENTS & IN ACCORDANCE WITH LANDLORDS SPECIFICATIONS. 9. INSTAL L CONDUIT FROM STUB -OUT TO TENANT DISTRIBUTION PANEL IN LEASE SPACE. 10. MALL TILE TO BE FURNISHED BY LANDLORD'S SUBCONTRACTOR AT GC COST. GC TO INSTALL. 11. GC TO PROVIDE & HAVE FLOOR PROTECTION IN PLACE @ ALL TIMES. 12. LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DESIGNING STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT OF LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE TO EXISTING SLAB AND /OR MALL STRUCTURE. LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR SHALL ALSO ALLOW CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION OF STOREFRONT GLAZING AND ANY REQUIRED SEISMIC MOVEMENT. SIGNED AND SEALED STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS NECESSARY BY LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR. 13. GC TO COORDINATE W/ OWNER'S VENDOR FOR DELIVERY DATE & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. GC TO PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING, AS NEEDED TO INSTALL & ATTACH LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE PER VENDOR DRAWINGS. 14. GC TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL CONCRETE SEALER BEAD BLAST FLOOR UNLESS DETERMINE BY LUCKY BRAND AS NOT NEEDED. G CEILING TILES AND CEILING GRIDS. REPLACE AS NECESSARY. 16. G.C. TO RELAMP ALL EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES. OWNER TO FURNISH LAMPS. REPLACE BALLASTS AND LIGHT DIFFUSERS AS NECESSARY. 17. SPRAY PAINT SUPPLY AND RETURN REGISTERS TO MATCH CEILING FINISH. 18. MILLWORK VENDOR TO PROVIDE: a) "A" CABINETS: 1. (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES AND (1) ONE COMBO BAR SHELF FOR EACH CABINET. 2, ADDITIONALLY; 20% EXTRA STANDARD SHELVES. (6 SIX ADDITIONAL STRAIGHT COMBO BAR SHELVES, AND (4) FOUR COMBO BAR SHELVES WITH CURVED BARS. b) "E" CABINETS: 1. (6) SIX STANDARD SHLEVES AND (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES FOR EACH CABINET. 2. ADDITIONALLY; PROVIDE (2) TWO EXTRA STANDARD SHELVES FOR EACH CABINET. 19. FOR ALL LARGE MIRRORS (M3) THE MIRROR SHALL BE PROVIDED BY GE3NERAL CONTRACTOR, THE FRAMING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY MILWORK VENDOR 20. GC TO REMOVE MANEQUINS FROM PACKAGING AND DISPOSE OF ALL PACKAGING PRIOR TO TURNOVER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROV - µAR 21 1 City Of ` 'uloNil ION E GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL ITEMS AND INSTALLATION WHICH ARE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DETAILS, BUT WHICH ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY LISTED ON THE MATRIX ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE G.C. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION) ARE COMPLEMENTARY, AND WHAT IS REQUIRED BY ONE SHALL BE AS BINDING AS IF REQUIRED BY ALL. L ,. . I TTLE DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING "_ 5815Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com r / 4' n the %'il' i i/ n the f�s.r .sf.k'1Yr, ur7.. u..�r . • w . 41Y t r Ii: ek ?):r<'rsrjieei irrbiedgn (_L:as:;<r, . he rd rstrrg elr other NSe ;lr §ti rir,:;, •a;,'' a'i ;i;rr/ ,r ;r;i i >rr: °orr er: t is /': %sir:+' mid ar:7 � i, ::FJF'e'i %i ?1F.' .w be SY. i �'fi: ?:? legal n. e...... 8746 CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME. '= .:: • PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJE(:1' MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS JOHN! C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON tic t"1-121 4 O EUNGAfEES n roa roucx ro net r , , 12/21/07 0 Lillie 2007 M T W -I CO CD LU CD Z Lu cc 2 W H W W O to U W 1- (fl 0 RE"r - CITY OF- MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER 625 - 4089 -01 CS.3 SHEET TITLE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX PROJECT NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. MILL WO RKSHOP LANDLORD CONTRACTOR OWNER NOTES DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES N/A EX F I F I F I F I X A. IDENTIFYING DEVICES • • 1. STOREFRONT SIGNAGE BY SIGN CO F/1 • • • • 2, 7 2, SERVICE DOOR IDENTIFICATION. COORDINATE WITH ON -SITE TENANT COORDINATOR. • • 3. HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY SIGNAGE • • 4. INTERIOR SIGNAGE • • • 2 B. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS /FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CABINETS • • C. COAT, IRON BD., BROOM, & MOP HOOKS • • • D. BACK SAFE IN OFFICE & CASHWRAP - INSTALL & BOLT DOWN • • • E. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES U.O.N. • • F. STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS G.C. TO FURNISH AND INSTALL • • • AT REAR SERVICE DOOR. • • G. AWNINGS BY SIGN CO (FURNISHED AND INSTALLED) • • 2 H. GRAB BARS • • 14 I. GALVANIZED PIPE - SALES FLOOR, STOREFRONT & FITTING ROOMS • • J. HANGING GRID • • • K. MANEQUIN • • 20 A. STEEL FRAMING DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT • • A. U.P.S. • • • • B. REVEALS • • DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS • • A. SURFACE MOUNTED STOCK RM. BRACKETS AND SHELVING (STOCK ROOM) • • • B. FURNITURE (INCLUDING SALES, NON- SALES, PROPS, SPEC DISPLAYS) • • • 3, 4 C. BANQUET TABLE (STOCK ROOM) • • • D. BULLETIN BOARD (OFFICE) • • • E. PEG BOARD • • F. ROLL CORK (AT MANAGERS DESK) • • • G. PLUMBERS PIPE AT DISPLAY • • • H. HIGH DENSITY STOCK SHELVING (STOCKROOM) • • • 2 I. FIXTURE, CASEWORK, FURNITURE, & EQUIP. INSTALLATION • • 3, 4,18 J. SALES WALL BRACKETS AND SHELVES • • • 2, 3 K. MANAGERS DESK(S) (COUNTER TOP WITH SUPPORT LEGS) • • • 3,4 L LOCKERS (STOCKROOM) • • M. ACCESSORY CABINET (STOCKROOM) • N. HANGER TIGHT & MOBIL PROCESSING TABLE STOCKROOM • • • 0. CLOTHES RACK (FITTING ROOM) • • • 1 P. CHAIRS (FITTING ROOMS) • • • Q. BUILT IN BENCH (ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM) • • 8 R. LEATHER CAGE (STOCK ROOM) • • • 8 S. METHANE ALARM • T. METHANE SENSOR • • • B. HOLLOW METAL FRAMES • • DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL A. H.V.A.C. HEATING & COOLING UNITS • • B. HVAC DUCTWORK • • C. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO BE HIRED BY GC. GC. TO COORDINATE • • 9 D. ANY REQUIRED MODIFICATION TO SPRINKLER SYSTEM • • 1, 9 E. PLUMBING • • 1. TOILET RM. FIXTURES & ASSOCIATED PLUMBING • • • • 2. PLUMBING FIXTURE ACCESSORIES • • 3. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO SNAKE AND PROVIDE CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED WASTE LINE PRIOR TO TURNOVER • • 4. MOP SINK AND DRINKING FOUNTAIN IF REQ'D • • • F. SMOKE DETECTORS • • G. WATER TO LEASED SPACE • • • • H. SEWER TO LEASED SPACE (SANITARY VENT SUB -IN) • • • • 2 I. EXHAUST FAN DUCTS & VENTS (TOILET FAN) G.C. TO CONNECT TO MAIN • • BRANCH DUCTS SUPLLIED TO BY THE LL. • • 17 J. SUPPLY & RETURN REGISTERS • • K. WATER METER, VIF • • L. DRINKING FOUNTAIN AND /OR LAUNDRY SINK, IF REQUIRED • • DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL • • A. LIGHT FIXTURES AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING (SEE LIGHTING SCHEDULE) • • • 2 1. LIGHT FIXTURES/LAMPS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS INDICATED AS NEW • • • 2. FLORESCENT TUBE LIGHT FIXTURES /LAMPS AS INDICATED ON LIGHT • • FIXTURE SCHEDULE • • 16 B. EXHAUST FANS •, • C. POWER SYSTEM • • 1. LANDLORD'S MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL • • • • 6 2. MAIN SERVICE CONDUIT, CHECK METER (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS) CONDUIT BY LL METER BY GC • • 11 3. MAIN SERVICE WIRING (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS) • • 6 4. TENANTS DISTRIBUTION PANELS • • 5. TENANTS TRANSFORMER (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS) • • 6. OUTLETS, SWITCHES, WIRING, & CONDUITS • • 7. FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTION (FOR FIXTURES) • • D. TELEPHONE • • 1. TELEPHONE, FAX OUTLETS, AND J BOXES • • • • 2. CONDUIT & PULL STRINGS FOR TELEPHONE WIRES 3. TELEPHONE SYSTEM • • • • 1. VCT & SHEET VINYL 4.24 "x24" PLYWOOD PHONE DEMARCATION BOARD • • • 2. VINYL BASE 5. TELEPHONE AND FAX OUTLET TRIMS • • • • 3. WOOD BASE E. SECURITY • • 4. STAINLESS STEEL BASE 1. CONDUIT & PULL STRINGS FOR SECURITY SYSTEM • • 5. REDUCER AND TRANSITION STRIPS 2. SECURITY SYSTEM- EQUIPMENT & HOOK -UP • • • • 6. SCREEDS TRANSITION FROM WOOD TO WALK OFF MAT AND WOOD TO VCT 3. SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM (IF REQUIRED) • • • • 7. WOOD FLOOING - AT SALES FLOOR 4.PRODCO • • • • 8. WOOD FLOORING - AT DISPLAY PLATFORMS 5. PRODCO (CONDUIT PULL STRING) • • • 2 9. CONCRETE PREPARATION & SEALER 6. SENSORMATIC DIGITAL FLOOR MAX 4 • • • • 2 7. EAS MAGNETIC DETACHER, SINK IN • • • • 14 11. CARPET F. COMMUNICATIONS /DATA 12. MALL TILE (10) 1. CONDUIT FOR STEREO SYSTEM, ALARM AND LOW VOLTAGE AS NEEDED • • • 10 13. WALK - OFF MAT 2. STEREO SYSTEM AND SPEAKERS • • • • 2 3. SPEAKER WIRES • • 2 4. DATA CONDUIT & PULL STRING • • 9 G. INTEGRATED FACILITIES SYSTEM - REFER TO ELECTRICAL PLANS • • • 3. TILE (TOILET ROOMS) H. FIRE LIFE SAFETY /SMOKE EVAC. SYSTEM (9)(IF APPLICABLE) • • • 4. PAINTED WALL PAPER - WPA • • 5. WALL PAPER - WPP RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX N /A: NOT APPLICABLE EX: EXISTING F: FURNISH I: INSTALL RESPONSIBILITY NOTES 1. GC MUST USE LANDLORD'S DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR FOR ANY REQUIRED SLAB X -RAYS AND ROOF REPAIR WORK (IF APPLICABLE) (IF REQUIRED). 2. GC TO COORDINATE W/ VENDOR. 3. GC TO COORDINATE WORK WITH MILLWORK CONTRACTOR. 4. GC TO UNLOAD, ASSEMBLE, AND INSTALL ALL VENDOR FIXTURES AND MILLWORK. 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR MAY PATCH & REPAIR OR REPLACE EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD AT DEMISING PARTITIONS AT HIS OPTION, PROVIDED THAT FIRE RESISTIVE, STRUCTURAL, & FINISHING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET. 6. GC TO VERIFY WITH LANDLORD, IF MAIN SERVICE IS NOT PROVIDED, GC TO FURNISH AND INSTALL. 7, GC TO COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO STOREFRONT SIGNAGE BY SIGN CONTRACTOR TO GC PROVIDED J -BOX. 8. GC TO INSTALL PER CODE REQUIREMENTS & IN ACCORDANCE WITH LANDLORDS SPECIFICATIONS. 9. INSTAL L CONDUIT FROM STUB -OUT TO TENANT DISTRIBUTION PANEL IN LEASE SPACE. 10. MALL TILE TO BE FURNISHED BY LANDLORD'S SUBCONTRACTOR AT GC COST. GC TO INSTALL. 11. GC TO PROVIDE & HAVE FLOOR PROTECTION IN PLACE @ ALL TIMES. 12. LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DESIGNING STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT OF LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE TO EXISTING SLAB AND /OR MALL STRUCTURE. LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR SHALL ALSO ALLOW CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION OF STOREFRONT GLAZING AND ANY REQUIRED SEISMIC MOVEMENT. SIGNED AND SEALED STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS NECESSARY BY LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR. 13. GC TO COORDINATE W/ OWNER'S VENDOR FOR DELIVERY DATE & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. GC TO PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING, AS NEEDED TO INSTALL & ATTACH LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE PER VENDOR DRAWINGS. 14. GC TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL CONCRETE SEALER BEAD BLAST FLOOR UNLESS DETERMINE BY LUCKY BRAND AS NOT NEEDED. G CEILING TILES AND CEILING GRIDS. REPLACE AS NECESSARY. 16. G.C. TO RELAMP ALL EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES. OWNER TO FURNISH LAMPS. REPLACE BALLASTS AND LIGHT DIFFUSERS AS NECESSARY. 17. SPRAY PAINT SUPPLY AND RETURN REGISTERS TO MATCH CEILING FINISH. 18. MILLWORK VENDOR TO PROVIDE: a) "A" CABINETS: 1. (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES AND (1) ONE COMBO BAR SHELF FOR EACH CABINET. 2, ADDITIONALLY; 20% EXTRA STANDARD SHELVES. (6 SIX ADDITIONAL STRAIGHT COMBO BAR SHELVES, AND (4) FOUR COMBO BAR SHELVES WITH CURVED BARS. b) "E" CABINETS: 1. (6) SIX STANDARD SHLEVES AND (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES FOR EACH CABINET. 2. ADDITIONALLY; PROVIDE (2) TWO EXTRA STANDARD SHELVES FOR EACH CABINET. 19. FOR ALL LARGE MIRRORS (M3) THE MIRROR SHALL BE PROVIDED BY GE3NERAL CONTRACTOR, THE FRAMING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY MILWORK VENDOR 20. GC TO REMOVE MANEQUINS FROM PACKAGING AND DISPOSE OF ALL PACKAGING PRIOR TO TURNOVER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROV - µAR 21 1 City Of ` 'uloNil ION E GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL ITEMS AND INSTALLATION WHICH ARE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DETAILS, BUT WHICH ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY LISTED ON THE MATRIX ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE G.C. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION) ARE COMPLEMENTARY, AND WHAT IS REQUIRED BY ONE SHALL BE AS BINDING AS IF REQUIRED BY ALL. L ,. . I TTLE DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING "_ 5815Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com r / 4' n the %'il' i i/ n the f�s.r .sf.k'1Yr, ur7.. u..�r . • w . 41Y t r Ii: ek ?):r<'rsrjieei irrbiedgn (_L:as:;<r, . he rd rstrrg elr other NSe ;lr §ti rir,:;, •a;,'' a'i ;i;rr/ ,r ;r;i i >rr: °orr er: t is /': %sir:+' mid ar:7 � i, ::FJF'e'i %i ?1F.' .w be SY. i �'fi: ?:? legal n. e...... 8746 CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME. '= .:: • PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJE(:1' MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS JOHN! C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON tic t"1-121 4 O EUNGAfEES n roa roucx ro net r , , 12/21/07 0 Lillie 2007 M T W -I CO CD LU CD Z Lu cc 2 W H W W O to U W 1- (fl 0 RE"r - CITY OF- MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER 625 - 4089 -01 CS.3 SHEET TITLE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX PROJECT NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. MILL WORKSHOP LANDLORD CONTRACTOR OWNER NOTES DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS N/A EX F I F I F I F I A. PERMITS, FEES, AND INSURANCE • • B. TEMPORARY UTILITIES • • C. PROFESSIONAL CLEANING • • D. CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY • • E. TRASH REMOVAL • • F. PROVIDE DUMPSTER (EMPTY DUMPSTER BEFORE TURN OVER IF REQUIRED) • • G. EMPTY DUMPSTER AT TURN OVER 30 YD. MIN. (IF PROVIDED) • • DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK • • A. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION • • B, BARRICADE PER LL SPEC. • • C. BARRICADE GRAPHIC - PRINT AND INSTALL (291 DIGITAL) • • DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE A. CONCRETE TOPPING I LEVELING COMPOUND, IF REQ'D • • 14 B, CONCRETE SLAB, GRANULAR FILL, VAPOR BARRIER, WHERE INDICATED • • C. FLOOR CUTTING AND I OR CORE DRILLNG AND SLAB INFILL • • DIVISION 5 - METALS A. STEEL FRAMING 1. METAL STUDS, TRACK, AND FASTENERS • • 2. STOREFRONT SUPPORT FRAMING • • B. REVEALS • • C. GYP. BD. CEILING FRAMING • • D. CONCEALED SLOTTED STANDARDS (AT SALES FLOOR - LUCKY KID ONLY) • • E. METAL PANELS AT STOREFRONT • • F. MISC. FINISHED METAL WORK • • G. UNISTRUT @ STOREFRONT & IMAGE LOCATIONS • • DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS A. ROUGH CARPENTRY • • B. WOOD TREATMENT • 1. FIRE RETARDANT LUMBER • • C. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1. FINISHED WOODWORK (INCL HARDWOOD TRIM & BASE) • • 2, 3 2. FIXTURE, CASEWORK, FURNITURE, & EQUIP INSTALLATION • • 3,4 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. INSULATION (THERMAL) 1. WALL & CEILING, IF REQ'D • • B. ROOF PENETRATION, CURBING, FLASHING, AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT, IF REQ'D • • 1 C. SEALANTS AND CAULKING • • D. SPRAY ON FIRE PROOFING OR GYP. BD. COLUMN ENCLOSURES, IF REQ'D • • 8 E FIRE STOPPING AND OR CAULKING • • 8 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS A. INTERIOR WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES • • B. HOLLOW METAL FRAMES • • C. SPECIAL DOORS 1. RATED METAL DOORS AND FRAMES • • 2. FITTING ROOM AND HOLD ROOM DOORS, IF INDICATED • • 3. FITTING ROOM AND HOLD ROOM DOOR FRAMES • • 4. STOREFRONT DOORS • • 5. REAR SERVICE DOOR(S), IF REQ'D • • 6. FITTING ROOM CURTAINS (OFCI) • • D. ACCESS DOORS E. HARDWARE SPECIALTIES 1. ALL HARDWARE FOR DOORS (EXCLUDING MASTERKEY SYSTEM) • • 2. MASTER KEY CARES FOIC • • 3. MASTER KEY CYLINDERS FCIC (BEST CYLINDER -PIN) • • 4. FITTING ROOM HARDWARE COATHOOKS/PURSE RAIL • • 5. ENTRANCE DOOR PULLS (2) • • 2 F. GLAZING 1. ALL GLASS STOREFRONT SYSTEM, INCLUDING TEMPERED GLAZING • • 2. EXTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, INCL TEMPERED & INSUL GLAZING • • G. MIRRORS 1. ALL FITTING ROOM MIRRORS - INSIDE FITTING ROOMS (FRAMES BY MILLWORK) • • 2. BATHROOM MIRRORS - CLR SILICONE ALL EDGES • • 3. SALES FLOOR MIRRORS (ALL MIRRORS UNLESS NOTED) • • 4. SALES FLOOR MIRRORS FRAMES (ALL MIRRORS UNLESS NOTED) • • DIVISION 9 - FINISHES A GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND ACCESSORIES (FRAMING BY LANDLORD) • • 1. INTERIOR PARTITIONS - FRAMING & GYP. BD. • • 2. DEMISING PARTITIONS • • a. 5/8" TYPE 'X GYP. BD. • • 5 b. REPAIR OF RATED PARTITIONS • • 5 3. STOREFRONT - FRAMING & GYP. BD. • • 4. COLUMN ENCLOSURES • • 5. FIRE STOPS • • B. SUSPENDED GYP. BD. CEILING AND FRAMING SYSTEM • • C. SUSPENDED GRIDS & TIN PATTERN TILES • • D. PAINTING • • E. ACOUSTICAL INSULATION & SEALANTS • • F. FLOORING SYSTEMS • • 1. VCT & SHEET VINYL • • 2. VINYL BASE • • 3. WOOD BASE • • 4. STAINLESS STEEL BASE • 5. REDUCER AND TRANSITION STRIPS • • 6. SCREEDS TRANSITION FROM WOOD TO WALK OFF MAT AND WOOD TO VCT • • 7. WOOD FLOOING - AT SALES FLOOR • • 2,14 8. WOOD FLOORING - AT DISPLAY PLATFORMS • • 2 9. CONCRETE PREPARATION & SEALER • • 14 10. CONCRETE TOPPING AT SALES FLOOR • • 14 11. CARPET • 12. MALL TILE (10) • • 10 13. WALK - OFF MAT • • G. WALL COVERING 1. WALL COVERING (WPA) • • 2. TOILET ROOMS (FRP) • • 3. TILE (TOILET ROOMS) • • 4. PAINTED WALL PAPER - WPA • • 5. WALL PAPER - WPP • • RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX N /A: NOT APPLICABLE EX: EXISTING F: FURNISH I: INSTALL RESPONSIBILITY NOTES 1. GC MUST USE LANDLORD'S DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR FOR ANY REQUIRED SLAB X -RAYS AND ROOF REPAIR WORK (IF APPLICABLE) (IF REQUIRED). 2. GC TO COORDINATE W/ VENDOR. 3. GC TO COORDINATE WORK WITH MILLWORK CONTRACTOR. 4. GC TO UNLOAD, ASSEMBLE, AND INSTALL ALL VENDOR FIXTURES AND MILLWORK. 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR MAY PATCH & REPAIR OR REPLACE EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD AT DEMISING PARTITIONS AT HIS OPTION, PROVIDED THAT FIRE RESISTIVE, STRUCTURAL, & FINISHING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET. 6. GC TO VERIFY WITH LANDLORD, IF MAIN SERVICE IS NOT PROVIDED, GC TO FURNISH AND INSTALL. 7, GC TO COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO STOREFRONT SIGNAGE BY SIGN CONTRACTOR TO GC PROVIDED J -BOX. 8. GC TO INSTALL PER CODE REQUIREMENTS & IN ACCORDANCE WITH LANDLORDS SPECIFICATIONS. 9. INSTAL L CONDUIT FROM STUB -OUT TO TENANT DISTRIBUTION PANEL IN LEASE SPACE. 10. MALL TILE TO BE FURNISHED BY LANDLORD'S SUBCONTRACTOR AT GC COST. GC TO INSTALL. 11. GC TO PROVIDE & HAVE FLOOR PROTECTION IN PLACE @ ALL TIMES. 12. LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DESIGNING STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT OF LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE TO EXISTING SLAB AND /OR MALL STRUCTURE. LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR SHALL ALSO ALLOW CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION OF STOREFRONT GLAZING AND ANY REQUIRED SEISMIC MOVEMENT. SIGNED AND SEALED STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS NECESSARY BY LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE VENDOR. 13. GC TO COORDINATE W/ OWNER'S VENDOR FOR DELIVERY DATE & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. GC TO PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING, AS NEEDED TO INSTALL & ATTACH LUCKY BRAND SIGN FEATURE PER VENDOR DRAWINGS. 14. GC TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL CONCRETE SEALER BEAD BLAST FLOOR UNLESS DETERMINE BY LUCKY BRAND AS NOT NEEDED. G CEILING TILES AND CEILING GRIDS. REPLACE AS NECESSARY. 16. G.C. TO RELAMP ALL EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES. OWNER TO FURNISH LAMPS. REPLACE BALLASTS AND LIGHT DIFFUSERS AS NECESSARY. 17. SPRAY PAINT SUPPLY AND RETURN REGISTERS TO MATCH CEILING FINISH. 18. MILLWORK VENDOR TO PROVIDE: a) "A" CABINETS: 1. (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES AND (1) ONE COMBO BAR SHELF FOR EACH CABINET. 2, ADDITIONALLY; 20% EXTRA STANDARD SHELVES. (6 SIX ADDITIONAL STRAIGHT COMBO BAR SHELVES, AND (4) FOUR COMBO BAR SHELVES WITH CURVED BARS. b) "E" CABINETS: 1. (6) SIX STANDARD SHLEVES AND (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES FOR EACH CABINET. 2. ADDITIONALLY; PROVIDE (2) TWO EXTRA STANDARD SHELVES FOR EACH CABINET. 19. FOR ALL LARGE MIRRORS (M3) THE MIRROR SHALL BE PROVIDED BY GE3NERAL CONTRACTOR, THE FRAMING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY MILWORK VENDOR 20. GC TO REMOVE MANEQUINS FROM PACKAGING AND DISPOSE OF ALL PACKAGING PRIOR TO TURNOVER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROV - µAR 21 1 City Of ` 'uloNil ION E GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL ITEMS AND INSTALLATION WHICH ARE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DETAILS, BUT WHICH ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY LISTED ON THE MATRIX ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE G.C. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION) ARE COMPLEMENTARY, AND WHAT IS REQUIRED BY ONE SHALL BE AS BINDING AS IF REQUIRED BY ALL. L ,. . I TTLE DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING "_ 5815Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com r / 4' n the %'il' i i/ n the f�s.r .sf.k'1Yr, ur7.. u..�r . • w . 41Y t r Ii: ek ?):r<'rsrjieei irrbiedgn (_L:as:;<r, . he rd rstrrg elr other NSe ;lr §ti rir,:;, •a;,'' a'i ;i;rr/ ,r ;r;i i >rr: °orr er: t is /': %sir:+' mid ar:7 � i, ::FJF'e'i %i ?1F.' .w be SY. i �'fi: ?:? legal n. e...... 8746 CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME. '= .:: • PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJE(:1' MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS JOHN! C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON tic t"1-121 4 O EUNGAfEES n roa roucx ro net r , , 12/21/07 0 Lillie 2007 M T W -I CO CD LU CD Z Lu cc 2 W H W W O to U W 1- (fl 0 RE"r - CITY OF- MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER 625 - 4089 -01 CS.3 SHEET TITLE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX PROJECT NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. A. PEDESTRIAN RAMPS 1. ANY PATH OF TRAVEL SHALL BE CONSIDERED A RAMP IF ITS SLOPE IS GREATER THAN 1 FOOT RISE IN 20 FOOT HORIZONTAL RUN (59/0). 2. PEDESTRIAN RAMPS SERVING ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES TO BUILDINGS SHALL HAVE A CLEAR WIDTH NOT LESS THAN THE WIDTH REQUIRED FOR WALKS. 3. PEDESTRIAN RAMPS SERVING ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES TO BUILDINGS SHALL BE A MINIMUM 48 INCHES CLEAR WIDTH. 4. PEDESTRIAN RAMPS SERVING ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES TO BUILDINGS HAVING AN OCCUPANT LOAD OF 300 OR MORE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLEAR WIDTH OF 60 INCHES, 5. PEDESTRIAN RAMPS SERVING ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES TO BUILDINGS HOUSING GROUP R OCCUPANCIES MAY BE 36 INCHES CLEAR WIDTH WHEN THE OCCUPANT LOAD IS 50 OR LESS. 6. THE MAXIMUM SLOPE OF A RAMP THAT SERVES ANY EXITWAY, PROVIDES DISABLED ACCESS OR IS IN THE PATH OF TRAVEL SHALL BE 1 FOOT RISE IN 12 FEET OF HORIZONTAL RUN. THE LEAST POSSIBLE SLOPE SHALL BE USED FOR ANY RAMP. 7. RAMP LANDINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF EACH RAMP. 8. INTERMEDIATE LANDINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 30 INCHES OF VERTICAL RISE AND AT EACH CHANGE OF DIRECTION. LANDINGS ARE NOT CONSIDERED IN DETERMINING THE MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF EACH RAMP. 9. TOP LANDINGS SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 60 INCHES WIDE AND SHALL HAVE A LENGTH OF NOT LESS THAN 60 INCHES IN THE DIRECTION OF RAMP RUN. 10. DOORS IN ANY POSITION SHALL NOT REDUCE THE MINIMUM DIMENSION OF THE RAMP LANDING TO LESS THAN 42 INCHES AND SHALL NOT REDUCE THE REQUIRED WIDTH BY MORE THAN 3-1/2 INCHES WHEN FULLY OPEN. 11. THE WIDTH OF THE LANDING SHALL EXTEND 24 INCHES PAST THE STRIKE EDGE OF ANY DOOR OR GATE FOR EXTERIOR RAMPS AND 18 INCHES PAST THE STRIKE EDGE FOR INTERIOR RAMPS. 12. INTERMEDIATE LANDINGS AT A CHANGE OF DIRECTION AND BOTTOM SHALL W DIMENSION IN M LANDINGS AVE A DIM THE DIRE CTION OF RAMP RUN OF NOT LESS THAN 72 INCHES. 13. AT BOTTOM AND INTERMEDIATE LANDINGS, THE WIDTH SHALL BE AT LEAST THE SAME AS REQUIRED FOR THE RAMPS. 14. OTHER INTERMEDIATE LANDINGS SHALL HAVE A DIMENSION IN THE DIRECTION OF RAMP RUN OF NOT LESS THAN 60 INCHES. 15. THE SLOPE ACROSS A RAMP LANDING IN ANY DIRECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 1/4 INCH RISE IN 1 FOOT OF HORIZONTAL RUN. 16. HANDRAILS ARE REQUIRED ON RAMPS THAT PROVIDE DISABLED ACCESS, IF THE SLOPE EXCEEDS 1 FOOT RISE IN 20 FEET OF HORIZONTAL RUN. 17. HANDRAILS SHALL BE PLACED ON EACH SIDE OF EACH RAMP. HANDRAILS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS, THE FULL LENGTH OF THE RAMP, SHALL BE AT 34 INCHES ABOVE THE RAMP WITH A HORIZONTAL RAIL AT 27" ABOVE RAMP SURFACE WHEN INTERMEDIATE RAILING WITH MAX. OF 4 OF CLEAR SPACE IS NOT REQUIRED. LOW HORIZONTAL RAIL SHALL EXTEND SAME AS REQUIRED FOR HANDRAILS AND SHALL EXTEND A MIN. OF 1 FOOT BEYOND THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF THE RAMP,AND THE ENDS ALL BE RETURN TO A WALL, FLOG OR POST, DS SH ED R, 18. HANDRAILS PROJECTING PROM A WALL SHALL HAVE A SPACE OF NOT LESS THAN 1 1/2 INCHES BETWEEN THE WALL AND THE HANDRAIL. 19. THE GRIP PORTION OF THE HANDRAIL SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 1 1/4 INCHES NOR MORE THAN 1 1/2 INCHES IN CROSS SECTIONAL OUTSIDE DIMENSION, OR THE SHAPE SHALL PROVIDE AN EQUIVALENT GRIPPING SURFACE AND ALL SURFACES SHALL BE SMOOTH WITH NO SHARP CORNERS. SEE TYPICAL ACCESSIBILITY DETAIL SHEET. 20. THE SURFACE ON RAMPS SHALL BE NON -SLIP MEETING A COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION OF O.S. 21. WHEN THE RAMP SURFACE I5 NOT BOUNDED BY WALL OR FENCE AND THE RAMP EXCEEDS 10 FEET IN LENGTH, THE RAMP SHALL COMPLY WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: A. A GUIDE CURB A MINIMUM OF 2 INCHES IN HEIGHT SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EACH SIDE OF THE RAMP, EXCEPT WHEN ADJACENT GRADE IS 4' OR GREATER BELOW RAMP SURFACE, THEN CURB SHALL BE A MIN. 6' HIGH ABOVE RAMP SURFACE. B. A WHEEL GUIDE RAIL SHALL BE PROVIDED, CENTERED 3 INCHES PLUS OR MINUS 1 INCH ABOVE THE SURFACE ON THE RAMP. C. SEE NOTE #T -7 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS. 22. WHERE A RAMP SURFACE HAS A SLOPE OF 120 (5%) OR GREATER AND THE ADJACENT GRADE IS GREATER THAN 4' BELOW THE RAMP SURFACE A CURB 6" HIGH ABOVE THE RAMP SURFACE SHALL BE PROVIDED ALONG SUCH OPEN SIDE OF RAMP SURFACE OR WHEEL GUIDE. SEE 21.B ABOVE. 23. WHERE AN ADJACENT GRADE IS 30' BELOW THE OPEN SIDE OF THE RAMP, A 42 "-45" HIGH GUARDRAIL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH INTERMEDIATE MEMBERS SO AN OBJECT OF 4" DIAMETER CAN NOT PASS THROUGH SUCH INTERMEDIATE MEMBERS. HARDWARE: B. ENTRANCES 1. AT LEASE ONE PRIMARY ENTRANCE (NOTE: SOME GOVERNING AGENCIES MAY DEFINE EXITS AS A BLDG. ENTRANCE) TO BUILDING AND FACILITIES SHALL BE MADE ACCESSIBLE TO THE PHYSICALLY DISABLED, QUANTITY OF ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES, ALTHOUGH, SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY THE GOVERNING AGENCIES. 2. ALL DISABLED ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES, SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH AT LEAST ONE STANDARD SIGN AND WITH ADDITIONAL DIRECTIONAL SIGNS VISIBLE FROM APPROACHING PEDESTRIAN WAYS. 3. EVERY REQUIRED ENTRANCE, 'EXIT, OR PASSAGE DOORWAY SHALL BE OF A SIZE AS TO PERMIT THE INSTALLATION OF A DOOR NOT LESS THAN 3 FEET IN WIDTH AND NOT LESS THAN 6 FEET, 8 INCHES IN HEIGHT. DOORS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF OPENING AT LEAST 90 DEGREES AND SHALL BE SO MOUNTED THAT THE CLEAR WIDTH OF THE DOORWAY IS NOT LESS THAN 32 INCHES. 4. WHERE A PAIR OF DOORS IS UTILIZED AT LEAST ONE OF THE DOORS SHALL PROVIDE A CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED OPENING WIDTH OF 32 INCHES WITH THE LEAF POSITIONED AT AN ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES FROM ITS CLOSED POSITION. 5. WHEN AN AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR IS UTILIZED TO OPERATE A PAIR OF DOORS, AT LEAST ONE OF THE DOORS SHALL PROVIDE A CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED OPENING WIDTH OF 32 INCHES WITH THE DOOR POSITIONED AT AN ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES FROM ITS CLOSED POSITION. 6. LATCHING AND LOCKING DOORS THAT ARE HAND ACTIVATED AND WHICH ARE IN A PATH OF TRAVEL, SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH A SINGLE EFFORT BY LEVER TYPE HARDWARE, PANIC BARS, PUSH - PULL ACTIVATING BARS, OR OTHER HARDWARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE PASSAGE WITHOUT REQUIRING THE ABILITY TO GRASP THE OPENING HARDWARE. 7. HAND ACTIVATED DOOR OPENING HARDWARE SHALL BE CENTERED BETWEEN 34 INCHES AND 44 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR. 8. THE FLOOR OR LANDING ON EACH SIDE OF AN ENTRANCE OR PASSAGE DOOR SHALL BE LEVEL. THE LEVEL AREA SHALL HAVE A LENGTH IN THE DIRECTION OF DOOR SWING OF AT LEAST 60 INCHES AND THE LENGTH OPPOSITE THE DIRECTION OF DOOR SWING OF 48 INCHES AS MEASURED AT RIGHT ANGLES TO THE PLANE OF THE DOOR IN ITS CLOSED POSITION. 9. THE WIDTH OF THE LEVEL AREA ON THE SIDE TO WHICH THE DOOR SWINGS SHALL EXTEND 24 INCHES PAST THE STRIKE EDGE OF THE DOOR FOR EXTERIOR DOORS AND 18 INCHES PAST THE STRIKE EDGE FOR INTERIOR DOORS. WHEN DOOR SWINGS IN DIRECTION OF TRA VEL AND THE DOOR HAS BOTH LATCH AND A CLOSER, 12" OF CLEARANCE SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE DOOR STRIKE EDGE OPPOSITE OF THE DOOR SWING. 10. THE FLOOR OR LANDING SHALL BE NOT MORE THAN 1/2 INCH LOWER THAN THE THRESHOLD OF THE DOORWAY. CHANGE IN LEVEL BETWEEN 1/4 INCH AND 1/2 INCH SHALL BE BEVELED WITH A SLOPE NO GREATER THAN 12. 11. THE BOTTOM 10 INCHES OF ALL DOORS SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH UNINTERRUPTED SURFACE TO ALLOW THE DOOR TO BE OPENED BY A WHEELCHAIR FOOTREST WITHOUT CREATING A TRIP OR HAZARDOUS CONDITION. WHERE NARROW FRAME DOORS ARE USED, A 10 INCH HIGH SMOOTH PANEL SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE PUSH SIDE OF THE DOOR, WHICH WILL ALLOW THE DOOR TO BE OPENED BYA WHEELCHAIR FOOTREST WITHOUT CREATING A TRIP OR HAZARDOUS CONDITION. SEE TYPICAL ACCESSIBILITY DETAIL SHEET. 12 NOT USED 13. THE SPACE BETWEEN TWO CONSECUTIVE DOOR OPENINGS IN A VESTIBULE, SERVING OTHER THAN A REQUIRED EXIT STAIRWAY SHALL PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 48 INCHES OF CLEAR SPACE FROM ANY DOOR OPENING INTO SUCH VESTIBULE WHEN THE DOOR IS POSITIONED AT AN ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES FROM ITS CLOSED POSITION. DOORS N A SERIES SHALL SWING EITHER IN THE SAME DIRECTION OR AWAY FROM THE SPACE BETWEEN THE DOORS. 14, MAXIMUM EFFORT TO OPERATE DOORS SHALL NOT EXCEED 8 1/2 LBS. FOR EXTERIOR DOORS AND 5 LBS. FOR INTERIOR DOORS SUCH PULL OR PUSH EFFORT BEING APPLIED AT RIGHT ANGLE TO HINGED DOORS AND AT THE CENTER PLANE OF SLIDING OR FOLDING DOORS. COMPENSATING DEVICES OR AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS MAY BE UTILIZED TD MEET THE ABOVE STANDARDS. WHEN FIRE DOORS ARE REQUIRED, THE MAXIMUM EFFORT TO OPERATE THE DOOR MAY BE INCREASED UP TO 15 LBS. C. FLOORS AND LEVELS 1. IN BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES, FLOORS OF ANY GIVEN SPACE SHALL HAVE A COMMON LEVEL THROUGHOUT, OR SHALL BE CONNECTED BY PEDESTRIAN RAMPS, PASSENGER ELEVATORS AND /OR, WHEN ALLOWED, SPECIAL ACCESS LIFTS. 2. FLOORS ARE TO BE SLIP RESISTANT. 3. SEE "THRESHOLD/LEVEL CHANGES" DETAIL ON TYPICAL ACCESSIBILITY DETAIL SHEET. 4. SEE NOTE #T -7 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 1. OPENABLE FROM INSIDE WITHOUT USE OF KEY OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE 2. OR EFFORT. OPENABLE BY SINGLE EFFORT LEVER -TYPE DEVICE (NOT REQUIRING 3 ' GRASPING, PINCHING OR TWISTING). 4, MOUNTED 36" TO 42 ". MAXIMUM 8.5 LBS. EFFORT TO OPERATE EXTERIOR DOOR, 5 LBS. FOR INTERIOR. A NOTE: FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS SEE SECTION D ON ACCESSIBILITY NOTES DETAIL 36" TO 42" LEVER OR U SHAPED HANDLE 10" MIN, BOTTOM RAIL OR PROVIDE KICK PLATE N RUBBER BUMPER ON CHAIR Accessible Door Hardware 3/32" = 1' -0" D. SANITARY FACILITIES (GENERAL) 1. WHEN SANITARY FACILITIES ARE LOCATED ON ACCESSIBLE FLOORS OF A BUILDING, THEY SHALL BE MADE ACCESSIBLE TO THE PHYSICALLY DISABLED. 2. WHERE SEPARATE FACILITIES ARE PROVIDED FOR NON - DISABLED PERSONS OF EACH SEX, SEPARATE FACILITIES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR DISABLED PERSONS OF EACH SEX ALSO. WHERE UNISEX FACILRIES ARE PROVIDED FOR NON - DISABLED PERSONS, SUCH UNISEX FACILITIES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE DISABLED. 3. ALL DOORWAYS LEADING TO SANITARY FACILITIES SHALL HAVE 32 INCH CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED OPENINGS. 4. ON DOORWAYS LEADING TO MEN'S SANITARY FACILITIES, AN EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE 1/4 INCH THICK WITH EDGES 12 INCHES LONG AND A VERTEX POINTING UPWARD SHALL BE PROVIDED AND ON DOORWAYS LEADING TO WOMEN'S SANITARY FACILITIES A CIRCLE 1/4 INCH THICK AND 12 INCHES IN DIAMETER SHALL BE PROVIDED. THESE GEOMETRIC SYMBOLS SHALL BE CENTERED ON THE DOOR AT A HEIGHT OF 60 INCHES AND THEIR COLOR AND CONTRAST SHALL BE DISTINCTLY DIFFERENT FROM THE COLOR AND CONTRAST OF THE DOOR. PROVIDE PICTOGRAM ON THE WALL ADJACENT TO THE DOOR LATCH SIDE AS NOTED IN THE 'SIGNS /PICTOGRAMS" DETAIL. 5. ON DOORWAYS LEADING TO UNISEX SANITARY FACILITIES, AN EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE MOUNTED ON A 12" DIAMETER CIRCLE SHALL BE PROVIDED, EACH 1/4" THICK, LOCATED AS NOTED IN NOTE #4 ABOVE. PROVIDE UNISEX PICTOGRAM AS NOTED IN NOTE #4 ABOVE. E. SINGLE ACCOMMODATION TOILET FACILITIES (WHERE INDICATED) 1. THERE SHALL BE SUFFICIENT SPACE IN THE TOILET ROOM FOR A WHEELCHAIR MEASURING 30 INCHES WIDE BY 48 INCHES LONG TO ENTER THE ROOM AND PERMIT THE DOOR TO CLOSE. 2. THE WATER CLOSET SHALL BE LOCATED IN A SPACE WHICH PROVIDES A MIN. OF 28 INCH WIDE CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN THE WATER CLOSETS FURTHEST MOST PROTRUDING EDGE AND AN ADJACENT FIXTURE OR A 32 INCH WIDE CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN THE WATER CLOSET'S FURTHEST MOST PROTRUDING EDGE AND AN ADJACENT WALL ATONE SIDE AND 48 INCHES OF CLEAR SPACE IN FRONT OF THE WATER CLOSET IF THE COMPARTMENT HAS AN END OPENING DOOR (FACING THE WATER CLOSET). A 60 NCH MINIMUM LENGTH CLEAR SPACE SHALL BE PROVIDED IN AN ACCESSIBLE COMPARTMENT WHEN THE DOOR IS LOCATED AT THE SIDE OF THE TOILET STALL COMPARTMENT. GRAB BARS SHALL NOT PROJECT MORE THAN 3 INCHES INTO THE CLEAR SPACES AS SPECIFIED ABOVE. 3 TURNAROUND CLEAR SPACE OF 60' DIAMETER SHALL BE . PROVIDED WITHIN THE TOILET ROOM. 4. PROVIDE IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS ON DOOR AND WALL. SEE 'SIGNS/PICTOGRAMS" DETAIL AND TYPICAL TENANT IMPROVEMENT DRAWINGS. F. TOILET ROOM FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES 1. THE HEIGHT OF ACCESSIBLE WATER CLOSETS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 17 INCHES AND A MAXIMUM OF 19 INCHES MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE TOILET SEAT. 2. PROVIDE 18 INCHES FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE WATER CLOSET TO THE ADJACENT WALL 3. TOILET FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH ONE HAND, AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST, CONTROLS FOR THE FLUSH VALVES SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE WIDE SIDE OF THE TOILET AREAS, NO MORE THAN 44 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR. THE FORCE REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE CONTROLS SHALL BE NO GREATER THAN 5POUNDS. 4. WHERE URINALS ARE PROVIDED, AT LEAST ONE SHALL HAVE A CLEAR SPACE 30 INCHES WIDE X 48 INCHES LONG IN FRONT OF THE URINAL. 5. WHERE URINALS ARE PROVIDED, AT LEAST ONE WITH A RIM PROJECTING A MINIMUM OF 14 INCHES FROM THE WALL AND A MAXIMUM OF 17 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED. 6. URINAL FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH ONE HAND AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST AND SHALL BE MOUNTED NO MORE THAN 44 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR. THE FORCE REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE CONTROLS SHALL BE NO GREATER THAN 5 POUNDS PER FOOT. 7. A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 30 INCHES WIDE X 48 INCHES LONG SHALL BE PROVIDED IN FRONT OF A LAVATORY TO ALLOW A FORWARD APPROACH, SUCH CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL ADJOIN OR OVERLAP AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE AND SHALL EXTEND INTO KNEE AND TOE SPACE UNDERNEATH THE LAVATORY. 8. LAVATORIES SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH A CLEARANCE OF AT LEAST 29 INCHES FROM THE FLOOR TO THE BOTTOM OF THE APRON WITH KNEE CLEARANCE UNDER THE FRONT LIP EXTENDING A MINIMUM OF 30 INCHES IN WIDTH WITH 8 INCHES MINIMUM DEPTH AT THE TOP. TOE CLEARANCE SHALL BE THE SAME WIDTH AND SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 9 INCHES HIGH FROM THE FLOOR AND A MINIMUM OF 17 INCHES DEEP FROM THE FRONT OF THE LAVATORY. CS.4 X 54" MIN SLIDE SIDE APPROACH SLIDING DOORS AND FOLDING DOORS 24" MIN. 1/16" = 1' -0" } 9. A PROJECTION OF A LAVATORY BOWL INTO THE 8 INCH CLEAR SPACE, THEREBY REDUCING TH9 CLEAR HEIGHT BELOW THE LAVATORY TO NO LESS THAN 27 INCHES AT 8 INCHES BACK FROM THE APRON, MEETS THE REQUIREMENT FOR PROVIDING KNEE CLEARANCE. THE MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 34 INCHES SHALL BE MAINTAINED TO THE TOP OF THE COUNTERTOP OR LAVATORY BOWL RIM IF THE LAVORATORY IS A DROP -IN MODEL WHICHEVER IS HIGHER. 10. HOT WATER AND DRAIN PIPES UNDER LAVATORIES SHALL BE INSULATED OR OTHERWISE COVERED. THERE SHALL BE NO SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES UNDER LAVATORIES. 11. FAUCET CONTROLS AND OPERATING MECHANISMS SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH ONE HAND AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST. THE FORCE REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE CONTROLS SHALL BE NO GREATER THAN 5 LBS. LEVER - OPERATED, PUSH -TYPE AND ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED MECHANISMS ARE EXAMPLES OF ACCEPTABLE DESIGNS. SELF - CLOSING VALVES ARE ALLOWED, IF THE FAUCET REMAINS OPEN FOR AT LEAST 10 SECONDS. 12. MIRRORS SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE MIRROR'S REFLECTIVE SURFACE AT NOT MORE THAN 40' FROM THE FLOOR. 13. LOCATE TOWEL, SANITARY NAPKIN, AND WASTE RECEPTACLES WITH ALL OPERABLE PARTS NOT MORE THAN 40 INCHES FROM THE FLOOR. 14. LOCATE TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS ON THE WALL WITHIN 12 [NCHES OF THE FRONT EDGE OF THE TOILET SEAT. CONTINUOUS ROLL DISPENSER IS REQUIRED. 15. GRAB BARS, TUB AND SHOWER SEATS, FASTENERS AND MOUNTING DEVICES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR 250 LB. PER LINEAR FOOT LOAD. G. GRAB BARS 1. GRAB BARS SHALL BE LOCATED ON EACH SIDE, OR ONE SIDE AND THE BACK OF THE ACCESSIBLE TOILET STALL OR COMPARTMENT AND SHALL BE SECURELY ATTACHED 33 INCHES ABOVE AND PARALLEL TO THE FLOOR. SEE NOTE #8 BELOW FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. GRAB BARS AT THE SIDE SHALL BE AT LEAST 42 INCHES LONG W END POSITIONED 24 INCHES FRONT OF THE THE FRONT OSITIONED IN FRON ffH NT EN 2 WATER CLOSET STOOL AND GRAB BARS AT THE BACK SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 36 INCHES LONG. 3. THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OR WIDTH OF THE GRIPPING SURFACES SHAPE SHALL PROVIDE AN EQUIVALENT GRIPPING SURFACE. GRAB BAR BE 1 1/4 INCHES A R SHALL HES O 1 1/2 INCHES OR THE T 4. IF THE GRAB BARS ARE MOUNTED ADJACENT TO A WALL, THE SPACE BETWEEN THE WALL AND THE GRAB BARS SHALL BE 1 1/2 INCHES. 5. A GRAB BAR ON ANY WALL OR OTHER SURFACE ADJACENT TO IT SHALL BE FREE OF ANY SHARP OR ABRASIVE ELEMENTS. 6. GRAB BARS SHALL NOT ROTATE WITHIN THEIR FITTINGS. 7. EDGES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM RADIUS OF 1/8 INCH. 8. WHERE TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS ARE USED, GRAB BARS MAY BE INSTALLED AT +36" A.F.F. H. HAZARDS AND PROTRUDING OBJECTS 1. OBJECTS PROJECTING FROM WALLS (FOR EXAMPLE, TELEPHONES) WITH THEIR LEADING EDGES BETWEEN 27 INCHES AND 80 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR SHALL PROJECT NO MORE THAN 4 INCHES INTO WALKS, HALLS, CORRIDORS, PASSAGEWAYS OR AISLES. 2. OBJECTS MOUNTED WITH THEIR LEADING EDGES AT OR BELOW 27 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR MAY PROTRUDE ANY AMOUNT. 3, FREE - STANDING OBJECTS MOUNTED ON POSTS OR PYLONS MAY OVERHANG 12 INCHES MAXIMUM FROM 27 INCHES TO 80 INCHES ABOVE THE GROUND OR FINISHED FLOOR. 4. PROTRUDING OBJECTS SHALL NOT REDUCE THE CLEAR WIDTH OF AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OR MANEUVERING SPACE. 5. ANY OBSTRUCTION OVERHANGING A PEDESTRIAN WAY SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 80 INCHES ABOVE THE WALKING SURFACE AS MEASURED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE OBSTRUCTION. 6. WALKS, HALLS, CORRIDORS, PASSAGEWAYS, AISLES OR OTHER CIRCULATION SPACES SHALL HAVE 80 INCHES MINIMUM CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED HEAD ROOM (6' -8'). 7. ABRUPT CHANGES IN LEVEL, EXCEPT BETWEEN A WALK OR SIDEWALK AND AN ADJACENT STREET OR DRIVEWAY, EXCEEDING 4 INCHES IN A VERTICAL DIMENSION, SUCH AS AT PLANTERS, LOCATED IN OR ADJACENT TO WALKS, SIDEWALKS, OR OTHER PEDESTRIAN WAYS SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY CURBS PROJECTING AT LEAST 6 INCHES IN HEIGHT ABOVE THE WALK OR SIDEWALK SURFACE TO WARN THE BLIND OF A POTENTIAL DROP - OFF. WHEN A GUARDRAIL OR HANDRAIL IS PROVIDED, NO CURB IS REQUIRED IF A GUIDE RAIL IS PROVIDED CENTERED 3 INCHES PLUS OR MINUS ONE INCH ABOVE THE SURFACE OF THE WALK OR SIDEWALK AND, THE WALK IS 4.9 PERCENT OR LESS GRADIENT OR NO ADJACENT HAZARD EXISTS. 8. WALL SURFACES ADJACENT TO HANDRAILS SHALL BE FREE OF SHARP OR ABRASIVE ELEMENTS. (I.E., NO STUCCO.) z 0 cn PULL SIDE X_, › PULL SIDE 18" MIN. 24" PUSH SIDE PREFERRED , FRONT APPROACHrioi FRONT APPROACH SLIDING SWINGING DOOR X= 12 INCHES (305mm) IF DOOR DOORS AND FOLDING DOORS HAS BOTH A CLOSER S AND LATCH. Maneuvering Clearances CV NOTE: >- X = 36 INCHES (915mm) MINIMUM IF Y = 60 INCHES (1525mm); X =42 INCHES (1068mm) HIIVGG c7 L!C Wr - SW INGING DOOR PULL SIDE z X (24" MIN,) 2 LATCH SIDE APPROACH SLIDING DOORS AND FOLDING DOORS Y 5a INCHES (1370mm) MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER z co PUSH SIDE 4" MIN. PUSH SIDE X 24 " MIN ) NOTE: Y 48 INCHES (1220mm) MIN. IF DOOR HAS CLOSER NOTE: Y = 48 INCHES (1220mm) MIN. IF DOOR HAS BOTH A LATCH AND CLOSER J. CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE FOR WHEELCHAIRS 1. THE MINIMUM CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE A SINGLE, STATIONARY WHEELCHAIR AND OCCUPANT IS 30 INCHES X 48 INCHES. THE MINIMUM CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE FOR WHEELCHAIRS MAY BE POSITIONED FOR FORWARD OR PARALLEL APPROACH TO AN OBJECT, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE FOR WHEELCHAIRS MAY BE PART OF THE KNEE SPACE REQUIRED UNDER SOME OBJECTS. 2. ONE FULL UNOBSTRUCTED SIDE OF THE CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE FOR A WHEELCHAIR SHALL ADJOIN OR OVERLAP, AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OR ADJOIN ANOTHER WHEELCHAIR CLEAR FLOOR SPACE. IF A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE IS LOCATED IN AN ALCOVE OR OTHERWISE CONFINED ON ALL OR APART OF THREE SIDES. ADDITIONAL MANEUVERING CLEARANCES SHALL BE PROVIDED. 3. PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL 12 INCH WIDTH ON ONE SIDE FOR ALCOVES GREATER THAN 15 INCHES DEEP AND DESIGNED FOR FRONTAL APPROACH, EXCEPT AT DRINKING FOUNTAIN ALCOVES WHICH MAY BE A MAXIMUM OF 24' DEEP BEFORE REQUIRING THE ADDITIONAL 12' CLEAR WIDTH. 4. PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL 6 INCHES WIDTH ON ONE SIDE FOR ALCOVES GREATER THAN 24 INCHES DEEP AND DESIGNED FOR FRONTAL APPROACH. 5. IF THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE ONLY ALLOWS FORWARD APPROACH TO AN OBJECT, THE MAXIMUM HIGH FORWARD REACH ALLOWED SHALL BE 48 INCHES AND THE LOW SIDE REACH SHALL BE NO LESS THAN 15 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR. IF THE HIGH FORWARD REACH IS OVER AN OBSTRUCTION, THE HORIZONTAL DIMENSION OF THE OBSTRUCTION SHALL BE LESS THAN 25 INCHES. THE MAXIMUM HIGH FORWARD REACH ALLOWED SHALL THEN BE 44 INCHES WHEN THE HORIZONTAL DIMENSION OF THE OBSTRUCTION IS BETWEEN 20 INCHES AND 25 INCHES. 6. IF THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE ALLOWS PARALLEL APPROACH BY A PERSON IN A WHEELCHAIR, THE MAXIMUM HIGH SIDE REACH ALLOWED SHALL BE 54 INCHES AND THE LOW SIDE REACH SHALL BE NO LESS THAN 9 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR. SIDE REACH I5 ALLOWED OVER AN OBSTRUCTION PROVIDED THE HORZONTAL DIMENSION OF THE OBSTRUCTION DOES NOT EXCEED 24 INCHES AND MAXIMUM HIGH REACH OVER A 24 INCH OBSTRUCTION SHALL THEN BE 46 INCHES. K. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 1. THE CENTER OF RECEPTACLE OUTLETS SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 18 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR OR WORKING PLATFORM. 2. THE CENTER OF THE GRIP OF THE OPERATING HANDLE OF TO SWITCHES INTENDED T BE USED BY THE OCCUPANT OF THE W ROOM OR AREA TO CONTROL LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE OUTLETS, APPLIANCES, OR COOLING, HEATING AND VENTILATING EQUIPMENT, SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 30' NOR MORE THAN 44' ABOVE THE FLOOR OR WORKING PLATFORM. 3. THE CENTER OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES (BOXES) SHALL BE LOCATED 44 INCHES ABOVE THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR, WORKING PLATFORM, GROUND SURFACE OR SIDEWALK. 4. THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY SHALL BE THE STANDARD USED TO IDENTIFY FACILITIES THAT ARE ACCESSIBLE TO AND USABLE BY DISABLED PERSONS AS SET FORTH IN THE GOVERNING AGENCIES ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS. THE SYMBOL SPECIFIED ABOVE SHALL CONSIST OF A WHITE FIGURE ON A BLUE BACKGROUND. THE BLUE SHALL BE EQUAL TO COLOR NO. 15090 IN FEDERAL STANDARD #595A. SEE "SIGNS / PICTOGRAPHS" DETAIL ON TYPICAL ACCESSIBILITY DETAIL SHEET. L. ALARMS 1. VISUAL ALARMS. VISUAL ALARM SIGNAL APPLIANCES SHALL BE INTEGRATED INTO THE BUILDING OR FACILITY ALARM SYSTEM. IF SINGLE STATION AUDIBLE ALARMS ARE PROVIDED THEN SINGLE STATION VISUAL ALARM SIGNALS SHALL BE PROVIDED. VISUAL ALARM PHOTOMETRIC AND LOCATION FEATURES' A. THE LAMP SHALL BE A XERION STROBE TYPE OR EQUIVALENT. B. THE COLOR SHALL BE CLEAR OR NOMINAL WHITE (I.E., UNFILTERED OR CLEAR FILTERED WHITE LIGHT). C. THE MAXIMUM PULSE DURATION SHALL BE TWO- TENTHS OF ONE SECOND (0.2 SEC) WITH A MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE OF 40 PERCENT. THE PULSE DURATION IS DEFWED AS THE TIME INTERVAL BETWEEN INITIAL AND FINAL POINTS OF 10 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM SIGNAL D. THE INTENSITY SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 75 CANDELA. E. THE FLASH RATE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OP 1 HS AND A MAXIMUM OF 3 HZ . F. THE APPLIANCE SHALL BE PLACED 80 TN (2030 MN) ABOVE THE HIGHEST FLOOR LEVEL WITHIN THE SPACE OR 6 TN (152 MM) BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER I5 LOWER. G. IN GENERAL, NO PLACE IN ANY ROOM OR SPACE REQUIRED TO HAVE A VISUAL SIGNAL APPLIANCE SHALL BE MORE THAN 50 FT (15M) FROM THE SIGNAL (IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE). IN LARGE ROOMS AND SPACES EXCEEDING 100 FT (30M) ACROSS, WITHOUT OBSTRUCTIONS 6 FT (2M) ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR, SUCH AS AUDITORIUMS, DEVICES MAY BE PLACED AROUND THE PERIMETER, SPACED A MAXIMUM 100 FT (30M) APART IN LIEU OF SUSPENDING APPLIANCES FROM THE CEILING. H. NO PLACE IN COMMON CORRIDORS OR HALLWAYS IN WHICH VISUAL ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES ARE REQUIRED SHALL BE MORE THAN 50 FT (15M) FROM THE SIGNAL. NOTE: ALL DOORS IN ALCOVES SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CLEARANCES FOR FRONT APPROACHES. 48" MINIMUM TWO HINGED DOORS IN SERIES CCS.4 A WOMEN • Notes, Signs, and Pictograms 1 :1 COMPRESSED CARPET 1/4" MAX. BELOW THRESHOLD 1/2" MAX. PILE HEIGHT B. THRESHOLD X 2 6 " = l' -0" LEVERS CS.4 1/2" = 1' -0" C. LEVEL CHANGES A. TRANSITION BETWEEN FLOOR FINISHES FLOOR X PUSH/PULLS LETTERS AND NUMBERS: 1. WIDTH TO HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN 3 : 5 AND 1 : 1. 2. STROKE WIDTH TO HEIGHT BETWEEN 1 : 5 AND 1 : 10. 3, CONTRAST CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS WITH BACKGROUND. 4. SANS SERIF CHARACTERS. SIGNS / PICTOGRAMS: 5 . 6. CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUNDS SHALL BE OF NON - GLARE CONTRASTING COLORS. 7, SIGNS / PICTOGRAMS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE WALL ADJACENT TO DOOR LEADING TO THE ROOM OR SPACE THEY DESCRIBE AND AT 60" A.F.F. TO SIGN CENTERLINE AND WHERE A PERSON MAY APPROACH WITHIN 3" OF SIGNAGE WITHOUT ENCOUNTERING PROTRUDING OBJECTS OR STANDING WITHIN THE DOOR SWING AREA. 8 . 10. Threshold Level Changes Hardware Mounting Heights PICTOGRAMS / PICTORIAL SYMBOL SIGNS SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY THE EQUIVALENT VERBAL DESCRIPTION PLACED DIRECTLY BELOW THE PICTOGRAM. THE BORDER DIMENSION SHALL BE 6" MINIMUM HEIGHT. VERTICAL CLEARANCE AT SUSPENDED SIGNS WITH MINIMUM HEADROOM OF 80" REQUIRE MINIMUM 3" CHARACTER HEIGHT MEASURED BY USING UPPERCASE "X ". CHARACTERS AND NUMBERS SHALL BE SIZED ACCORDING TO VIEWING DISTANCE FROM WHICH READ. LOWER CASE CHARACTERS PERMITTED. SIGN LOCATIONS: 9 ALL ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCES IDENTIFIED WITH MINIMUM OF ONE STANDARD SIGN. ADDITIONAL DIRECTIONAL SIGNS ALONG ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL ARE REQUIRED. 11. BUILDINGS REMODELED TO PROVIDE ACCESSIBLE SANITARY FACILITIES FOR PUBLIC USE SHALL HAVE INFORMATION POSTED IN THE LOBBY AS PART OF THE BUILDING DIRECTORY. INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY: 12. STANDARD USED TO IDENTIFY ACCESSIBLE FACILITIES. 13, CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS SHALL CONTRAST WITH THEIR BACKGROUND EITHER LIGHT CHARACTERS ON A DARK BACKGROUND OR DARK CHARACTERS ON A LIGHT BACKGROUND. 14. WHEN ENFORCING AGENCY DETERMINES, IF APPROPRIATE, SPECIAL DESIGNS AND COLORS MAY BE APPROVED. BRAILLE: 15. USE CONTRASTED GRADE 2 BRAILLE, DOTS TO BE 0.1 INCH ON CENTER IN EACH CELL. 16. 0.2 INCH SPACE BETWEEN CELLS. 17. DOTS RAISED MINIMUM 0.025 INCH ABOVE BACKGROUND. NOTES: THRESHOLD FIN. FLOOR LEVEL 1. 1/2" MAXIMUM TOTAL HEIGHT WITH 1/4" MAXIMUM VERTICAL CHANGE AT EDGE. 2. 1 : 2 SLOPED BEVEL REQUIRED IF LEVEL CHANGE IS OVER 1/4" VERITCAL LEVEL CHANGE. 3. 1/4" MAXIMUM VERTICAL LEVEL CHANGE WITHOUT BEVELED EDGE. FLOOR PANIC BARS Dosioll DIVERSIFIED. ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 WestparkDrive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com f 744.E and tb C5:'Sif:7 St /'241 ai i ?,.P ;" roherr/ '!f 1 _del: I >l1'Prri/ it e' ..• I GMAT. / l (, OGsSlting, The ul % %t'i' use Ii; this iYi3i! ?r. . 3 ".. +, ?b:// ,'v /1/'!1' rIA'S ro4srSY ii in :bibl1'aei .7.'.','.'! any I R1l71i,l 7 ,E41d lull be ! %i ii l'.'.' ;P rii action. JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTO ?.i MPW CLIENT NAME J ' 931- Q-4-4. ts, 16T � o K ° i UIt z 1ER 1C A GH T � �E PROJECT NAME PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJI .CI' MLANAGL:R Lillie ie 2007 PROJECT TEAM DRAWN BY BJS NO REASON DATE 12/21/07 RE 77 CITY OF 1 UIs'VVILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE ACCESSIBILITY NOTES PROJECT NUMBER . 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. CS.4 FIXTURE KEY NOTES r 0 36" X 36" 1 FINISHED ENDS BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR 2 STORAGE UNIT BY STORAGE VENDOR 3 SEE CASHWRAP DETAILS ON ML -1 FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS & J -BOX LOCATION -TYPE. PROVIDE BUZZER AND CONTROL CONNECTION TO BACK EXIT DOOR. 4 PROVIDE A SIGN "DOORS ARE TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING NORMAL BUSINESS HOURS ". 5 ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM BENCH 6 G.C. TO PROVIDE WOOD BLOCKING 3 1/2 "X 3 1/2" AT WALL CONNECTION, PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINISH 7 G.C. TO PROVIDE CONT. BLOCKING AT ALL PLUMBERS PIPE CONNECTIONS 0 36" X 36" r 0 36" X 36" 0 0 36" X 36" 36' X 36" [ `a' +. wr 3D VIEW - FIXTURE PLAN GENERAL FIXTURE NOTES; GENERAL NOTE: 1. MILLWORK VENDOR PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: A. FOR ALL "A ", "B" & "C" CABINETS: 1. EACH CABINET TO INCLUDE (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES AND (1) ONE COMBO SHELF WITH A STRAIGHT BAR. 2. IN ADDITION , PROVIDE A TOTAL OF: I. 20% EXTRA "STANDARD SHELVES" II.(4) FOUR- EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH CURVED BAR. III. (6) SIX- EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WIHT STRAIGHT BAR B. FOR EACH "E) CABINET (JEAN CABINET) 1. PROVIDE TOTAL OF EIGHT STANDARD SHELVES: SIX TO BE OVI E A OTA O (8) EIGH S ANDARD SHE 6 INSTALLED AND (2) TWO TO BE STORED. 2. PROVIDE (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES, INSTALLED. 2. PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR ALL PLUMBERS PIPE. JEAN WALL CABINET AT JEAN WALL PASS -TH R U SALES AREA MIRRRORS (VERIFY COLOR WITH LUCKY BRAND JEANS) HANGING GRID; SEE DETAILS ON SHEET A6.2 DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815. Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 MANAGERS DESK WITH OVERHEAD SHELVES TOILET ROOM I r f 1 I 11 I0 I 0 I 0 10 10 1 0 II II 1 9 I 11 I 1 11 I I FITTING RM 1 .— :7 3' - 10 5/8" 3' - 10 5/8" 1 /4" = 1' -0" FLOOR PLAN \ _: __ s v¢• Gi• i •ps,• }c..} \'rti \ „k..: G: •:. •.�} \ \ \ A .. :. :. :•.r n \r r.:.r.,�x r..x.......�:,.,.r n \r •. : r.t\ \� � \ \:. 3 4..4. .4. :}: j: ti' t.:>;.:. 9;:” y<•`.'• �: '. \ >'y <::. ?;ti3:S:p:y: ? ?v: {.sti,, ti•tiE.S 4' - 3 3/4" 0 / EQ. 2 0 i� MARK 3' X 6' FIXTURE FIXTURE LEGEND - SEE SHEET ML -1 & ML -2 FOR MORE DETAILS (NOT ALL FIXTURES USED) LARGE TABLE EQ. 2 ** L 1 0 I0 I0 1 0 I0 1 0 I Iq II II I II II 11 11 1I 11 11 11 1 11 I1 I11 1 11 1 11 III MARK KJ ) 4 ' - 10 3/4" FIXTURE FITTING RM 2 r1 0 :.: w: „ k .,,w ..,,x ROUND TABLE EAGLE RACK FITTING ROOM MIRRORS 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE- SEE NOTE 7 r— co FITTING RM 4 4' - 1 1/4" 4' X 8' EQ. / T STAND C7 0 'C- MARK TQ FIXTURE LAMP FIXTURE ENTRY LAMP FIXTURE SQUARE TABLE 42 "X42" DISPLAY AREA DISPLAY AREA SEWED FR COMPLIANC APP BAR 21 2. CAW Of Tulmila 1IS11 M - MILLWORK VENDOR PROVIDED BY: L- LUCKY BRAND JEANS GC - GENERAL CONTRACTOR i 7%'%." ei: Pr7:( i;l; a ^'lUit;tkfu %i.. :d5!.i'iM:i e1'r (r,,liyiiiri,, f; 'J' iljt'' ? i +%) il'd!74::% their : /•.') Wn consent zr pro •1 y1$Cdi ...i •/ nine3Qi'FC'?I; ?mil he S!:(/ '' t`;? l/1i / c %,i nl r. JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WA$HIN3TON www.Iittleonline.corn PRINCIPAI.IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJE(. MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS Little 2007 M T W co Q M CO 1 CL OD — or) CC 02 E — J Z a k a cc W J W co a / W 0 U) ._., CITY OF TUKVVII..A MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER — I_ 02.21.08 SHEET TITLE FIXTURE PLAN PRO]ECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 FF.1 DATE A0.0 PERSPECTIVE VIEW PERSPECTIVE VIEW PERSPECTIVE VIEW • • A0.0 g s,,,.. ' '' '' a `vi9a °i • PERSPECTIVE VIEW PERSPECTIVE VIEW r4 �k .y %:. >. {%.Y:iS:•tr.+:Si:. v' OS::i3 -' . `: ';;:ic Ooh • " .:r»r:.; SBb` ra-'' j-,....:;,'':-;-;:::--:;: :::- yi,; >- i:- ?::c:s= ::;.>s.:,:, _;�:;�::trC:c•S• >. "T : +:k m ..............,..... -.::: S: Sl.: ?,:: #�;?S. n��� �%} }�'$}A:tr: huh +A•.p:w:+•:A:'::::: ri•:.'- ��:- :4.4'.::::::::::: �n+n+n�3l.•'�Q PERSPECTIVE VIEW PERSPECTIVE VIEW 1 PERSPECTIVE VIEW A0.0 EMI-I -1E:1- t I 3 711 l::o:eiti# 4 \ 'CCO \ \\v::; �. >r�� \ � �� "G ' .''• [z I T DIVERSIFIED. ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815. Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com ((r:h.in 07l: S1,140i .::Y fly ptriPe,1 ■■i J % *:P . %!1'tl7i;r;re ..hrb:f ?darR„ pj 4 rrkirt4•t;;n ri hlii oth l „ e iir !bit iYr^:i"1:r .Yr t%NXG f�irlJ'A�iP l: i "rirFPJ• "7,�' f lriblintrei :in any i:8riiii'i:l !N:: ii✓ jn!•'Li' ^dl.oi.. 2007 2 '• JOHN C. • OMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME • n T W J CO Q CO N 11 03 co FE � i o J Z 0' M0 Q cc M W V 041 W ort I- 0 PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJICI' MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS CITY OF 1 ul<vvILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMv1I I CENTER SHEET TITLE • PERSPECTIVES PROJECT NUMBER 625-4089 -01 ISSUE DATE • • SHEET NO. • 12/21/07 AO.0 3 HINGES T4A3786 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP x 630 MCKINNEY 1 EXIT DEVICE V4OEB EXIT DEVICE DETEX 1 CYLINDER 6 -PIN BEST PUSH SIDE 1 PULL 109 x 630 ROCKWOOD TO RECEIVE BEST CORE AT TURN OVER 1 CLOSER CLP -8500T x 689 NORTON 1 KICK PLATE K0050 12" x 2 "LDW x 630 TRIMCO 1 THRESHOLD 171A PEMKO 1 DOOR VIEWER 622 ROCKWOOD 1 DRIP 142A ZERO INTERNATIONAL EXTERIOR APPLICATION ONLY 1 BOTTOM DRIP 8189A ZERO INTERNATIONAL EXTERIOR APPLICATION ONLY 1 WEATHERSTRIP (SET) 8879A HEAD AND JAMBS ZERO INTERNATIONAL EXTERIOR APPLICATION ONLY 1 PANIC HARDWARE V4OEB EXIT DEVICE DETEX 3 HINGES TA2714 4.5 x 4.5 x 652 MCKINNEY 1 PRIVACY SET M05402LN x 626 DETEX 1 CLOSER 8501 x 689 NORTON PUSH SIDE 2 KICK PLATE K0050 12" x 2" LDW x 630 TRIMCO TO RECEIVE BEST CORE AT TURN OVER 1 WALL STOP 3211 x 630 DOOR CONTROLS 3 SILENCERS 8S x GREY DOOR CONTROLS 2 PAIR OF HINGES TA2314 STAINLESS STEEL MCKINNEY 2 PULL CUSTOM SUPPLIED BY OWNER 2 PUSH BAR CUSTOM SUPPLIED BY OWNER PUSH SIDE 2 DEADLOCK/THUMB THRN 83T 7 M 8TSTK 626 BEST TO RECEIVE BEST CORE AT TURN OVER 2 CYLINDERS AS REQUIRED BEST 2 STOP /HOLDER 450 H.D. FLOOR MTD IVES 1 THRESHOLD 171A PEMKO 1 SIGN ` 'THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED" 1 WEATHERSTRIP (SET) 8879A HEAD AND JAMBS ZERO INTERNATIONAL EXTERIOR APPLICATION ONLY 2 BOTTOM RAIL DEAD BOLT MS1861 -01 ADAMS RITE 7/16" DRILLED HOLES IN THRESHOLD REQUIRED 3 HINGES TA 2714 4.5 x 4.5 x 652 MCKINNEY 1 PASSAGE SET MO 0540 LN x 626 YALE 1 KICK PLATE K0050 12" x 2" LDW x 630 TRIMCO PUSH SIDE 1 FLOOR STOP /HOLDER 450 H.D.FLOOR MTD. IVES 3 SILENCERS 8S x GREY DOOR CONTROLS 1 CLOSER 8501 x 689 NORTON DOOR SCHEDULE: (E) EXISTING SEE SHEET A0.3 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE DETAILS Mark 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 From Room MALL CONCORSE SALES SALES SALES SALES SALES SALES VESTIBULE STOCKROOM STOCKROOM To Room SALES FLOOR FITTING ROOM #4 FITTING ROOM #3 FITTING ROOM #2 FITTING ROOM #1 VESTIBULE HC FITTING RM STOCK ROOM CORRIDOR TOILET ROOM Height 9' -0" 11' - 1 1/2" 11' - 1 1/2" 11' - 1 1/2" 11' - 1 1/2" 7' -0" 7 ' 0" 7' -0" 7 '_ 0 " 7' -0" Width 6' -0" 3' -81/2" 3' -81/2" 3' -81/2" 3' -81/2" 3' -0" 3' -0" 3' -0 3' -0" 3' -0" Thickness 0' - 1 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" 0' - 1 3/4" Door Type Al E E E E E E B D Door Material WD WD H.M H.M Finish P -2 P -1 P -1 P -1 Fire Rating 45 MIN Frame Material WD. WD. WD. WD. WD. WD. WD. WD. H.M. H.M. Frame Finish P -2 P -2/P -1 P -2/P -1 * P -2/P -1 * P -2/P -1 * P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 P -1 Head Detail H -1 H -4 H -4 H -4 H -4 H -5 H -5 H -3 H -2 H -2 DOOR TYPE: WOOD PANEL AS SCHEDULED Al 1/2" TEMPERED GLASS A� ti 5 1/2" B — 1/4" THK. FROSTED TEMPERED GLASS 5 1/2" WOOD PANEL 10" KICK PLATE SUN- DOR -CO SD -314 POPLAR U, Q C io } I- PANIC HARDWARE DOOR VIEWER 10" KICK PLATE D CASED OPENING E DOOR /HARDWARE NOTES: 1. GC TO PREVENT STRIPPING & BURRING OF SCREW HEADS. 2. DOOR OPENING TO RESTROOMS ARE TO HAVE A "MEN "/"WOMEN" /"UNISEX" SIGN OF A CIRCLE, 1/4" THINK, 12" IN DIAMETER WITH 1/4" THINK TRIANGLE SUPERIMPOSED ON & WITHIN THE CIRCLE. THIS SIGN SHALL BE MOUNTED AT 60" AFF. 3. ALL HARDWARE SUPPLIED BY GC. UNO. THE LISTED HARDWARE CREATES A BASE STANDARD, EQUAL PRODUCTS MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW BY OWNER. 4. ALL FINISHES SHALL BE SATIN CHROME PLATED #626, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. ALL HINGES MUST BE MORTISED. 6. PROVIDE CUT SHEET FOR OWNER USE AND REVIEW. 7. GC TO VERIFY CONDITION OF EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE. NOTIFY OWNER IF NEED TO REPLACE. 8. POST A SIGN THAT READS, "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS. " USE LETTERS 1" HIGH ON CONTRASTING BACKGROUND AT THE MAIN EXIT. 9. NO THUMB LATCHES OR KEYED CYLINDER DEAD BOLTS ALLOWED ON ANY DOORS UNLESS OPERATED BY A SINGLE ACTION WITH LEVER. 10. MANUALLY OPERATED EDGE OR SURFACE MOUNTED FLUSH BOLTS OR SURFACE BOLTS OR ANY TYPE OF DEVICE THAT MAYBE USED TO CLOSE OR RESTRAIN THE DOOR OTHER THAN THE OPERATION OF THE LOCKING DEVICE SHALL NOT BE USED AND ARE PROHIBITED. 11. PROVIDE A 5 "X5" SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBLITY AT PRIMARY ENTRANCE. SEE 6 /C5-4. 12. PROVIDE APPROVED BRAILLE SIGNAGE ON STRIKE SIDE OF TOILET ROOM DOOR CENTERED 60" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. SEE 6 /CS -4 FOR DETAILS. 13. OFFSETS AT ALL THRESHOLDS AND AT ANY CHANGE OF FLOORING MATERIAL SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM OF 1/2 ". OFFSETS GREATER THAN 1/4" REQUIRE A MAXIMUM BEVELED SLOPE OF 1 UNIT VERTICAL TO 2 UNITS HORIZONTAL, EXCEPT THAT LEVEL CHANGES NOT EXCEEDING 1/4" MAYBE VERTICAL. SEE 6 /CS -4. 14. PROVIDE 2- A:10 -B:C FIRE EXTINGUISHER(S) (MAXIMUM 75 -FOOT TRAVEL DISTANCE FROM ANY POINT IN THE BUILDING). 15 .PROVIDE PEEP HOLE AND A BUZZER CONNECTED TO CASHWRAP. PAINT PER LL SPEC IDENTITY SIGNAGE (TRADE NAME & ADDRESS) 2" TALL HELVETICA BLACK VINYL LETTERS, 48" A.F.F., SEE NOTE 8. 16. PROVIDE DOORBELL @ 3' -6" A.F.F. ON CORRIDOR SIDE : COORDINATE WITH ON -SITE TENANT COORDINATOR FOR MALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE. Jamb Detail J -1 J -4 J -4 J -4 J -4 J -5 J -5 J -3 J -2 J -2 HW -B HW -C HW -D Frame FR 45 MIN Hardware Set HW -A -1 HW -B HW -D HW -C SEE NOTES 8 & 11 CASED OPENING CASED OPENING CASED OPENING CASED OPENING CASED OPENING CASED OPENING PROVIDE FROSTED GLASS -PANEL ABOVE SEE NOTES 15 & 16 SEE NOTES: 2 & 12 HW -A -1 (PAIR EXTERIOR LEVEL "A -1" STORE ENTRY DOORS) (WOOD /GLASS) DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING Remarks * SEE HEAD & JAMB DETAILS FOR LACATION OF PAINT FINISHES HARDWARE SCHEDULE QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER SUPPLIER REMARKS 1)v NOT USED REVIEWED FOP, CODE COMPLIPNCE APPR OVE n B ILO 01\15.1U0 . 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217: www.Iittleonline.com This s fli2.7rm: m14".: ;t•i. ,f :u2 the % ter; r .'f /? iii!'frs rlrc]f:-Iirb:i'2:fll. "ui (.v:es,i thing r LP m),gMitic1%dr, (i?ii•Wirl L % %0,` %!!l "60;',' i11 $bii drawl ,31?`rl9iri 'ii8,i':3:rii;P ?: ff nsrizt 3F prohibited ll:a any ill ?;": ?ifi'izie,,' will be !Y.,roan?'!] kga . 8746 ,r o JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTC CLIENT NAME DUNG Ai AmriticA. Cy TOO'C6I1CH'TO DID r PROJECT NAME I I q PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS 12/21/07 Little 2007 T W J 003 00 Q2 0 cc 09 J� J Z d) cc W I— W W 0 1% 0 REVISIONS. NO REASON DATE RE � CITY OF TUKVVILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. A0.1 12 A0.2 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ( Pi ) BATTEN ( P1) J -5 3 " = 1' -0" ( P1 ) ALUM.STOREFRONT FINISHED WOOD FRAME, TYP WOOD /GLASS DOOR, SEE SCHEDULE 13/8" x 3/8" WOOD DOOR STOP 35/8" MTL STUD (TYP.) 1/4 "Th SALES FLOOR lli 31/2" 1/4" ACCESSIBLE FITTING RM OR VESTIBULE 35/8" IL STUD (TYP.) 3/4" POP CASING P1 ( P1) 1"x4" POPLAR TRIM ( P1 ) 35/8" IL STUD (TYP.) 3/4" POPI AR CASING ( P1) Zo n DOOR AS SCHEDULED 1/2 "X1 -1/2" POPLAR DOOR STOP P1 1 "x4" POPLAR TRIM ( P1) •7 7[1 ` . IT L � jI ICS O]I IJI I L A ° .� -_�.� K urd SALES FLOOR H -5 3" = 1'-0" H -3 3" = 1' -0" FINISH WOOD MOLDING BY MILLWORK 35/8" MTL STUD (TYP.) 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB WOOD SHIM, AS REQUIRED WOOD /GLASS DOOR, SEE SCHEDULE 1 3/8" x3/8" WOOD DOOR STOP H -1 3 " = 1'_0" 47/8" ACCESSIBLE FITTING RM OR VESTIBULE 35/8" IL STUD (TYP.) 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ( P1 ) 1"X4" POPLAR TRIM (p- 1"X4" POPLAR TRIM ( Pi ) 1/2 "X1 -1/2" POPLAR DOOR STO DOOR AS SCHEDULED STOCKROOM CORRIDOR FITTING ROOM L 6" = 1' -0" GLAZING PER DOOR SCHEDULE SOLID PAINT GRADE POPLAR RAIL (STILE SIM) PAINT GRADE POPLAR COVE PROFILE PANEL DOOR DETAIL 5/8" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE TYP. (2) STUD ALL AROUND FRAME TYP. SALES FLOOR 3/4 "x5 1/2" BASE 1 5/8" MTL STUD PRESSED METAL WELDED FRAME ANCHORED TO STUDS ALL AROUND 3/4 "x6" BASE 1/2" GWB 3/8" X 1 3/4" POPLAR BATTEN CONTINOUS CAULK BOTH SIDES N FLUTED ( P2 ) TRIM CV 1" X PAINT GRADE POPLAR CASING( P2 ) SUSPENDED CEILING w/ NATURAL TIN CEILING PANELS FITTING ROOM A0.2 CORRIDOR D0 9) �Dll 1/2" H -2 3" = 1' -0" ao.z 3•• - 1'-0•• A0.2 3" = 1 ,_ 0 „ 3/4" 1/4" • t CV CV • • r C DOOR PULL 1 1/4" 1/2" CV � 1/4" 50" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR CROWN MOULDING WD. BLOCKING SALES FLOOR FASCIA BOARD, OFCI. INSTALL FASCIA PRIOR TO CUTTING & INSTALLING FLUTED MOULDING ( P2) lX WOOD TRIM PAINTED FLUTED TRIM BEYOND ( P2 ) 1X 3 1/2" WOOD TRIM 5/8" GYP. BD 0/35/8" METAL FRAMING( P1 ) 5/8" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE TYP. CONTINOUS CAULK BOTH SIDES STOCKROOM DOOR AS SCHEDULED PRESSED METAL WELDED FRAME ANCHORED TO STUDS ALL AROUND LEATHER BELT DOOR PULL (OFCI) ( P2) T DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 /hF.I rr;ia;tt„' end ti;r• rdeS03 s viiii am' tbe ',Tber%y' I.i%i/e,irriLi /itti_•1nhi,'ct a 1.:c;,rs:h'in:,. ;i,e '"�%1 %r, ;•,�h.�jr :;ter Nse %1/ is ;,'1t.'_i:1;;/ their n'Tilten (Ling..' Zs /'m /; %�Z:`. °:i v;(1 any rige ieief will he sui eei' P? legal. ^r/ihm JOIN C. KOMISIN STATE OFWASI -I NGTCN CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE. Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW 1)RAWN 131' BJS V Lillie 2007 www.Iittleonline.com M j co uu OD T oO <2 N ri co can crco Liu 1— 03 J Q 2 v W 1.1 J W O � N. C (I) 0 U) REVISIONS NO REASON DATE ~ CITY Ur"i ur.v'w3s.: MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE DOOR DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 AO.2 FINISH SCHEDULE NOTE: NOT ALL FINISHES ARE USED, REFER TO PLANS AND ELEVATIONS (ABC) TYPE IMAGE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION /COLOR CLASSIFICATION REMARKS C P3 ° V £::- ; : � e KAWNEER OR EQUAL PAINT MINWAX COLOR; TUDOR BROWN BRIWAX CLASS A FINISH COAT , , \� ., •: PAINT RUSTOLEUM METALLIC GRAY OR APPROVED EQUAL CLASS A C ACT) C P4 - - - - - NO IMAGE CLEAR SEALER BONA KEMI BONA KEMI TRAFFIC CLASS A PENETRATING FINISH C P5 ) AWN 2 - -- • 4 PLYWOOD BY G.C. APA, EXPOSURE 1 GRADE A -B, SHEATHING, NATURAL DOUGLAS FIR. TREATED WITH FIREX 10 00 CLASS A NO VISIBLE MARKINGS ON EXPOSED SIDE, FACING THE SALES AREA, USE ADH , SEE NOTE N S O 8 & 9 C PLY) RUBBER COVE BASE ROPPE OR EQUAL #100 -BLACK PLASTIC LAMINATE WILSON ART FROSTY WHITE #1573 -60 CLASS C OFFICE COUNTER SUPPLIED BY GC PL GRC BASE G C 5 DECOFORM D. CONROD) 416.745.4970 GRC BASE MOLD BY "DECO FORM" COLOR - NATURAL FINISH W/ MATTE POLYURETHANE TOP COAT WOOD SILL GENERAL CONTRACTOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR (SEE PROFILE ON SHEET A0.4) CLASS A STOREFRONT ED SEE DETAIL (. P2 ) 4" X 2" PAINT GRADE POPLAR 3/ 5 1 / G A O R CLASS C SS C { } >- ?• >: >-:;<• ,, >x>,«.;::: >.; ? : ry : :x ..: TONGUE &GROOVE GLENDALE MILLS 818-244-3196 1/2" X 8" TONGUE & V- GROOVE PLANK - WHITE OAK CLASS C PENETRATING FINISH. C TG2 SEE NOTE 9 NON COMBUSTIBLE CONTACT: 206- 762 -1858 ( B6 ) WOOD TRIM BY GC 3/4" X 3 1/2" (NOMINAL) PAINT GRADE POPLAR CLASS C SEE ELEVATIONS FOR PAINT FINISHES; SEE NOTE 9 TR 1 3/4" x 3/8" BATTENS. P1 l SEE NOTE 9 J CBB 1 12X12 VINYL MANNINGTON MANNINGTON VCT; COLOR; 133 ALOMONDINE CLASS A DE DESERT SAND S NON O CO MBUSTIBLE INSTALL ALES S S AREA SEE NOTE 5, 6, 7 _ WPA >< >�� > ><¢::, {�:; { <. s:: : {:;:;:;: i ... WALLPAPER OFCI CUSTOM CLASS C OFCI CONTRACTOR TO PAINT CLASS C BENJAMIN MOORE C P1 ) REFER TO PATTERNED WALL PAPER SCHEDULE ON SHEET A0.4 WALLPAPER OFCI CUSTOM CLASS C OFCI (WPP) FINISH SCHEDULE NOTE: NOT ALL FINISHES ARE USED, REFER TO PLANS AND ELEVATIONS (ABC) TYPE EXAMPLE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION /COLOR FLAME SPREAD CLASSIFICATION REMARKS ALUM. STOREFRONT KAWNEER OR EQUAL ANODIZED BLACK NON COMBUSTIBLE STOREFRONT SYSTEM ALM) C ` ACCUSTICAL CEILING TILE USG 2' X 4' FROST CLIMAPLUS SQ EDGE. WHITE, GRID A CLASS A OFFICE, STOCK ROOM, EXIT CORRIDOOR C ACT) - - - - - CANVAS C AS AWNING SUNBRELLA MARINE AWNING COLOR: BLACK, # 4608 CLASS C EXTERIOR STOREFRONT CANOPY, OPEN ON ENDS AWN1 C AWN 2 - -- • CANVAS AWNING SUNBRELLA FABRIC MARINE AWNING COLOR: ALPINE, #4655 CLASS C EXTERIOR STOREFRONT CANOPY, OPEN ON ENDS RUBBER COVE BASE ROPPE OR EQUAL #100 -BLACK CLASS A OFFICE, STOCK ROOM C B1 C B3 . ..: : ..N : Vsl . �• . � GRC BASE G C 5 DECOFORM D. CONROD) 416.745.4970 GRC BASE MOLD BY "DECO FORM" COLOR - NATURAL FINISH W/ MATTE POLYURETHANE TOP COAT CLASS A ALE AREA EXTERIOR SALES & 0 SEE DETAIL NOTE 3 - WOODBASE 0 BY GC 4" X 2" PAINT GRADE POPLAR 3/ 5 1 / G A O R CLASS C SS C SEE ELEVATIONS FOR PAINT FINISHES. EE SH S S NOTE 9 C B4 STONE BASE OREGON TILE AND MARBLE MONTAUK BLACK SLATE ST /OTM/658G NON COMBUSTIBLE CONTACT: 206- 762 -1858 ( B6 ) \�� .. y a.� ., ,;� °:v� e . : . c,, ,. n *._.,. • 'N \Ns, ,,,,..„....„.\\:.,...„ BOARD AND BATTEN BY GC PAINT GRADE POPLAR BATTENS OVER GYPSUM CLASS C 1 3/4" x 3/8" BATTENS. P1 l SEE NOTE 9 J CBB 1 ..,,,,, , \am `��� \ ;�. \ \\ \ THIN BRICK SIMONS BRICK BY MASTERTILE TIM WATSON S (714 -712 -8202) TIM.WATSON @M ASTERTILE.COM DE DESERT SAND S NON O CO MBUSTIBLE INSTALL ALES S S AREA SEE NOTE 5, 6, 7 BR `� �� ¢¢a .,.< CROWN MOULDING L &L LUMBER OFCI CROWN AT JEAN WALL CLASS C SEE ELEVATIONS FOR PAINT FINISHES; SEE NOTE 9 c' aaaa: c: a ':"•.rri?ds3v:sii::i::i:::;of: \ t : fi A_ V 4y , -- - - - ---- - t -- -- METAL CORNICE CHICAGO METALLIC CORNICE 63.40.026 NON COMBUSTIBLE AT SALES AREA METAL LAY -IN CEILINGS, NOTE 3 CD NO IMAGE EXISTING FINISH (EXISTING) (EXISTING RESTROOM) CD s fi :: , . ?3:3ag �"� s: 17" . {. -fix. : - + :: ?wtw . >yak `F Av. . .¢ : ^}1{ii);}'n`{ • •J"x] K +n'n WOOD FLOOR PRAIRE SHORES LTD CONTACT: JIM GOURLEYJR. PH: 262.694.9748 FX: 262.694.9437 5/8" X 3" PRE - ENGINEERED T & G WHITE OAK PLANK FLOORING; RANDOM LENGTH; SQUARE EDGED CLASS C 18" LENGTH MINIMUM; FINISH BONA KEMI PENETRATING FINISH, MATTE; SEE NOTE 9 CF• (P5 ) <<F?. 12 X 12 STONE TILE ED- PANLACK TILE #57 GASCOGNE - BLUE NON COMBUSTIBLE ENTRY TILE, NOTE 3 (M CLASEN 714-529-2364) •.,, `$ ,,;MV ,, « h_fi ? {`:: <: r.,- 4:: > ?: WOOD FLOOR PRAIRE SHORES LTD CONTACT: JIM GOURLEYJR. PH: 262.694.9748 FX: 262.694.9437 5/8" X 3" PRE - ENGINEERED T & G WHITE OAK PLANK FLOORING; RANDOM LENGTH; SQUARE EDGED CLASS C 18" LENGTH MINIMUM; FINISH - BONA KEMI PENETRATING FINISH, MATTE; SEE NOTE 9 ( P5 ) FLUTED WOOD TRIM MILLWORK VENDOR 3 5/8" x 5/8" FLUTED TRIM BY MILLWORK CLASS C INSTALLED BY GC PRE - FINISHED ( P2 ) C FRP) , , < ?: ana<c ' Z'S>.Nn.•}'.i'.O i FIBER REINFORCED PANEL MARLITE WHITE CLASS A SEE TOILET ROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ( G1 ) \NT ..,..%: 1 \� �• '' GROUT CUSTOM BUILDING SUPPLIES #10 ANTIQUE WHITE SERIES CLASS A INTERIOR @ BRICK SEE NOTE 7 C GR1 ::::4,444.t4 * .,...`\' ' .:� • '?\�� *'_� �� \:t�: \emu. PERFORATED STAINLESS STEEL METAL GRILLE ARCHITECTURAL GRILLE SQUARE #200, 40% OPEN 14 GAUGE NON COMBUSTIBLE ARCHITECTURAL GRILLE 1- 800 -387 -6267 \v___,7 Y 1 2X4 LAY -IN PANEL GRID - ULTRALINE 3500 PLACE 4'-0" SIDE i PARALLEL TO STOREFRONT .. i MTL (' ( P1 ) r � " """ " �� :' ,.i , .� NATURAL TIN PANEL PAINT CHICAGO METALLIC STYLE #7 W/ MATCHING GRID #371 (PREFERRED LACQUER MILL FINISH) NON COMBUSTIBLE BENJAMIN MOORE HC84 ELMIRA WHITE CLASS A EGGSHELL PAINT ICI DULUX BLACK CLASS A SEMI GLOSS ACRYLIC P2 1. ALL FINISHES TO BE CLASS III OR CLASS C OR BETTER (FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 200 OR LESS) 2. ALL PAINTED WOOD TO BE SPRAYED, NOT BRUSHED. 3. NO SUBSTITUTION WILL BE ACCEPTED. 4. PROVIDE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE UNDER CERAMIC TILE AND EXTEND IT 12" @ WET LOCATIONS UP EVERY WALL APPROVED MATERIALS. "LATICRETE 9235" BY LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL; "PLANICRETE W" BY MAIPEI CORP.; "HYDROMENT ULTRASET" BY BOSTIK; DEX -O -TEK 5. APPLY W/THIN COAT OF MASTIC AND WIGGLE INTO POSITION. SEE DETAIL 8/A6.2 6. 2x8 SIMONS THIN BRICK- DESERT SAND WITH 1/8" TO 1 /4" MORTAR JOINTS - SUPPLIED BY IMPO FALZTILE - MASTER DISTRIBUTION (714) 978 -8905. 7. POLYBLEND SANDED TILE GROUT FROM CUSTOM BUILDING SUPPLY SERIES 1 #10 ANTIQUE WHITE, GROUT W /BAG - KEEP BRICK CLEAN 8. PLYWOOD SHEATHING TO BE FASTENED EVERY 12" O.C. WITH GALVANIZED STEEL STAR DRIVE TRIM HEADSCREWS (.0722 -TT6 -7X2 1/4" McFEELY'S 1 -800- 443 -1937) AND ARE EXPOSED CLEAN AND FLUSH TO WALL FINISH SURFACE.NO PUTTY. PLYWOOD SHALL BE ADHERED TO THE METAL STUD FRAMING WITH SHELLY'S LIQUID MULTI - PURPOPOSE CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE. 9. ALL WOOD AND MDF TO BE FIRE TREATED WITH FIREX 1000. APPLY PER MANUFACTURER'S APPROVED METHOD. N \ \ .\ \ \VV:\N \\\\ \ \ . \, \ A \ \ \ \ , ,, ,, ,,,, :\ N \ \\,\ .\\ ,\.\\ ., \ I• \ , 3 11 = 11_OII LEATHER DOOR PULL D�NGE NO ttCNI LITTL DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com rl =1.0 dr/T.'irtr. !=,'1. ^. i i %:5eSel toWri ail ict' ; 'Dt%°l: = ':: . 1 f I .L '1::1 lnhLetr:a /is1a; /.rr15,g. 1''e .d; ;rAhic ii'rr. r, l:':'irri or :'; bk'i' use /1/ f'li i ei7::// ?He' wit :/i/ t eir aTiften (or, km' iS Mb /hard aNd at ly wig! pie ;;, ;l / % ;ir ✓ii;Pi: ?'? :Ph? ;; rl;nr! 7 46 VOX- JOHN C. KJ AISIN • STATE OF WAS'r"1INnTQN CLIENT NAME o r b c -c C l O ZUNGFLREE AMERIC' �! T OTOU o E PROJECT NAME. - ( n PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL, IN CHARGE Josh Cool Link 2007 PROJECT MANAGLI.R MPW DRAWN BY BJS 1 I Landlord / City Revisions I 02.21.08 FINISH SCHEDULE & FINISH NOTE$ • MAR 0 7 ?U Mn PERMIT G PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE . SHEET NO. PATTERNED WALL PAPER (WPP) SCHEDULE NOTE: NOT ALL TYPES ARE USED, REFER TO PLANS AND ELEVATIONS TYPE SAMPLE IMAGE MATERIAL DRAWING REPRESENTATION MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION /COLOR CLASSIFICATION REMARKS g ': c :: : Ili WALL PAPER 1 r– ( C.. �(..) OFCI BLACK CLOVER CLASS C OFCI (w i) CWPP� •` \\.'- :.:'•'h �• ....., . r��,�y` `‹ " €`` '' \ ,, WALL PAPER .`j�r-!!LL}} --fi OFCI FORREST GEOMETRIC CLASS C OFCI I .€i', 1.17 . ., \ a? ti l� Y WALL PAPER � R V OFCI GREEN ASIAN FLOWER CLASS C OFCI CWPP3'. 4, ° a:' WALL PAPER OFCI GREEN LILY CLASS C OFCI WPP4 z ,� � € :::,:. n om' WALL PAPER !� 3. urrli OFCI PINK ASIAN CLASS C OFCI CWPP5 �WPP6 >: ' E< ' .• A , µ 3 < ?: t . , �. 6 •: WALL PAPER • r e , '�; \ J OFCI YELLOW HUNGARIAN CLASS C OFCI s SL A0.4 6 " = 1'-0" A0.4 TR 6" = 1' -0" A0.4 A0.4 3 1/2" 1/2" CV 1 :1 1 3/4" BB 6 " = l'-O" 2 1/2" CM2 6" =1-0" CV r 1/8" Co 3/8" 5/16" • I • •i g ■ �► • • • 4 •4 : • io 0114 I• 4 s • • 4 — . 5116" Cp N 3/4" B3 6" = l'-O" Co 1/2" j CM E rr = 11-0" r A0.4 5/8" 3/4" REVIEWED M TANCE CODE CO APPROV LIAR 2 nu BUILWI :: DI•••` ` ION B4 6" = 1' -0" B1 6" = 1' -0" i s DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 .::.:: www.Iittleonline.com 1 LU.f rsrvk.717; u ?2,`.' 11. %' cirs /o s%a are ; open uJ i /Pr'1'1'i /?t€f .• I r;f':ft'r1G:r a i..uii.f✓..ii;h e 1�? r- Proiue/iRi, r %;•j/ g other :Ise rif?7;ii rira;rall(: r?'i /hoot their r1':ii:Plror fell/ &r /m,i tfi ^,1:;irtr:. ^fi7r1F',iiieril !Nil! he ? ?? ;P ui nrti Lillie 2007 87d6 '1v' -D JOHN O l + STATE OF 1 0. 1 1-f.' CLIENT NAME PROIECT NAME (Th PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS T J0 00 0 QN CL OD OD Es 00 J 00 W Q av u�W J W U)� V N w = W ul 0 cn arr MAR 07 mil PERMMT rC SHEET TITLE MATERIAL FINISHES & MOLDING PROFILES PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO,' 12/21/07 A014 GENERAL NOTES KEY NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PROVIDE WOOD OR 20 GA. SHEET METAL BLOCKING FOR GRAB BARS AND PIPING. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF MTL. STUD OR SURFACE OF MASONRY UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY THE LANDLORD & VERIFIED BY G.C. ALL FINISHED WOOD TO BE TREATED W/ FIREX 100 PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS ALL CONCEALED WOOD BLOCKING TO BE FIRE RETARDED TREATED WOOD. RE -SPRAY ALL DAMAGED FIRE PROTECTION AROUND COLUMNS. SEE BUILDING DETAILS SHEETS FOR TYP. ROOF PENETRATIONS & NOTES 8. 9. 10. 11. THE G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLITION OF ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT INDICATED AS PART OF THE NEW CONSTRUCTION. ALL VOIDS THAT ARE CREATED BY PARTITIONS THAT DO NOT ATTACH DIRECTLY TO STRUCTURE ABOVE ARE TO BE CAPPED OFF AT TOP WITH 5/8" 'TYPE X' GYPBOARD Of 3 5/8" 18 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C. AND FIRE TAPED. REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR PARTITION TYPES TEMPORARY POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION - EACH TENANT CONTRACTOR WILL COMPLETE THEIR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO PROVIDE FOR A "TEMPORARY TO PERMANENT" ELECTRICAL METER AND SERVICE. THE LANDLORD SHALL PROVIDE A MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER IN A LANDLORD ELECTRICAL ROOM AND CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS (FEEDERS) FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER TO A LANDLORD PROVIDED FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH LOCATED WITHIN THE TENANT SPACE. THE VOLTAGE SUPPLIED TO THE TENANT SPACE WILL BE 277/480V, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 12. 13. UPON POSSESSION OF THE SPACE, THE TENANT SHALL INSTALL ALL ELECTRICAL WORK NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITHIN THE PREMISES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TRANSFORMERS, ELECTRICAL PANELS, ETC. TO COMPLETE THE SERVICE. THIS SHOULD BE DONE FIRST THING UPON POSSESSION OF SPACE. NO TEMPORARY POWER WILL BE PROVIDED TO TENANT SPACES. TENANT CONTRATORS ARE ADVISED TO BRING STEP DOWN TRANSFORMERS AND PANELS OR AN APPROPRIATE GENERATOR UPON THE START OF CONSTRUCTION AS THE LANDLORD IS NOT PROVIDING CONSTRUCTION POWER. TENANT CONTRACTORS WILL NOT HAVE POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS THESE ARRANGEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE. PROVIDE 20 GA. SHEET METAL BACKING BEHIND GYP. BD. FROM 3' -0" A.F.F. TO 7' -0" A.F.F. AS BLOCKING FOR WALL SHELVES. SEE PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION. FOR WALL MOUNTED PLUMBER'S PIPE, SEE ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT OF MTL. BACKING. 1 1, GALVANIZED 20 GA. SHEET METAL \ J \ 5/8" GYP. J BOARD TO GRAB BARS TO HAVE BLOCKING REINFORCEMENT IF REQUIRED. BLOCKING W/ SHEET METAL EXTEND WALL PAPER FINISH 12" BEHIND WALL UNITS. SCREWS SIZED AS REQUIRED 2 — 3 TOILET ROOM - 4 3/4" ITTING RM 1 3' - 10 3/8" 2 5/8" ADJACENT TENANT 4 A5.3 FITTING RM 2 2 5/8" ALIGN 16' -6" FTTN RM 3 ADJACENT TENANT 2 5/8" PI . NG RM 4 1/8" . 111111 .11 rl 6 1/4" 2' -1" I 4' -8" DI PLAY REA DISPLAY AREA 1' - 4" 1' 11" 4' -91/8" ALCOVE TO HAVE 9' - 0" HIGH GYPSUM BOARD CEILING WITH RECESSED LIGHTING. FINISH OF ALCOVE AND DOOR TO MATCH THE FINISH OF CORRIDOR. TENANT IS TO INSTALL A DOORBELL LOCATED 3' - 6" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. REAR DOOR SIGNAGE: TENANT'S NAME AND SPACE NUMBER INSTALL 2" HIGH, DIE CUT, VANDAL PROOF, WHITE HELVETICA BLOCK STYLE LE I I ERS ON A RED BACKGROUND MOUNTED 5' - 0" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR, CENTERED ON DOOR. INSTALL 4" X 4" X 4' - 0" STAINLESS STEEL; 10 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS ON OUTSIDE CORNERS OF ALCOVE. LANDLORD NOTES: 1. LANDLORD SHALL PROVIDE 6" METAL STUD FRAMING FOR ALL DEMISING WALLS. TENANT IS TO INSTALL 5/8" TYPE X GYPSUM WALLBOARD TENANT'S SIDE OF DEMISING WALL. TENANT MUST MAINTAIN A 6" MINIMUM CLEAR OPEN HEIGHT ABOVE COMMON TENANT DEMISING WALLS AND BELOW STRUCTURE. THIS CONDITION OCCURS WHERE THERE IS AN ADJACENT TENANT. 2. TENANT'S CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY LOCATION AND GET APPROVAL AND REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL TRENCHING WITH WESTFIELD'S ON SITE TENANT COORDINATOR BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 3 . Al INE 10 PAR I I TONS ARWA AV GYPS I O BRD STOPPEDt JCL • )$ OM E DECK ABOVE FO LANDLO D'S` .,p;S SIEM(P -ENI'Jlvl BOVE GEIIII' IS JSED. +TQ RETUFt -N `A1R) 4. ALL CONN TO METAL DECK SLABS FOR STRUCTURAL LOADS SHALL BE EITHER PRESET OR DRILLED IN ANCHORS. 5. ARCHITECT IS TO SIZE WALLS AND DECK TO SUPPORT ALL EQUIPMENT AND SERVICE PERSONNEL. AREA IS TO BE SPRINKLERED ABOVE AND BELOW PER LOCAL CODE. PARTITION TYPE ASSUMED UL #U465 ONE HOUR LEGEND GC TO MAINTAIN 1 -HR RATING AT EXISTING DEMISING WALL GC TO PROVIDE 1 -HR RATING AT NEW DEMISING WALL FINISH CEILING PER PLAN EXISTING DEMISING WALL WITH 6" METAL STUD FRAMING WALL PAPER FINISH WHERE OCCURS BOARD AND BATTEN FINISH WHERE OCCURS 1 LAYER TYPE "X" 5/8" GWB BY G.C. EXISTING /NEW FIRESTOP SEALANT LARR25135 LEASE LINE RUN WATERPROOFING TO A MINIMUM OF 12" ABOVE THE SLAB LEASE LINE FLOOR PLAN 1/4 =1 -0 I PARTITION TYPE ICBO ER -4943P ONE HOUR COLA - RR25529 SHOT PINS ER 2388 PER PLAN 4 A5.0 WALL TAG - SEE THIS SHEET ELEVATION TAGS SEE SHEET REFERENCED NEW WALL - SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE 0 DOOR TAG - SEE SHEET A0.1 DETAIL TAG SEE SHEET REFERENCED EXISTING 1 HR RATED WALL NEW 1 HR RATED WALL SEE PLAN FOR PARTITION TYPE PROVIDE SLIP CONNECTON TO DECK 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB FINISH CEILING PER PLAN BOARD AND BATTEN WHERE OCCURS WALL PAPER WHERE OCCURS USE 3 5/8" X 18GA. METAL STUD @ 16" O.C. USE 6" X 18GA. METAL STUD @16 "O.C. 7' - 10 7/8" 5' - 3 3/4" 4 7/8" 4 7/8" PARTITION TYPE / ZZ. =7/ Z1 // /- 71/ X11 (7 "\ A �J USE 6 "x18GAMETAL STUDS PROVIDE SLIP CONNECTON TO DECK FINISH CEILING PER PLAN 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB BOTH SIDES 3 5/8" METAL STUD @ 16" O.C. - --- BOARD AND BATTEN WHERE OCCURS WALL PAPER WHERE OCCURS 18' - 4 7/8" 18' - 4 7/8" PARTITION TYPE '- 23/8" USE TYPE "X" 5/8" GWB ON ONE SIDE ONLY (V.I.F.) PROVIDE SLIP CONNECTON TO DECK EXTEND GWB 6" ABOVE FINISH CEILING (V.I.F.) PROVIDE 3 5/8" METAL STUD KICKERS @ 4' -0" O.C. IN ALTERNATING DIRECTIONS SEE GENERAL BUILDING DETAILS FINISH CEILING PER PLAN 3 5/8" MTL. STUDS X 18GA. @ 16" O.C. BY T.G.C. 3/4" PLYWOOD. SALES AREA SIDE 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB BOTH SIDES BRICK VENEER WHERE OCCURS 20' - 11 1/8" X -011 FIRESTOP SEALANT LARR25135 11> FINISH CEILING PER PLAN PARTITION TYPE EXISTING WALLJCOLUMN WALL PAPER FINISH (WHERE OCCURS) 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ONE SIDE ONLY 2 1/4" MTL. FURRING AT 16" 0.0. PARTITION TYPE 18' - 5 3/8" 3 5/8" METAL STUD X 18GA. FRAMING @ 16" O.C. 5/8" GWB CEILING 5/8" TYPE "X" MR GWB @ TOILET ROOM 3 5/8" METAL STUD X 18GA. @ 16" 0.0. 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB FRP @ TOILET ROOM C MD- 5 -1 LEASE 3' -77/8" LINE PARTITION TYPE NEUTRAL PIER 0 a LL 7 17' -7 1/2" A.F.F. (V.I.F.) PROVIDE SLIP CONNECTON PROVIDE 3 5/8" METAL STUD X 18GA. KICKERS @ 4' -0" O.C. IN ALTERNATING DIRECTIONS SEE GENERAL BUILDING DETAILS EXTEND GWB 6" ABOVE FINISH CEILING FINISH CEILING PER PLAN WALL PAPER FINISH (WHERE OCCURS) 1 5/8" METAL STUD X 18GA.@16 "O.C. 1/2" TYPE "X" GWB BOTH SIDES BOARD & BATTEN FINISH (WHERE OCCURS) USE TYPE "X" 5/8" GWB ON ONE SIDE ONLY DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL. CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com 1 !s �Ik.7Y�' •siPC the eiesta•i1 SbOil/n .1)? t' Iji'L l i: !'f7_'i!!li: -b!teftllfa is) The !:?powluction. ri ,,living or other #se +lr !iiii (1 u, witboill their ;;77iiir.1 consent is /','L' /l; h /fe' :!l;d al:Y ;.f;7/.7e//f W / ii✓ sk.b ea .'P legal aeiWf. JOHN C. KW ON STATE OF WASHII a i v. CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME 0 PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS LYt:E.le 2007 M 1 1:7 Q 2 w a CO CC U) J H CO W c c I W I- W M J Z r W (r) < = W O U) I Landlord / City Revisions ( CITY •' 'y; MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT SHEET TITLE FLOOR PLAN PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 02.21 08 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. LIGHTING LEGEND SEE ELECTRICAL (El) FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS TYPE SYMBOL DESCRIPTION LOCATION HEIGHT NOTES A PENDANT FIXTURE REFER TO 2/A2.0 Al (�`.J� PAPER PENDANT FIXTURE REFER TO 2/A2.0 B 0 RECESSED WALL WASHER FLUSH WITH CEILING B1 0 SOCKET FIXTURE LIGHTS CEILING MOUNTED 0 SPOT LIGHTING HEAD FINISH D1 120 VOLT METAL HALIDE TRACK LIGHTING REFER TO 3/A2.0 SILVER Q FLOOD LIGHTING ® WIDE FLOOD Di B V V V 120 VOLT METAL HALIDE TRACK LIGHTING REFER TO 3/A2.0 • SPOT LIGHTING HEAD FINISH BLACK F 1 1 2X4' WRAP AROUND REFER TO 2A2.0 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE G WALL MOUNT JAR WITH CAST SEE FITTING ROOM WIRE GUARD - NO FINISH ELEVATIONS A5.4 G1 I-D RLM ANGLED REFLECTOR 3/4' RIGID SEE ELEVATIONS ON A4.0 CONDUIT BRACKET WI GALV WALL PLATE EX EXIT SIGN (CEILING MOUNTED) CEILING MOUNT EXEM EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHT COMBINATION CEILING MOUNT EM I_I EMERGENCY LIGHT CEILING MOUNT C LG FAN i 52' CEILING FAN REFER TO 2/A2.0 SW SUBWOOFER SPEAKER CEILING MOUNT S ® SPEAKER SYSTEM CEILING MOUNT P PRODCO PEOPLE SENSOR COUNTER CEILING MOUNT LANDLORD NOTES: 1. ALL SUPPORTS TO BE FROM STRUCTURAL BEAMS AND JOISTS AND NOT FROM DECK ABOVE. 2. LAY IN ACOUSTICAL TILES CEILING MAY NOT BE USED IN FORWARD SELLING AREA. TILES TO HAVE NOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT OF 0.60 - 0.70 WITH A MINIMUM ROOM TO ROOM ATTENUATION FACTOR OF 40.0 DECIBELS AND MUST MEET ALL CODE, FLAME SPREAD, FUEL AND SMOKE DEVELOPMENT FACTORS. 3. VERIFY WITH WESTFIELD'S ON SITE TENANT COORDINATOR ON ALL LOCATIONS OF ACCESS PANELS TO LANDLORD'S EQUIPMENT. 4. CEILING SUPPORT SHALL COMPLY WITH SEISMIC BRACING REQUIREMENTS FOR THAT REGION. 5. STOREFRONT SIGNAGE MUST BE ON SEPARATE CIRCUIT AND ON 7 DAY TIME CLOCK SET TO MALLS OPERATING HOURS. 6. ALL STOREFRONT LIGHTING MUST BE INCANDESCENT AND ON SEPARATE CIRCUIT AND ON 7 DAYTIME CLOCK SET TO MALL'S OPERATING HOURS. EXEM �h4�.�1• }.0� }n:. is •: +12'- 0 " (MTL) NATURAL TIN • ■11I • }:• \.4.4.4.4.4.}:. •.K:•e.i•.+•rixx•n }}}; ^:A:.f , CLG FAN CLG FAN. PEOPLE ... COUNTER CLG FAN EQ Ir a �y DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING www.Iittleonline.com I f�t. .k:'h 2.0 i;7^ tbe d •S ?fin : •fiuiti are t' e 'It pen:' of .....t le I J; l t1Ti/ird :. lrthiteelee «( i .GnsS:. ing. The z , trick- ,Ti(r, ; %girt; e ; ;other U.f' of without their written riin r z! 1!' p. b kited i i ay n r?I7g<'ri?w will he :tehjecf ?0 riga/ ail' m. PROJECT NAME • PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER 5815 Westpark Drive ,. Charlotte, NC 28217 ' . .:::. REASON Landlord / City Revisions 02.21.08 c TY MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT OFJOIER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 GC'S SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SPRINKLER HEADS IN CAVITIES AS REQUIRED HVAC DIFFUSERS & RETURN PAINT TO MATCH TIN CEILING - (TYP.) STORE CENTERLINE - CEILING GRID TO ALIGN 6" AWAY FROM CENTER. GC'S SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SPRINKLER HEADS IN CAVITIES AS REQUIRED GYP. BD. 9' -0" ( P1 ) 1/4" = 1 G.C. TO MOUNT ASSEMBLE BLADES W/ BLACK SIDE DOWN UTILIZE FLAT AREA IN TILE PATTERN TO PLACE LIGHT CANOPIES, SPRINKLER HEADS, ETC. 2x4 METAL CEILING TILE GYP. BD. 9' -0" REFLECTED CEILING PLAN CEILING FIXTURE PLACEMENT ( P1 ) 8' - 0 1/8" LINE OF WOOD CROWN. ( LEGEND CEILING HEIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD SUPPLY DEIFFUSER SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAILS RETURN GRILLE SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAILS SUBWOOFE R TO BE LOCATE ON CENTER EDGE OF CEILING TILE AS SHOWN. GENERAL NOTES STANDARD J -BOX (CONNECT TO STRUCTURE) COPPER B -LINE B390BX SWIVEL BOX CONNECTOR WIRE WITHIN COPPER B -LINE 8390 -S SWIVEL CHANNEL CONNECTOR GALVANIZED UNISTRUT P1000T LIGHTING TRACK TRACK HEAD PROVIDE CONDUIT VOLUME LINE OF WOOD CONTROL @ CASHWRAP \ CROWN. CM . QV GYP. BD. 10' - 1 1 /2" P2 LINE OF METAL CORNICE 11' -5" GYP. BD 1. SEE TYPICAL CEILING DETAILS - A6.2 2. ALL VISIBLE GYP. OR OPEN STRUCTURE CEILING SHALL BE PAINTED 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FINISH SURFACE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 4. ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY THE LANDLORD. 5. LOCATE LIGHT TRACK AT CENTER LINE OF METAL TILE SQUARES. 6. SEAL ALL SEAMS TO BATT INSULATION UNDER ROOF DECK. 7. NOTE: GC MUST FIELD VERIFY ALL CEILING HEIGHTS. UTILITY LINES AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HEIGHT PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. ANY VARIANCES BETWEEN THESE APPROVED DIMENSIONS AND ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS SHALL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC. ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH REVISIONS AND CHANGES ORDERS SHALL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC. o' -o" FINISHED FLOOR GYP. BD. 10' - 1 1/2" 12' -0" CEILING LINE 1/4" = 1' -0" 7 0 J 0 z 0 d w W 1- z w CENTER LIGHT FIXTURES & FANS ON METAL TILE PATTERN -TYP. SEE SPRINKLER NOTES 1- w 1 - = J 1- z ❑ z IJJ 4 LIGHTING FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS DIFFUSER PAINT TO ' 12' - 0" MATCH TIN CEILING )/ \ F NATURAL TIN (MTL) SYSTEM TO BE DESIGNED & BUILT BY CONTRACTOR TO THESE REQUIREMENTS.CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ARCHITECTS APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION & INSTALLATION 2. AREA CLASSIFICATIONS AS /PER NRPA - 13 LIGHT HAZARD - OFFICE AREAS, COMMON AREAS, DESIGN PARAMETERS: LIGHT -0.10 / 1500 + 100 HOSE 3. SYSTEM TO BE DESIGN AND INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE W /NFPA -13, NEPA -14, NEPA -20, LOCAL CITY REQUIREMENTS. 4. ALL BRANCHLINE PIPING TO BE "EDDYLITE" ALL MAIN PIPING TO BE "DYNA -FLO" 5. ALL PENDANT HEADS TO BE LOCATED @< OF 2X LAY -IN CEILINGS. ALL HEADS ON 1X0 -3 GOOSE -NECK ASSEMBLIES AS PER DETAIL THIS SHEET. 6. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LOCATION OF SPRINKLER HEADS & PIPING SO AS NOT TO CONFLICT W /HVAC, PLUMBING, OR ELECTRICAL WORK OR LIGHT FIXTURES. �\ �� ■■ _ /Th R,1 7. c____ ALL SPRINKLER HEADS IN GWB CEILINGS TO BE FULLY CONCEALED WITH A COVER PLATE,COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISHES. ALL SPRINKLER HEADS IN THE FORWARD SELLING AREA ARE TO BE CONCEALED POP OF COVER TYPE. A2.1 METAL GRID HANGER 1 1/2" = 1' -0" HANGER WIRE; NO. 12 SWG GALV. STEEL, LOCATED ALONG MAIN RUNNERS 4 TO 5 FEET O.C. AND AT EACH CORNER OF THE MODULES CONTAINING LIGHT FIXTURES. ADDITIONAL HANGER WIRES LOCATED AT THE MIDSPAN OF THE CROSS TEES GREATER THAN 4 FT. UP TO AND INCLUDING 5 FT, AND ADJACENT TO MAIN RUNNER SPLICES. * HANG UNIFORMLY FROM CEILING GRID - USE UL APPROVED SUPPORTS. FIXTURE, RECESSED LIGHT (BEARING UL LISTED MARK; FIXTURES SECURED HOUSING/STABILIZING. FIXTURES SPACED SO THAT THEIR AREA DOES NOT EXCEED 16 SQ FT. PER 100 SQ FT. OF CEILING AREA. WIRED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS; MAIN RUNNERS NOMINALLY 10 TO 12 FT. LONG SPACED GREATER THE 21/2 FT, UP TO AND INCLUDING 5 FT. O.C. CROSS TEES NOMINALLY FROM 2 1/2 FT. UP TO AND INCLUDING 5 FT. LONG, INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO MAIN RUNNERS AND SPACED 2 TO 2 1/2 FT. O.C.CROSS TEES 4 TO 5 FT. LONG INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO MAIN RUNNERS AND SPACED 2 FT. O.C. FOR LIGHT FIXTURES. ADDITONAL 2 FT. CROSS TEES INSTALLED PARALLEL WITH MAIN RUNNERS TO SUPPORT ENDS OF LIGHT FIXTURES AND PANELS. ADDITIONAL 2 TO 2 1/2 FT. CROSS TEES INSTALLED PARALLEL TO MAIN RUNNERS TO SUPPORT DUCT OUTLETS, LOCATED 9 IN. FROM CENTERLINE OF DUCT. MIN 5/16 IN BEARING OF PANELS ON SUSPENSION MEMBERS REQUIRED. GYP. BD. CEILING SYSTEM DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1' -0" GA 20 MTL BACKING 3 -5/8" MTL. STUD 5/8" GWB CEILING ON 3 5/8" MTL STUD FRAME GALV. EYEHOOK SCREW CONNECTIONS AS REQ. GALV. EYEHOOK CONNECTIONS HANGING METAL STOREFRONT GRID. SEE A2.0 FOR OVERALL SIZE AND NUMBER. O.F.C.I. EQ2 EQ2 BRICK ARCHWAY Af „et, m aI6illlilll!Ii1111 ■1111! dill ■11Gf ICI■ Ii1lllllil ■ ■i 111111l1 1 ■IIi111111�1liilll r� A Ill! fflonimul ::::<: ni III II II1J :1lllllllr L '1 .V1111 11111111101 f IIil I ENEMA 1■EXIIMurM + 15' -0" GYP. BD. ( P2 GYP. BD. ■■ •••••••• ■■E B ■■■ . B ■' ■ASP■■■■ ■a■ •■11 ••••11M1 Latleaellenu / ir I Vesviiittl �>'1� Illllll��illill Irf. ll• •�II1111�i�1111111111��1�11111€ 111 ■I�I�;I' 1111111 \I Alllll�' 111 ■Ill:ll'll. m it 51,3a ■ za:;: <:� snommoninmaiii I , 1:I E92i111 11111■ 111111111: ■■■ 11111111■ I® I■ IIIIIIIIsa■. 1111111111■11111111.111111zgE3— v ux, .,••4,4• r. STEEL DECK ABOVE BOTTOM CORD OF STRUCTURE ABOVE LANDLORD'S APPLICABLE) AIR (IF APPICLE) GYPSUM BOARD; 1/2 IN. OR 5/8 IN. THICK, 4 FT. WIDE, INSTALLED WITH LONG DIMENSION PERPENDICULAR TO CROSS CHANNELS WITH SIDE JOINTS CENTERED ALONG MAIN RUNNERS. WALL BOARD FASTENED TO CROSS CHANNELS WITH 1 IN LONG WALL BOARD SCREWS SPACED 12 IN. O.C. ALONG END JOINTS AND 2 IN O.C. IN THE FIELD. THE SCREWS ALONG THE END JOINTS LOCATED 1/2 IN FROM AND ON EITHER SIDE OF THE BOARD EDGE. THE SCREWS FOR THE LONG EDGES LOCATED 1 3/4" IN. FROM AND ON EITHER SIDE OF THE BOARD EDGESEND JOINTS OF THE SHEETS SHALLED BE STAGGERED WITH THE SPACING BETWEEN THE JOINTS ON ADJACENT BOARDS NOT LESS THAN 4 FT. O.C. A2.1 1/2" = 1 ' -0" DUCTWORK; SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS CEILING HEIGHT. SEE CEILING PLAN BRICK ARCHWAY ENLARGED REFELECTED CEILING PLAN CUSTOM WELDED HANGING GRID DETAIL 1 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" HANGER WIRE; NO. 12 SWG GALV. STEEL, LOCATED ALONG MAIN RUNNERS 4 TO 5 FEET O.C. AND AT EACH CORNER OF THE MODULES CONTAINING LIGHT FIXTURES. ADDITIONAL HANGER WIRES LOCATED AT THE MIDSPAN OF THE CROSS TEES GREATER THAN 4 FT. UP TO AND INCLUDING 5 FT, AND ADJACENT TO MAIN RUNNER SPLICES. 6" TYP. FIXTURE, RECESSED LIGHT (BEARING UL LISTED MARK; FIXTURES SECURED HOUSING /STABILIZING. FIXTURES SPACED SO THAT THEIR AREA DOES NOT EXCEED 16 SQ FT. PER 100 SQ FT. OF CEILING AREA. WIRED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS; MAIN RUNNERS NOMINALLY 10 TO 12 FT. LONG SPACED GREATER THE 2 1/2 FT, UP TO AND INCLUDING 5 FT. O.C. CROSS TEES NOMINALLY FROM 2 1/2 FT. UP TO AND INCLUDING 5 FT. LONG, INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO MAIN RUNNERS AND SPACED 2 TO 2 1/2 FT. O.C.CROSS TEES 4 TO 5 FT. LONG INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO MAIN RUNNERS AND SPACED 2 FT. O.C. FOR LIGHT FIXTURES. ADDITONAL 2 FT. CROSS TEES INSTALLED PARALLEL WITH MAIN RUNNERS TO SUPPORT ENDS OF LIGHT FIXTURES AND PANELS. ADDITIONAL 2 TO 2 1/2 FT. CROSS TEES INSTALLED PARALLEL TO MAIN RUNNERS TO SUPPORT DUCT OUTLETS, LOCATED 9 IN. FROM CENTERLINE OF DUCT. MIN 5/16 IN BEARING OF PANELS ON SUSPENSION MEMBERS REQUIRED. ACC PANEL CEILING SYSTEM DETAIL A2.1 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SEE RCP FOR DIM. * HANG UNIFORMLY FROM CEILING GRID - USE UL APPROVED SUPPORTS. STEEL DECK ABOVE SUSPENDED ACC. PANEL CEILING SYSTEM (ARMSTRONG OR EQUAVALENT). ACOUSTICAL MATERIAL; NOM 24 X 24, 24 X 36, 24 X 48, 24 X 60, 18 X 60, 20 X 60, 30 X 30, OR 30 X 60 BY 3/4" THICK LAY -IN PANELS. BORDER PANELS SUPPORTED AT WALLS BY MIN. 0.016 THICK PAINTED STEEL ANGLE WITH 7/8" LEGS OR MIN 0.016 PAINTED STEEL CHANNEL WITH A 1 X 1 9/16 BY 1/2 IN PROFILE. 1/4" CLEAN STEEL RODS WELDED JOINTS, TYP. 1/4" CLEAN STEEL RODS HANGING CONNECTION TYP. FOR (4). BOTTOM CORD OF STRUCTURE ABOVE LANDLORD'S OPEN AIR PLENUM (WHERE APPLICABLE) TIN METAL CEILING ADHERED TO ACC. PANEL CEILING SYSTEM (MTL) Ord4 DUCTWORK; SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS CEILING HEIGHT SEE CEILING PLAN :L.I_ :TT LTM. DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING i 5815 Westpark. Drive :-:: Charlotte, NC 28217 . 7 Cs'l<.,.,. i y !Jl^ for d:'skil shown an? the ; . fp <o «, • i1 I „ Mk 1),/',i7';/ - :-I1 rchitertura t. ,onsa ting ro/ijirl+ or other j?Je iJi ::'iiJ ar .,., xith: m JJ:ri/:?P..' ri:r'JP ?li iS pir/;,%7Z;Cs1.Ri /iY ay ^� ?JdQiSii4JJ,' 71l:: % iiA 4^Jc'f;:/i717? /Frio <. ?rfjqr:. PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS www.littleonline.com 8746 12/21/07 %1 Utile 2007 Z JOHN C. K .MlS1N STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME • L-1V) nuNciiinEs Al ER 1C X G}4 TO D1 PROJECT NAME M T WJc33 Q N C ce 03 J c0 Z 2 Q W H W M J W to -r N W 0 U) PROJECT TEAM I Landlord / City Revisions cin MAR 0 7 2000 PERMIT-CR SHEET TITLE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE - SHEET NO. A2.1 02.21 08 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT (ALM) WOOD SILL STONE TILE BASE ON THIN SET B6 P2 MALL BULKHEAD ALUMINUM ANODIZED BLACK STOREFRONT GLAZING SYSTEM W/ 1/2" TEMPERED GLASS, ALM STONE TILE BASE co 0 ( 3 "( = 1 1 -0 " 1/4" 0' -7" SILL DETAIL 1 1/4" 3/ • L F1 ) 0 0 0 CONT SEALANT, TYP. WHITE OAK WOOD TRIM BLOCKING SECTION THRU DISPLAY AREA 3/8" = 1 ' -0" (E) MALL BULKHEAD ALUMINUM ANODIZED BLACK STOREFRONT GLAZING SYSTEM. W/ 1/2" TEMPERED GLASS CALM) WOOD SILL A4.0 SECTION THRU DISPLAY AREA 3/8" = 1 ' -0" STOREFRONT PERSPECTIVE (E) MALL BULK HEAD STOREFRONT SIGNAGE ALUMINUM ANODIZED BLACK STOREFRONT GLAZING SYSTEM. W/ 1/2" TEMPERED GLASS( ALM) WOOD SILL SL A4.0 3/8" = 1' -0" ba; / / / / / / / / / / / /// SECTION THRU ENTRY 3/4" BLACK REVEAL MTL CM2) WOOD DOOR AND FRAME (SEE DOOR SCHEDULE) GRAPHICS APPLIED DIRECTLY TO THE STOREFRONT GLASS MUST HAVE MATCHING LEI I ERS AND FEATURES ON BOTH SIDES OF GLASS TO CREATE A FINISHED LOOK WHEN VIEWED FROM EITHER SIDE. MAXIMUM LETTER HEIGHT OF LETTERS IS 3" • REVISIONS I REASON I Landlord / City Revisions 3/4" BLACK REVEAL ALONG ALL BRICK AGAINST MALL BULKHEAD. TYP FROSTED TRANSOM (E) NEUTRAL PIER ALUMINUM STOREFRONT GLAZING SYSTEM. ANODIZED BLACK, W/ 1/2" TEMPERED GLASS B3 EXISTING DEMISING WALL TO REMAIN EXISTING NEUTRAL PIER TO REMAIN SOLID WOOD CORNER END PIECE. TO MATCH PLATFORM FLOORING 3" = 1' -0" 3/8" = 1 ' -0" (ALM) C 0 0 3' - 3 1/8" PLATFORM CORNER DETAIL t EQ EQ STOREFRONT ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" STOREFRONT MANUFACTURER TO PROVIDE INTERNAL REINFORCING AND MOUNTING PLATE FOR STORE SIGNAGE. COORD W/ SIGNAGE VENDOR ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN 7' -61/8" EQ EQ EQ 1' -41/4" LEASE LINE ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM (ALM) ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM ANCHOR SCREW PAINTED WOOD SILL SEALANT, TYP. INSERT WOOD FLOOR PLANK UNDER WOOD SILL LIP 5/8" THK. TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. STONE TILE BASE 3 5/8" MET. STUDS 16" O.C. 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" EXISTING MALL FLOORING EQUAL DISPLAY PLATFORM DETAIL EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD 8' -11/2" WOOD DOOR AND FRAME EQ START WOOD FLOORING AT ENTRY DOOR TRANSITION STRIP WITH MALL FLOOR NEW FLOOR FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING MALL FINISH 1' -4 1/4" EME. - ■C, IC #■1 EQ EQUAL 7' - 7 7/8" EQ ( F1:_) ----- DISPLAY PLATFORM ...._.FLOORING — T - 0 3/8" A4.1 rti". A Eli 111=11111 I II i n ■.�I l amiimmoommilik A4.1 7' - 2 1/8" DISPLAY PLATFORM FLOORING - -.. _..._..__ -._ s m lolmmouri 1 91111 11 8 OPP EQ EQ OPP 4' - 2 3/8" WALL MTD. MTL. WALL OUTLET GALV. FINISH (ON BRICK FINISH ONLY) WOOD FINISH ( F1 ) 3/4 "THK. PLYWD. SHEATHING 6" MET. JOISTS @ 24" O.C. 3 5/8" MET. STUDS @ 16" O.C. FLOOR FINISH ( Fl ) STOREFRONT MANUFACTURER TO PROVIDE INTERNAL REINFORCING AND MOUNTING PLATE FOR STORE SIGNAGE. COORD W/ SIGNAGE VENDOR \ coo , E COMP INICE. \ APPR tkKR 21 7 EXISTING DEMISING WALL TO REMAIN EXISTING NEUTRAL PIER TO REMAIN .L 1 TTL . ET DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.cam (f,,.c drawing !t: ?t.' r . t' d ' i,gn sboim are-: for property ' t /..j' ' i J: "r7Ti; it :• 1 1'aerr t'ur' 17.? 2'.vveliitli(iir- Alf! y7ng iii 1)1 /?,' ' Use of $Ui ,•'l: nN , ; a. t ial their M (itWt i r tit 7i /'mI;iintcd 91.x:1 a1y be sirebira ?., / al ,artio??. CLIENT NAME BJS 8746 ti JOHN C. KOMISiN STATE OE I., �U IG EES Al EK1CA CHTODi$ PROJECT NAME. CI 0 PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT T MANAGER DRAWN BY 1 Little 2007 0 M T W J CO CO a CL CO C3 J LU COO Z CC 2 WI- -W W V) � CNI C D () 0 c09 MAR 07 /I111H PERMIT l Eki to SHEET TITLE . STOREFRONT PLAN, ELEVATIONS & DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER- 625 - 4089 -01 DATE 02.21.08 (7\ PLAN DETAIL @ NEUTRAL PIER A4.1 J 3" = 1 '_ 0 " NOTE: 1. G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY FRAMING IN EXISTING CEILING AND PROVIDE BRACING AS REQUIRED TO STIFFEN STOREFRONT SYSTEM COORDINATE EXISTING CONDITION WITH ARCHITECT 2. G.C. TO PROVIDE STOREFRONT SHOP DRAWING 3. ALL STOREFRONT FRAMING MUST BE ENTIRELY INDEPENDENT OF BULKHEAD FRAMING - FRAME AROUND THE BULKHEAD (EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD) ALUMINUM ANODIZED BLACK W/ 1/2" GLASS DISPLAY STOREFRONT (BEYOND) (ALM) GWB CEILING ON 3 5/8" METAL STUDS @ 16" OC( P1 LBJ RACEWAY & — SIGNAGE ALUMINUM ANODIZED BLACK W/ 1/2" GLASS DISPLAY STOREFRONT (BEYOND) (ALM) HANGING GRID 5/8" GWB ON 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING 3/4" 3/ x 3/ 4" BLACK REVEAL EXISTING NEUTRAL PIER SECTION DETAIL - DISPLAY AREA 1 1 /2" = 1 ,_ 0 „ 5/8" GWB ON 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING THIN BRICK C FRT WOOD BLOCKING LEASE LINE BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT FRAME AND COLOR PLAN DETAIL 3" = 1' -0" r NOTE: TENANT IS TO SUPPLY 5/8" TYPE X GYPSUM BOARD ON TENANT'S SIDE OF LANDLORD BULKHEAD AT STOREFRONT AND PROVIDE RATING AS REQUIRED BY CODE 3 5/8" METAL STUD BRACE WITH HILTI DN 32 SHOT PINS @ 48" ON O.C. SECURED AS REQUIRED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE . (TYP) 3 5/8" METAL STUD HANGER WITH HILTI DN 32 SHOT PINS @ 48" ON O.C. SECURED AS REQUIRED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE . (TYP) TIN MTL CEILING THIN BRICK CEILING ON 3 5/8" METAL STUDS 16" OC THIN BRICK SOLIDER COURSE THIN BRICK 5/8" GWB (EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD) ALUMINUM ANODIZED BLACK W/ 1/2" GLASS DISPLAY STOREFRONT (BEYOND) (ALM) GWB CEILING ON 3 5/8" METAL STUDS tv7a 16" OC ( P2 ) LBJ RACEWAY & SIGNAGE iaIta 6 3/8" SSii ::<::<::«::: 8 01 'r .. .......... • /r /A i 31 / ®tea ..................... € iN 85 55 ALUM. STOREFRONT (77. 7)1 TO MATCH STOREFRONT COLOR A4.1 NOTE: 1. G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY FRAMING IN EXISTING CEILING AND PROVIDE BRACING AS REQUIRED TO STIFFEN STOREFRONT SYSTEM COORDINATE EXISTING CONDITION WITH ARCHITECT 2. G.C. TO PROVIDE STOREFRONT SHOP DRAWING 3. ALL STOREFRONT FRAMING MUST BE ENTIRELY INDEPENDENT OF BULKHEAD FRAMING - FRAME AROUND THE BULKHEAD (ALM) -- LINE OF DISPLAY PLATFORM PLAN DETAIL 3 " = 1 - 0 „ SECTION DETAIL - ENTRY 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1' - 4 1/4" 3 5/8" METAL STUD BRACE WITH HILTI DN 32 SHOT PINS @ 48" ON O.C. SECURED AS REQUIRED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE . (TYP) 5/8" GWB ON 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING 3 5/8" METAL STUD HANGER WITH HILTI DN 32 SHOT PINS @ 48" ON O.C. SECURED AS REQUIRED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE . (TYP) A L M THIN BRICK 3/4" BLACK REVEAL TIN MTL CEILING PLAN DETAIL 3 „ = 1 ,_O,r T2os -D 11 SILL, BELOW A4.1 3 " = 1 l_ ALUMINUM STOREFRONT MULLION ALM 3 „ = 1 ,_ 3 „ ALUMINUM STOREFRONT MULLION ALM 0' - 1 1/4" STOREFRONT MULLION 0' - 4 1/2" THIN BRICK VENEER 5/8" GWB ON 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING ( 0' - 1 1/4" 1 STOREFRONT CORNER MULLION 5/8" GWB ON 3 5/8" METAL FURRING STRIPS LINE OF DISPLAY PLATFORM erru".Az C� 5 ilVitviED FOP, CODE, C0101.30CE. BREAK METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT FRAME AND COLOR F.R.T. WOOD BLOCKING DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 3 www.littleonline.com !7 rrI 'i» a. ](.' , % : lj +s s 1;,!,fyn Ii ' , ".%:r• proper : . 11th' ):rem; ierl :• i hitediera he 6 7 ofbi'T p/ � t(1 ., ;3'd? 2U their . is en r(; Vie..!:" J �' prohibited .:;;;.'! a, f ^,I7i.T.e. ieii: will be : ' legal action. JOHN HN C. KOMIS1N TD N !A5 v� STATE OF CLIENT NAME DUNGAfEES A] iE1 1€ ►. �GH Tq DY;r: PROJECT NAME . PROJECT TEAM • PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool Littlle 2€ 07 T LLIJO < 00 2 N o. cc c os J CO J Z a") U a CC I W H W W V) W I- 0 PROJECT' MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS REVISIONS • NO REASON DATE 1 I Landlord / City Revisions I 02.21.08 C ITY OF MAR 0 7 [flflfl PERMIT CEr SHEET TITLE STOREFRONT DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. • a �,, a te.. •:<• >:.> :.,•_�•.':;: :.mss :z::z: :s5 ^fi(`: ? \fl:::.y::.�:.+•:. :; :.. ........ �. ......... ......... .... ......:...: . 3D VIEW - STOREFRONT SIGNAGE 0' -6" r i—/- 0' -3" I SIGNAGE SECTION DETAIL 3" = 1' -0" 3" CHANNEL LETTER RETURN BLACK METAL PLATE NEON LAMP, TYP INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY NEON LAMP, TYP. POWER CONDUIT 1" = 1 ' -0" STOREFRONT SIGNAGE DETAIL 10 3/4" r i 21' - 1 7/8" 21' - 1 7/8" ELEVATIO ' - STOREFRONT SIGNAGE 3/8" = 1' -0" PLAN NOTE: 20' - 10 3/4" 1. SUBMIT SIGN SHOP DRAWINGS FOR LL APPROVAL 2. SUBMIT SIGNAGE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL BY LUCKY BRAND JEANS ELEVATION I I r I:�I��_ - 1111 POWER DROP TO RUN THROUGH STOREFRONT MULLION /FRAME INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY 3" DEEP CHANNEL LETTER RETURN, WITH LED - ILLUMINATED RED ACRYLIC FACE B co "v A PB - CM Of Ibloae ILC i G DVISIO INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY STOREFRONT FRAME CONSTRUCTION. POWER DROP AT STORE FRONT FRAME LITTLE' DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC. 28217 www.littleonline.com Mir draw,* (,.1(1,1w ss sLi n :r;? t.`.r ; •,bar; ;, Dinrsifitei .'In Ccn.rs:;ng. The rnvri /i4'i,%r. (op or oiber use of :hi ;;R ?: JG'S/ their ii7itte ?; ((??.t nt is p bit' :;n ai3)' mn wi '' be Bel; /Pa in r'Ptiu1, ^ „'i2on. JOHN C: KOMISA STATE OF WASHINrON CLIENT NAME 3tte- ::'- PR0IFCT N PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS 0 Little 2 007 EUNG1 ftES TOO TpI1GIi •YO .∎• rj - M T W QN u)� o W J H CO a M CC I W I W Wv) O = W O cn REVISIONS NO REASON DATE Landlord / City Revisions 0221 08 RE 1VG CITY (�f iuk MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE STOREFRONT SIGNAGE AND DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 A4.2 3" DEEP CHANNEL N tij r 1 LETTER RETURN, RED T ILLUMINATED. p A, I D BLACK METAL PLATE \ 711.- /—\ . k J, I A A _ . _ 1l■a n • a �,, a te.. •:<• >:.> :.,•_�•.':;: :.mss :z::z: :s5 ^fi(`: ? \fl:::.y::.�:.+•:. :; :.. ........ �. ......... ......... .... ......:...: . 3D VIEW - STOREFRONT SIGNAGE 0' -6" r i—/- 0' -3" I SIGNAGE SECTION DETAIL 3" = 1' -0" 3" CHANNEL LETTER RETURN BLACK METAL PLATE NEON LAMP, TYP INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY NEON LAMP, TYP. POWER CONDUIT 1" = 1 ' -0" STOREFRONT SIGNAGE DETAIL 10 3/4" r i 21' - 1 7/8" 21' - 1 7/8" ELEVATIO ' - STOREFRONT SIGNAGE 3/8" = 1' -0" PLAN NOTE: 20' - 10 3/4" 1. SUBMIT SIGN SHOP DRAWINGS FOR LL APPROVAL 2. SUBMIT SIGNAGE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL BY LUCKY BRAND JEANS ELEVATION I I r I:�I��_ - 1111 POWER DROP TO RUN THROUGH STOREFRONT MULLION /FRAME INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY 3" DEEP CHANNEL LETTER RETURN, WITH LED - ILLUMINATED RED ACRYLIC FACE B co "v A PB - CM Of Ibloae ILC i G DVISIO INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY STOREFRONT FRAME CONSTRUCTION. POWER DROP AT STORE FRONT FRAME LITTLE' DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC. 28217 www.littleonline.com Mir draw,* (,.1(1,1w ss sLi n :r;? t.`.r ; •,bar; ;, Dinrsifitei .'In Ccn.rs:;ng. The rnvri /i4'i,%r. (op or oiber use of :hi ;;R ?: JG'S/ their ii7itte ?; ((??.t nt is p bit' :;n ai3)' mn wi '' be Bel; /Pa in r'Ptiu1, ^ „'i2on. JOHN C: KOMISA STATE OF WASHINrON CLIENT NAME 3tte- ::'- PR0IFCT N PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS 0 Little 2 007 EUNG1 ftES TOO TpI1GIi •YO .∎• rj - M T W QN u)� o W J H CO a M CC I W I W Wv) O = W O cn REVISIONS NO REASON DATE Landlord / City Revisions 0221 08 RE 1VG CITY (�f iuk MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE STOREFRONT SIGNAGE AND DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 A4.2 .................. 5 . W‘ \\\ •.k• \\\: • • \ , , ' \ \ \ N.\ \".5:;st %V C • C • ) C • Ur ul 1 .................. \\\\.:X‘''''' u :11 : \ :: \ n u c • .) . c . c .. f - I v .Sr v ::':' c - t • C • '3 .„:.\\%.,:1 • D C • :7 • C • 6 :::: - .:: '".• • Wr" N., N V' \ \ \\ \`•:, \\\\ .. \ \ \ \ \ \ ••••\ \ \ \ '\■ N :\ \,•\ s iF N.\•N \ \ s \ g N' \ , \ s k ,\ \ • ..\\.... •. .---:-:-:] . ISOMETRIC - SALES RIGHT INTERIOR ELEVATION - RIGHT 3/8" = 1 '-0" ""-"- .............................. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Pos 01/ TYP. TYP. TYP. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE. t ietiPTentOM MAR 2 ' 1 TOT,6 City Of Tutwia BUILDING DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com 9.dd s tkr' PmpenT I .;'epc,:‘,11; ei . led h 'fla I ' be +.1/ $'f!)9,7% ttwifent ii prob fiziwRieat 12411 skbjeet artion. LiTEle 2007 EGI rigro4 '/ JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASI-MGT0.1 9746 CLIENT. NAME DRAWN BY BJS nUNGAREES Amrizic.x 2. PROJECT NAME PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW to 1 IA —I CO "4 CO "cE 0- CO CO Z cc - Lu LU M Z 0 r 111 Cn O U) C\I 0 U) PROJECT TEAM RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVALA MAR 07 2008 PERMIT CENTER Ersimmememmumm INTERIOR ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO.- A5.1 r ri --. -------- . ------ -------- • • :N. .7. .7. N .• ••••• ,NNSV 4, MALL BULKHEAD - -- , --- „ „ ---- „ PERSPECTIVE - SALES LEFT ' BR P2. uL.) INTERIOR ELEVATION - LEFT 3/8" = 1t-0" (CM2) B4 P1 P1 FH2 CM &.• FLT P2 P2 cm D CM 1 A6.0 TYP. TYP. TYP CM2 n TYP. (PD DRAWN BY BJS LITTLE' DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING - I 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com 17ir Krawin,q, (mit tbt. s I:tow 11 an tL Prateny .1n:hi:et; Tbe on. to/ging or oiber tim ;pi 14'. .tb •r,ittrn con g is ptvbi bated mid a *view' will IP Jul:leer to legil action, tlbffrI 61r- /T STA TE WASX:N3TC:.! 874 4. nuNGanErs Alvi ERICA. GH PROJECT NAME PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW 2007 ) °® PROlECT TEAM RECEb' CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 07 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER. 625-4089-01 A5.1 • 11. • • I• 11,1, 1, 1•1111 .11111 • 1 11 1 .• : . : .• :•'...:.• . • :•.•:•••:••••••:":".::::::::::•.•••••::: ............,..,.,.„. PERSPECTIVE - SALES INTERIOR FRONT PERSPECTIVE - SALES INTERIOR BACK A5.2 1 A5.2 3/8" = l'-O" 3/8" = l'-O" (wpp) P B P (w pp) ... \ / / OPEN TO DISPLAY / A6.0 3 INTERIOR DISPLAY AREA ELEVATION INTERIOR REAR ELEVATION TYP. THIN BRICK SOLIDER COURSE , . . ... .. ... . . , ' , , ' , • . . ' , . , . . , , ' „ . . 2, ' woi/ 2 A6.0 • TYP. (CM2 ( B3 B4 P1 BR P2... OPEN'TO DISPLAY / WPP 1 / OPEN TO VESTIBULE ■ /I P2 P BB 1 L ..• . . • 1 ',.. DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING • •• • . .'• • . ••••! • -• • . . . 5815 Westpark Drive • Charlotte, NC 28217 (i)t! tk?' eia(p.,11 tr prOpern' I A 1)1PerSifitd .••Irr.bitertural 1 rOlviing Otbel #.1-0 i?I'thiJ Ann' tit; witiont ' written ti;iiSent z prohibited ebvil ay infrm,e,eiNeut will be legal acti(n, JOHN C. KOMISIN Mr: OF WASH:NG MPW DRAWN FW BJS www.littleonline.corn 074 PROJECT NAME .. PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER 12/21/07 CI Utile 2007 RECEN ED CITY OF 'TUKWILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE • INTERIOR ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. • • • • A5.2 A5.3 PERSPECTIVE - SALES AT JEAN WALL III:IJ'I 'v 'tfaig"111, AlWk‘ • ` PERSPECTIVE - SALES AT CASHWRAP / FITTING RMS COMO - 1 A5.3 Eo P2 3 ( cm2) MR F LT P2 ( mR ) TYP. TYP. JEAN ELEVATION REAR 3/8" = 1 '-0" ( P2 ) C P2) 3/8" 1 '-0" FLT P2 TYP. JEAN AREA ELEVATION OPEN PO450-0/1 _OPEN ( mR ) (ELI) ( P2 ) MR TYP. B4 P2 C\I DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com 114 dran..14 e‘a d orvn ;• e Propert,:! ittle 1)zrersifie.d Ar•hitectura CoN•ult* "'be eir OAP ilk +Ohii dra;iikT vtlif,..71 xt-iiten '.rent 11 problhard faiii (f! i n f lmoveul Iv / skbloct t kgal ardon. JOHN C. KOMIS1N STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME . nuNGLnErs Amy:Ric.% TOO TOUGH TolE PROJECT NAME • PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool le 2007 PROJ BO MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS 12/21/07 REGavD CITY OF TUPSILA MAR 07 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE • SHEET NO. A5.3 CO A5.4 A5.4 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 " = 1' -0" G.G. TO CUT OUT "BATTEN" AT SHELVES FITTING ROOM SHELF ELEVATION 0' - 4" 1' -8" PAINT GRADE POPLAR WOOD MOULDING HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR FITTING ROOM SHELF SECTION l C FITTING ROOM BENCH DETAIL EQ. , 1 12" TYP. EQ. , BATTEN WALL FINISH ( P1 ) WOOD MOULDING ( P1 ) 1/2" MDF HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR ( P1 ) NEW OR EXISTING WALL 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ( P1 ) EASED EDGE ( P1 ) PAINT GRADE POPLAR( pi ) 5/8 "" TYPE "X" GWB ( pi ) MTL. STUD FRAMING AS REQUIRED FOR BENCH BATTEN( P1 )( BB ) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 GYP. BD. (P1 ) (W PP) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 CENTER BATTENS OVER ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALL BATTEN DO NOT EASE EDGES LOCATE RECEPTACLE TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH BATTEN TYPICAL A5.4 3 NOTES: 1. PRE -DRILL ALL HOLES FOR HARDWARE TO REDUCE STRIPPING AND BURRING OF SCREW HEADS. 2. FOLLOW WALL DETAILS FOR BATTEN WALL FINISH AT FITTING ROOMS. REVIEW BATTEN LAYOUT PRIOR TO APPLYING TO WALL. LAYOUT ALL SEAMS TO BE COVERED BY BATTEN STRIP. NO PATCHING OF EEXISTING SEAMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. PROVIDE TO PAINTING. 3. FITTING ROOM BENCH IS TO BE PROVIDED BY G.C.. BENCH IS BUILT INTO THE WALL AND FINISHED AS BATTEN WALL. BENCH TOP IS TO BE SOLID WOOD OR PLYWOOD WITH A MIN. 6 -COATS OF PAINT. PROVIDE NOSING DETAIL AT EDGE OF BENCH CONSTRUCTED OF PAINT GRADE POPLAR. 4. DO NOT ALLOW CONFLICT BETWEEN BATTEN AND LIGHT FIXTURE OR RECEPTACLE. VESTIBULE 3/8" = 1' -0" (--; ACC. FITTING RM PLAN 3/8" 1._0„ 3' - 10 3/8" B I 3' - 10 3/8" FITTING RM 1 3/8" - 1'-0" " TT P1 TR (MR ) B4 P1 Ii.._._ 3 -A ELEVATION A5.4 3/8" _ 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ( TR (( Pi ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" 4 3D - FITTING ROOMS WALL PATTERN A5.4 EN UU CD Ut i CD CD 0) G.C, TO CUT OUT "BATTEN AT MIRROR (TYP) TR P1 ( BB ( P1 RE ■ / / \ / \ / OPEN TO' SALES /\ Mai NEI ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" / 6-7 ELEVATION A� 5.4 / 3/8" = 1 '_ 0 " ELEVATION 3/8" = l'-O" 1 BB 4 ! ■ OPEN TO SALES 1 1 I•• •R c fr4 i • ,.. CD 3 -C A5.4 1 -C A5.4 ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" - l'-O" OPEN TO SALES ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" Zip 8 A5.4 1 -D A5.4 Co CD P1 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION ‘! ,pn FoR COOT COMP LIAN `"c 4 Cif Of Tukwila N TR P1 ti } BB P1. B ILDING DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL. CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 ([Fm(:' iL!• de.C1, 7 s./..,e41/4 an the. trope n :: •it I .. ;e l irr{rs lire, :Architectural (. /tire. 17.q , r other use of 31.,'; ii;�ti•l;;i' #! %Jr;;:; Thrit ;;:7t!P:r consent is f'm;1.ht'`"d ..n ;a a, i!r!;Tl)Pi'FiiYl:; will be. s'J. i`f:;'ii 'o legal l.': id ^N. 44'i Little 2007 JOHN C. KOMISI1 STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME NAME PROJECT TEAM . PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS RECCE;. CITY OF TUKWLA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE- FITTING ROOM ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET N0. 12/21/07 A5.4 CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER TO PIPE CENTER TO J-BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX HEIGHT OF J-BOX CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE II x x xnx r c•� o .��: xx : xx :d DIM xn* ■c •a A I Kell AMA ■ ■[ 1C 1! i ] ■ C 3 ■C I i xnll ■c •] no „, . MM. yr. .w.,. BB P1 P1 i \ r \ r r . ` r ' . \ \ ! $ r $ r r O ' SALES r r r r r r r r :1 `w _. . CO A5.4 A5.4 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 " = 1' -0" G.G. TO CUT OUT "BATTEN" AT SHELVES FITTING ROOM SHELF ELEVATION 0' - 4" 1' -8" PAINT GRADE POPLAR WOOD MOULDING HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR FITTING ROOM SHELF SECTION l C FITTING ROOM BENCH DETAIL EQ. , 1 12" TYP. EQ. , BATTEN WALL FINISH ( P1 ) WOOD MOULDING ( P1 ) 1/2" MDF HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR ( P1 ) NEW OR EXISTING WALL 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ( P1 ) EASED EDGE ( P1 ) PAINT GRADE POPLAR( pi ) 5/8 "" TYPE "X" GWB ( pi ) MTL. STUD FRAMING AS REQUIRED FOR BENCH BATTEN( P1 )( BB ) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 GYP. BD. (P1 ) (W PP) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 CENTER BATTENS OVER ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALL BATTEN DO NOT EASE EDGES LOCATE RECEPTACLE TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH BATTEN TYPICAL A5.4 3 NOTES: 1. PRE -DRILL ALL HOLES FOR HARDWARE TO REDUCE STRIPPING AND BURRING OF SCREW HEADS. 2. FOLLOW WALL DETAILS FOR BATTEN WALL FINISH AT FITTING ROOMS. REVIEW BATTEN LAYOUT PRIOR TO APPLYING TO WALL. LAYOUT ALL SEAMS TO BE COVERED BY BATTEN STRIP. NO PATCHING OF EEXISTING SEAMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. PROVIDE TO PAINTING. 3. FITTING ROOM BENCH IS TO BE PROVIDED BY G.C.. BENCH IS BUILT INTO THE WALL AND FINISHED AS BATTEN WALL. BENCH TOP IS TO BE SOLID WOOD OR PLYWOOD WITH A MIN. 6 -COATS OF PAINT. PROVIDE NOSING DETAIL AT EDGE OF BENCH CONSTRUCTED OF PAINT GRADE POPLAR. 4. DO NOT ALLOW CONFLICT BETWEEN BATTEN AND LIGHT FIXTURE OR RECEPTACLE. VESTIBULE 3/8" = 1' -0" (--; ACC. FITTING RM PLAN 3/8" 1._0„ 3' - 10 3/8" B I 3' - 10 3/8" FITTING RM 1 3/8" - 1'-0" " TT P1 TR (MR ) B4 P1 Ii.._._ 3 -A ELEVATION A5.4 3/8" _ 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ( TR (( Pi ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" 4 3D - FITTING ROOMS WALL PATTERN A5.4 EN UU CD Ut i CD CD 0) G.C, TO CUT OUT "BATTEN AT MIRROR (TYP) TR P1 ( BB ( P1 RE ■ / / \ / \ / OPEN TO' SALES /\ Mai NEI ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" / 6-7 ELEVATION A� 5.4 / 3/8" = 1 '_ 0 " ELEVATION 3/8" = l'-O" 1 BB 4 ! ■ OPEN TO SALES 1 1 I•• •R c fr4 i • ,.. CD 3 -C A5.4 1 -C A5.4 ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" - l'-O" OPEN TO SALES ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" Zip 8 A5.4 1 -D A5.4 Co CD P1 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION ‘! ,pn FoR COOT COMP LIAN `"c 4 Cif Of Tukwila N TR P1 ti } BB P1. B ILDING DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL. CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 ([Fm(:' iL!• de.C1, 7 s./..,e41/4 an the. trope n :: •it I .. ;e l irr{rs lire, :Architectural (. /tire. 17.q , r other use of 31.,'; ii;�ti•l;;i' #! %Jr;;:; Thrit ;;:7t!P:r consent is f'm;1.ht'`"d ..n ;a a, i!r!;Tl)Pi'FiiYl:; will be. s'J. i`f:;'ii 'o legal l.': id ^N. 44'i Little 2007 JOHN C. KOMISI1 STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME NAME PROJECT TEAM . PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS RECCE;. CITY OF TUKWLA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE- FITTING ROOM ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET N0. 12/21/07 A5.4 CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER TO PIPE CENTER TO J-BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX HEIGHT OF J-BOX CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE 'a-. xnx .r x x xnx r c•� o .��: xx : xx :d DIM xn* ■c •a A I Kell AMA ■ ■[ 1C 1! i ] ■ C 3 ■C I i xnll ■c •] no „, . MM. yr. .w.,. IMMMEMINI: CO A5.4 A5.4 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 " = 1' -0" G.G. TO CUT OUT "BATTEN" AT SHELVES FITTING ROOM SHELF ELEVATION 0' - 4" 1' -8" PAINT GRADE POPLAR WOOD MOULDING HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR FITTING ROOM SHELF SECTION l C FITTING ROOM BENCH DETAIL EQ. , 1 12" TYP. EQ. , BATTEN WALL FINISH ( P1 ) WOOD MOULDING ( P1 ) 1/2" MDF HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR ( P1 ) NEW OR EXISTING WALL 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ( P1 ) EASED EDGE ( P1 ) PAINT GRADE POPLAR( pi ) 5/8 "" TYPE "X" GWB ( pi ) MTL. STUD FRAMING AS REQUIRED FOR BENCH BATTEN( P1 )( BB ) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 GYP. BD. (P1 ) (W PP) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 CENTER BATTENS OVER ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALL BATTEN DO NOT EASE EDGES LOCATE RECEPTACLE TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH BATTEN TYPICAL A5.4 3 NOTES: 1. PRE -DRILL ALL HOLES FOR HARDWARE TO REDUCE STRIPPING AND BURRING OF SCREW HEADS. 2. FOLLOW WALL DETAILS FOR BATTEN WALL FINISH AT FITTING ROOMS. REVIEW BATTEN LAYOUT PRIOR TO APPLYING TO WALL. LAYOUT ALL SEAMS TO BE COVERED BY BATTEN STRIP. NO PATCHING OF EEXISTING SEAMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. PROVIDE TO PAINTING. 3. FITTING ROOM BENCH IS TO BE PROVIDED BY G.C.. BENCH IS BUILT INTO THE WALL AND FINISHED AS BATTEN WALL. BENCH TOP IS TO BE SOLID WOOD OR PLYWOOD WITH A MIN. 6 -COATS OF PAINT. PROVIDE NOSING DETAIL AT EDGE OF BENCH CONSTRUCTED OF PAINT GRADE POPLAR. 4. DO NOT ALLOW CONFLICT BETWEEN BATTEN AND LIGHT FIXTURE OR RECEPTACLE. VESTIBULE 3/8" = 1' -0" (--; ACC. FITTING RM PLAN 3/8" 1._0„ 3' - 10 3/8" B I 3' - 10 3/8" FITTING RM 1 3/8" - 1'-0" " TT P1 TR (MR ) B4 P1 Ii.._._ 3 -A ELEVATION A5.4 3/8" _ 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ( TR (( Pi ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" 4 3D - FITTING ROOMS WALL PATTERN A5.4 EN UU CD Ut i CD CD 0) G.C, TO CUT OUT "BATTEN AT MIRROR (TYP) TR P1 ( BB ( P1 RE ■ / / \ / \ / OPEN TO' SALES /\ Mai NEI ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" / 6-7 ELEVATION A� 5.4 / 3/8" = 1 '_ 0 " ELEVATION 3/8" = l'-O" 1 BB 4 ! ■ OPEN TO SALES 1 1 I•• •R c fr4 i • ,.. CD 3 -C A5.4 1 -C A5.4 ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" - l'-O" OPEN TO SALES ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" Zip 8 A5.4 1 -D A5.4 Co CD P1 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION ‘! ,pn FoR COOT COMP LIAN `"c 4 Cif Of Tukwila N TR P1 ti } BB P1. B ILDING DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL. CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 ([Fm(:' iL!• de.C1, 7 s./..,e41/4 an the. trope n :: •it I .. ;e l irr{rs lire, :Architectural (. /tire. 17.q , r other use of 31.,'; ii;�ti•l;;i' #! %Jr;;:; Thrit ;;:7t!P:r consent is f'm;1.ht'`"d ..n ;a a, i!r!;Tl)Pi'FiiYl:; will be. s'J. i`f:;'ii 'o legal l.': id ^N. 44'i Little 2007 JOHN C. KOMISI1 STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME NAME PROJECT TEAM . PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS RECCE;. CITY OF TUKWLA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE- FITTING ROOM ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET N0. 12/21/07 A5.4 CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER TO PIPE CENTER TO J-BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX HEIGHT OF J-BOX CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE 7 _ -... ,_�' , DUI IF" . G. no „, . MM. yr. .w.,. .....,.. ( MR) . CO A5.4 A5.4 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 " = 1' -0" G.G. TO CUT OUT "BATTEN" AT SHELVES FITTING ROOM SHELF ELEVATION 0' - 4" 1' -8" PAINT GRADE POPLAR WOOD MOULDING HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR FITTING ROOM SHELF SECTION l C FITTING ROOM BENCH DETAIL EQ. , 1 12" TYP. EQ. , BATTEN WALL FINISH ( P1 ) WOOD MOULDING ( P1 ) 1/2" MDF HANGING HOOK PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR PAINT GRADE POPLAR ( P1 ) NEW OR EXISTING WALL 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ( P1 ) EASED EDGE ( P1 ) PAINT GRADE POPLAR( pi ) 5/8 "" TYPE "X" GWB ( pi ) MTL. STUD FRAMING AS REQUIRED FOR BENCH BATTEN( P1 )( BB ) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 GYP. BD. (P1 ) (W PP) GRADE POPLAR TR P1 CENTER BATTENS OVER ENTIRE LENGTH OF WALL BATTEN DO NOT EASE EDGES LOCATE RECEPTACLE TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH BATTEN TYPICAL A5.4 3 NOTES: 1. PRE -DRILL ALL HOLES FOR HARDWARE TO REDUCE STRIPPING AND BURRING OF SCREW HEADS. 2. FOLLOW WALL DETAILS FOR BATTEN WALL FINISH AT FITTING ROOMS. REVIEW BATTEN LAYOUT PRIOR TO APPLYING TO WALL. LAYOUT ALL SEAMS TO BE COVERED BY BATTEN STRIP. NO PATCHING OF EEXISTING SEAMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. PROVIDE TO PAINTING. 3. FITTING ROOM BENCH IS TO BE PROVIDED BY G.C.. BENCH IS BUILT INTO THE WALL AND FINISHED AS BATTEN WALL. BENCH TOP IS TO BE SOLID WOOD OR PLYWOOD WITH A MIN. 6 -COATS OF PAINT. PROVIDE NOSING DETAIL AT EDGE OF BENCH CONSTRUCTED OF PAINT GRADE POPLAR. 4. DO NOT ALLOW CONFLICT BETWEEN BATTEN AND LIGHT FIXTURE OR RECEPTACLE. VESTIBULE 3/8" = 1' -0" (--; ACC. FITTING RM PLAN 3/8" 1._0„ 3' - 10 3/8" B I 3' - 10 3/8" FITTING RM 1 3/8" - 1'-0" " TT P1 TR (MR ) B4 P1 Ii.._._ 3 -A ELEVATION A5.4 3/8" _ 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ( TR (( Pi ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" 4 3D - FITTING ROOMS WALL PATTERN A5.4 EN UU CD Ut i CD CD 0) G.C, TO CUT OUT "BATTEN AT MIRROR (TYP) TR P1 ( BB ( P1 RE ■ / / \ / \ / OPEN TO' SALES /\ Mai NEI ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" / 6-7 ELEVATION A� 5.4 / 3/8" = 1 '_ 0 " ELEVATION 3/8" = l'-O" 1 BB 4 ! ■ OPEN TO SALES 1 1 I•• •R c fr4 i • ,.. CD 3 -C A5.4 1 -C A5.4 ELEVATION 3/8" = 1 ' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" - l'-O" OPEN TO SALES ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" Zip 8 A5.4 1 -D A5.4 Co CD P1 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" ELEVATION ‘! ,pn FoR COOT COMP LIAN `"c 4 Cif Of Tukwila N TR P1 ti } BB P1. B ILDING DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL. CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 ([Fm(:' iL!• de.C1, 7 s./..,e41/4 an the. trope n :: •it I .. ;e l irr{rs lire, :Architectural (. /tire. 17.q , r other use of 31.,'; ii;�ti•l;;i' #! %Jr;;:; Thrit ;;:7t!P:r consent is f'm;1.ht'`"d ..n ;a a, i!r!;Tl)Pi'FiiYl:; will be. s'J. i`f:;'ii 'o legal l.': id ^N. 44'i Little 2007 JOHN C. KOMISI1 STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME NAME PROJECT TEAM . PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS RECCE;. CITY OF TUKWLA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE- FITTING ROOM ELEVATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET N0. 12/21/07 A5.4 CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX CENTER TO PIPE CENTER TO J-BOX CENTER OF 'J' BOX HEIGHT OF J-BOX CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE CENTER OF PIPE A5.5 1/2" = FRONT VIEW TELE /DATA STORAGE ( P1 ) ` FIN. FLR. BATA 7 MANAGERS DESK W/ PVERJEAD SHELVING STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -D 1/4" = 1' -0" 3' - 4" 1' - 0 " ( P1 ) ( FRP) B1 ) 3/4" PLYWOOD PANEL SURFACE MOUNTED FROM 20" A.F.F. TO 9' -8" A.F.F. ON ALL (3) SIDES PHONE BLOCK. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. PHONE PATCH PANEL. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. PHONE SYSTEM OUTLETS SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 3/4" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD SHELVES RESTING ON CLEATS ON WALLS, TYP. OF (3). PROVIDE 4 "X4" SQ. GROMMET HOLES, CENTERED ON BACK OF SHELF CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 4" VINYL BASE( B1 ) ( P1) 18" KV BRACKETT @ 30" O.C. MAX MILL FINISH W/ 3/4" MELAMINE SHELF 1C A5.5 2' -0" TYP. r N CD rn STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -C / I i ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" SIDE VIEW C P1 ) ( P1 ) (FRP) L--_ _l ( B1 O CV N Co Ca C') FIN. FLOOR I 3 A5.5 o �6 5/8" TYP ❑ ❑ 1/2" = 1' -0" 6' -0" 0'- 6 5/8" MANAGER'S DESK ELEVATION ( P1 ) 1/4" = 1' -0" CEILING SEE PLAN FOR ELEVATION ADJ. SHELF P -LAM ( PL ) 2 BRACKETS PER SHELF CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED OUTLETS, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS F] P -LAM COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" THICK PLYWOOD WITH ( PL ) 1 -1/2" EDGE 1 1/2" GROMMETS - VERIFY NUMBER AND LOCATION WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 4" VINYL BASE (P1) STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -B TOILET ROOM LEGEND: SINGLE ROLL STAINLESS STEEL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B -7685 18' x 36" MIRROR WITH STAINLESS STEEL CHANNEL FRAME BOBRICK B -165 SURFACE MOUNTED ROLL PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER BOBRICK B -253 ( WASTE RECEPTACLE MATRIX SERIES SURFACE MOUNTED BOBRICK B -5277 SEAT COVER DISPENSER MATRIX SERIES SURFACE MOUNTED BOBRICK B -5221 SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 18" KV BRACKETT @ 30" O.C. MAX MILL FINISH W/ 3/4" MELAMINE SHELF CV CD CV 3/8" = 1' -0" 2' -6" FIN. FLOOR 1/2" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 0_ 1' -4" MANAGER'S DESK SECTION 1/4" = 1' -0" WALL FINISH NOTES 1. SEE SHEET A0.3 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE 0 ADJ. SHELF P -LAM 0 — 4" VINYL BASE( B1 ) ( PL ) 2 BRACKETS PER SHELF P -LAM COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" THICK PLYWOOD WITH 1 1/2" EDGE 1 1/2" GROMMETS VERIFY NUMBER / LOCATION WITH OWNER'S REP. ( PL ) CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -A CV 6 - 111/4" i 3/8" = 1' -0" 3' -67/8" 7'- 113/4" STOCK ROOM FLOOR PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" 3' - 1 1/2" 5' - 4 1 /2" 2' - 7 1/8" TOILET FLOOR PLAN MANAGER'S —"— DESK ■ DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 `.. ls.c rr;.a:;:n4' and , % ;r' zs':'Srz _ t.nzvFZ a;2 p, GG °;T:' of nt),PrhizI I1,im. r/?,; or 9i er ajf +fr %iiif' i rai Liri. :YIri ;II I/e% /' TheitTII fig?/ 8f; zj /IrihThzrf:% 7,W$ flf.j' it /; llif'i'f/l /iii grill be skb/ca to legal nr Ii n n .. Li4:E.le 2007 8746 JOHN C. KONSIN STATE CF WASH N3 T D: CLIENT NAME . DUNGFREE5 AMERICA GHTA.DI� rj. PROJECT NAME MPW DRAWN BY BJ S PRO]ECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER 93 4 Cr) T LLI .1 CO C.) 2 CO CO CC CO J Z I w M W N O N W 0 cn FITTING RM, TOILET, & STOCK ROOM PLAN & ELEVATIONS I Landlord / City Revisions 12/21/07 art, RECEIVED m, A MAR 0 7 PERMI 625- 4089 -01 A5.5 02.21.08 SHEET TITLE - PROJECT. NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. LUCEZU 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( P1 ) MONITOR 7 FRP A5.5 1/2" = FRONT VIEW TELE /DATA STORAGE ( P1 ) ` FIN. FLR. BATA 7 MANAGERS DESK W/ PVERJEAD SHELVING STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -D 1/4" = 1' -0" 3' - 4" 1' - 0 " ( P1 ) ( FRP) B1 ) 3/4" PLYWOOD PANEL SURFACE MOUNTED FROM 20" A.F.F. TO 9' -8" A.F.F. ON ALL (3) SIDES PHONE BLOCK. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. PHONE PATCH PANEL. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. PHONE SYSTEM OUTLETS SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 3/4" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD SHELVES RESTING ON CLEATS ON WALLS, TYP. OF (3). PROVIDE 4 "X4" SQ. GROMMET HOLES, CENTERED ON BACK OF SHELF CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 4" VINYL BASE( B1 ) ( P1) 18" KV BRACKETT @ 30" O.C. MAX MILL FINISH W/ 3/4" MELAMINE SHELF 1C A5.5 2' -0" TYP. r N CD rn STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -C / I i ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" SIDE VIEW C P1 ) ( P1 ) (FRP) L--_ _l ( B1 O CV N Co Ca C') FIN. FLOOR I 3 A5.5 o �6 5/8" TYP ❑ ❑ 1/2" = 1' -0" 6' -0" 0'- 6 5/8" MANAGER'S DESK ELEVATION ( P1 ) 1/4" = 1' -0" CEILING SEE PLAN FOR ELEVATION ADJ. SHELF P -LAM ( PL ) 2 BRACKETS PER SHELF CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED OUTLETS, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS F] P -LAM COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" THICK PLYWOOD WITH ( PL ) 1 -1/2" EDGE 1 1/2" GROMMETS - VERIFY NUMBER AND LOCATION WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 4" VINYL BASE (P1) STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -B TOILET ROOM LEGEND: SINGLE ROLL STAINLESS STEEL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B -7685 18' x 36" MIRROR WITH STAINLESS STEEL CHANNEL FRAME BOBRICK B -165 SURFACE MOUNTED ROLL PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER BOBRICK B -253 ( WASTE RECEPTACLE MATRIX SERIES SURFACE MOUNTED BOBRICK B -5277 SEAT COVER DISPENSER MATRIX SERIES SURFACE MOUNTED BOBRICK B -5221 SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 18" KV BRACKETT @ 30" O.C. MAX MILL FINISH W/ 3/4" MELAMINE SHELF CV CD CV 3/8" = 1' -0" 2' -6" FIN. FLOOR 1/2" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 0_ 1' -4" MANAGER'S DESK SECTION 1/4" = 1' -0" WALL FINISH NOTES 1. SEE SHEET A0.3 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE 0 ADJ. SHELF P -LAM 0 — 4" VINYL BASE( B1 ) ( PL ) 2 BRACKETS PER SHELF P -LAM COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" THICK PLYWOOD WITH 1 1/2" EDGE 1 1/2" GROMMETS VERIFY NUMBER / LOCATION WITH OWNER'S REP. ( PL ) CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -A CV 6 - 111/4" i 3/8" = 1' -0" 3' -67/8" 7'- 113/4" STOCK ROOM FLOOR PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" 3' - 1 1/2" 5' - 4 1 /2" 2' - 7 1/8" TOILET FLOOR PLAN MANAGER'S —"— DESK ■ DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 `.. ls.c rr;.a:;:n4' and , % ;r' zs':'Srz _ t.nzvFZ a;2 p, GG °;T:' of nt),PrhizI I1,im. r/?,; or 9i er ajf +fr %iiif' i rai Liri. :YIri ;II I/e% /' TheitTII fig?/ 8f; zj /IrihThzrf:% 7,W$ flf.j' it /; llif'i'f/l /iii grill be skb/ca to legal nr Ii n n .. Li4:E.le 2007 8746 JOHN C. KONSIN STATE CF WASH N3 T D: CLIENT NAME . DUNGFREE5 AMERICA GHTA.DI� rj. PROJECT NAME MPW DRAWN BY BJ S PRO]ECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER 93 4 Cr) T LLI .1 CO C.) 2 CO CO CC CO J Z I w M W N O N W 0 cn FITTING RM, TOILET, & STOCK ROOM PLAN & ELEVATIONS I Landlord / City Revisions 12/21/07 art, RECEIVED m, A MAR 0 7 PERMI 625- 4089 -01 A5.5 02.21.08 SHEET TITLE - PROJECT. NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. LUCEZU 0 0 0 0 0 0 MONITOR CPU -- 000 UPS A5.5 1/2" = FRONT VIEW TELE /DATA STORAGE ( P1 ) ` FIN. FLR. BATA 7 MANAGERS DESK W/ PVERJEAD SHELVING STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -D 1/4" = 1' -0" 3' - 4" 1' - 0 " ( P1 ) ( FRP) B1 ) 3/4" PLYWOOD PANEL SURFACE MOUNTED FROM 20" A.F.F. TO 9' -8" A.F.F. ON ALL (3) SIDES PHONE BLOCK. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. PHONE PATCH PANEL. SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS. PHONE SYSTEM OUTLETS SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 3/4" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD SHELVES RESTING ON CLEATS ON WALLS, TYP. OF (3). PROVIDE 4 "X4" SQ. GROMMET HOLES, CENTERED ON BACK OF SHELF CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 4" VINYL BASE( B1 ) ( P1) 18" KV BRACKETT @ 30" O.C. MAX MILL FINISH W/ 3/4" MELAMINE SHELF 1C A5.5 2' -0" TYP. r N CD rn STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -C / I i ELEVATION 3/8" = 1' -0" SIDE VIEW C P1 ) ( P1 ) (FRP) L--_ _l ( B1 O CV N Co Ca C') FIN. FLOOR I 3 A5.5 o �6 5/8" TYP ❑ ❑ 1/2" = 1' -0" 6' -0" 0'- 6 5/8" MANAGER'S DESK ELEVATION ( P1 ) 1/4" = 1' -0" CEILING SEE PLAN FOR ELEVATION ADJ. SHELF P -LAM ( PL ) 2 BRACKETS PER SHELF CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED OUTLETS, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS F] P -LAM COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" THICK PLYWOOD WITH ( PL ) 1 -1/2" EDGE 1 1/2" GROMMETS - VERIFY NUMBER AND LOCATION WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 4" VINYL BASE (P1) STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -B TOILET ROOM LEGEND: SINGLE ROLL STAINLESS STEEL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B -7685 18' x 36" MIRROR WITH STAINLESS STEEL CHANNEL FRAME BOBRICK B -165 SURFACE MOUNTED ROLL PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER BOBRICK B -253 ( WASTE RECEPTACLE MATRIX SERIES SURFACE MOUNTED BOBRICK B -5277 SEAT COVER DISPENSER MATRIX SERIES SURFACE MOUNTED BOBRICK B -5221 SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 18" KV BRACKETT @ 30" O.C. MAX MILL FINISH W/ 3/4" MELAMINE SHELF CV CD CV 3/8" = 1' -0" 2' -6" FIN. FLOOR 1/2" = 1' -0" ELEVATION 0_ 1' -4" MANAGER'S DESK SECTION 1/4" = 1' -0" WALL FINISH NOTES 1. SEE SHEET A0.3 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE 0 ADJ. SHELF P -LAM 0 — 4" VINYL BASE( B1 ) ( PL ) 2 BRACKETS PER SHELF P -LAM COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" THICK PLYWOOD WITH 1 1/2" EDGE 1 1/2" GROMMETS VERIFY NUMBER / LOCATION WITH OWNER'S REP. ( PL ) CONT. 1x4 LEDGER 3 -SIDES G.C. TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED STOCK ROOM ELEVATION 2 -A CV 6 - 111/4" i 3/8" = 1' -0" 3' -67/8" 7'- 113/4" STOCK ROOM FLOOR PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" 3' - 1 1/2" 5' - 4 1 /2" 2' - 7 1/8" TOILET FLOOR PLAN MANAGER'S —"— DESK ■ DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 `.. ls.c rr;.a:;:n4' and , % ;r' zs':'Srz _ t.nzvFZ a;2 p, GG °;T:' of nt),PrhizI I1,im. r/?,; or 9i er ajf +fr %iiif' i rai Liri. :YIri ;II I/e% /' TheitTII fig?/ 8f; zj /IrihThzrf:% 7,W$ flf.j' it /; llif'i'f/l /iii grill be skb/ca to legal nr Ii n n .. Li4:E.le 2007 8746 JOHN C. KONSIN STATE CF WASH N3 T D: CLIENT NAME . DUNGFREE5 AMERICA GHTA.DI� rj. PROJECT NAME MPW DRAWN BY BJ S PRO]ECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER 93 4 Cr) T LLI .1 CO C.) 2 CO CO CC CO J Z I w M W N O N W 0 cn FITTING RM, TOILET, & STOCK ROOM PLAN & ELEVATIONS I Landlord / City Revisions 12/21/07 art, RECEIVED m, A MAR 0 7 PERMI 625- 4089 -01 A5.5 02.21.08 SHEET TITLE - PROJECT. NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. LUCEZU In4G;KNT e ,11,1,M, rH+1+1+ ii+i+ii+Fmi+ki+H (t I trlftig I. NRW. Iuiur LE STORAGE SYSTEMS INC 1.NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS U111TS WILL BE 12 HIGH WITH 5.51-ELME:SA' HAM LEV SHELVING IT PARTS: itliCpaMts3 otne LOSCONTAN1 ;0y.y otiA • - ' • fACH tetea Ste 2966 VALSON LANE NW WW1 gLikagg)S Mg 49534 TEL: M234,7477 FAX 616.701.9916 lithioW.P114040SgLE.COM CUSITIMMERVVIPPAKIBLE.CM POtiNSMA 2NEY trad'Ota {, NagaakR 04FfetUAIV3 MI? ERNEL OW'.. WILL BE IT HIGH WM1 11 SHELVES OMINGS SHELVING UNIT PARTS'' .e (I) MOBILE STORA• INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS acN.LCAL NAIKVIS-141411-3 aVieKl I 5 1 i48:11'.421f WaVatt43.: I 41- Mr036i5-144141-P—DY 0.11W33-3 Mtret txtit7 DO o// E SYSTEMS MC. :" • 6003/A: Wuta Met 1,4s=ce" 1.010k1r0 (P) %OMR .. 51-CIMLIML "trar4 Ettil C4:140 WILSON ORM GUID it0105 Mg 49534 TEL: M234.7477 614,191*991• WWW.PIPPMOBILLC E it CLISTOMER$ERV0PIPPMOBILEXOM DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive _ Charlotte; NC 28217 www.littleonline.com •7 dr,;nin,y and ;YR. dysii;n st are the P ..ittle 1)eversilie.d ...-1nr (..onsulting, The .o?produitio4, 0, or other use ?f3 draoiu,', with// thp:1. ronsent pribibited alki any 2 il? nAellow will be Ifgal 8746 JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASKINSTO: CLIENT NAME.. •_ • . . • PROJECT NAME . DRAWN BY BJS PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW 12/21/07 Lig:Ele 2007 1 I Landlord / City Revisions 1 CITY OF ToomtA MAR 0 7 ZUUti PERMIT CENTER to to 1 ; LL.1 CO < 0- CO Cl) CC c ° 1.1.J CO Z Cs) 2 c) cc I LIS M —1 Z 0 LL.1 (.1) C.) L I 41 = (NI 1 c p (/) — 0 Cl) PROJECT TEAM REVISIONS . • NO REASON DATE SHEET TITLE STOCKROOM SHELVING DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER • 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE A5.6 02.21 08 II AW I p ry 1 i � r rr�rarrr�= +r '`. •__ i rr it rrrrr..o�,.w,..�w.rrrirrrrrrri I it wAriw��riirii�irrrrrrrr ... 0 ' 00 i N co 10 -, A l JEAN WALL CABINET BASE, FOIC. TOENAIL TO FINISH 01 UNIT WILL LEAN TOWARD WALL SLIGHT OWN. WALL ' LY 1` 0' - 0 3/4"-- 1' - 11 3/4" r r . A6.0 WOOD CROWN @ WALL 3 „ = 1,_0„ 3 „ = 1 ._ 0 „ 2X @ 18" O.C. NAILING BLOCK WITH 45" ANGLE NOT PROVIDED BY OWNER ATTACH TO TOP OF CABINET I_ 5 1/8" 5 1/8" co Lc) WOOD CROWN MOULDING SALES 12' -0" CROWN MOULDIN WD. BLOCKING FASCIA BOARD, OFCI. INSTALL FASCIA PRIOR TO CUTTING & INSTALLING FLUTED MOULDING lx 9 WOOD TRIM PAINTED FLUTED TRIM BEYOND 1/4" MIRROR WHERE OCCURS 5/8" GYP. BD 0/ 3 -5/8" METAL FRAMING CROWN MOULDING Ln OVERLAP BETWEEN 2" AND 1/2" MIN FASCIA BOARD, OFCI FASCIA PRIOR TO CUTTING & INSTALLING FLUTED MOULDINGS SITE - INSTALLING TRIM BEYOND A6.0 BRICK VENEER MORTAR JOINT CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE 1/2" BRICK VENEER CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE GRC BASE MOLD "DECO FORM" COLOR - NATURAL FINISH( B3 ) 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB ADHEAR PER MANUF. SPEC. METAL STUD 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB 3/4" WOOD FLOORING A6.0 3" = 1' -0" 3" - 1' -0" 5/8" BRICK WALL BASE DETAIL 0' - 0 3/4" 5 BASE AT WALL FINISH L 5/8" GWB BATTEN BEYOND (WHERE OCCURS) (WPA)WALL PAPER FINISH (WHERE OCCURS) WOOD BASE; SEE ELEVATIONS FOR PAINT FINISHES C B4) WOOD FLOORING ( Fl ) FLOOR SUBSTATE AS SPECIFIED WALL FRAMING PER PLAN PER PLAN MTL LAY -IN CEILING ( MTL) MTL TRIM (CM2) THIN BRICK ( BR ) 8" MAX. OR 1/4" LENGTH OF THE RUNNER WHICHEVER IS LEAST SHIM METAL CORNICE CEILING DETAIL A6.0 3 " = 11-0" 3 " = 1' -0" 3", = 1 A6.0 j 3 " = 1 '_ 0 " WALL FRAMING PER PLAN MTL LAY -IN CEILING ( MTL) MTL CORNICE (CM2) WALLPAPER; PAINT FINISH (W PA) METAL CORNICE CEILING DETAIL 1 • i I• � I � I 1�1 w► w w a �: = ►ter i # mow ww w w w w 1" WALL UNIT BASE, FOIC. TOENAIL TO FINISH FLOOR 0k, slo so fgssmss=s=====mssssssssvli'•" W/ TALL EDGE AT FRONT AS SHOWN. WALL UNIT I I 010 WILL LEAN TOWARD WALL SLIGHTLY 010 DETAIL AT WALL UNIT BASE 1 DETAIL @ JEAN WALL CABINET BASE 8" MAX. OR 1/4" LENGTH OF THE RUNNER WHICHEVER IS LEAST F .R.T. WOOD BLOCKING 0' -03/4" Cr) F.O. FINISH WALL WALL UNIT PER PLAN PIN NAIL BASE TO WALL UNIT & WALL UNIT BASE; FILL NAIL HOLES AS REQ'D PAINTED BASE ( FINISH FLOOR MELAMINE FINISH LINE OF VERTICAL PLYWOOD TRIM BEYOND PIN NAIL BASE TO WALL UNIT & WALL UNIT BASE; FILL NAIL HOLES AS REQ'D SITE INSTALLED BASEBOARD ( P2 ) FINISH FLOOR ' DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com 17 dr"<ik.•i a ; ,.'1d t d '; ',n S'('-'P .:;Y r. %... rope ; y: ,d 111th' ] 1:kr:i:eef lirbiter/ / %+:. 0;1.f,:.,F;t. I t1;11 other .i�B +l � !� lrP:i'l.i! ;p wit f /ei1' a.rit 'tz conie?:t 7i prohibited and a' ' 33' h' he s b L t! legal nrfj 8746 JOHN C. KOMIS N STATE OFWASl- 3TG:1 CLIENT NAME S , i f t A LQ, O ntINGanEEs A 1ERIC 1 CH TO DS$ PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS 12/21/07 i,ittE.te 2 007 Co) T co W oA Co a 00 CC OD J F. OD a wa W I— W J W cn c:t W c 0 U) RECEI'v'E0 CITY OF TUKVMALA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER 625 - 4089 -01 A6.0 SHEET TITLE DETAILS - BASE AND CROWN PROJECT NUMBER ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. w N n 0 CO J COLUMN PLAN @ DEMISING WALL 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" G.C. TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 1/4" TEMPERED MIRROR AS REQ. LINE OF FLUTED TRIM BEYOND G.C. TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 1/4" TEMPERED MIRROR AS REQ. 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" COLUMN SIZE AS PER PLAN 3/4" • COLUMN BASE & CROWN DETAILS �.f LINE OF COLUMN CROWN MOULDING ABOVE 5/8" GYP. BD. ( P2 ) METAL FRAMING, PER PLAN FLUTED TRIM (KNOTCH WHEN INSTALLING MIRROR) G.C. TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 1/4" TEMPERED MIRROR AS REQUIRED (SEE ELEVATIONS) 1 X 6 BASE BELOW ( P2 ) FLUTED TRIM (KNOTCH WHEN INSTALLING MIRROR) EXISTING DEMISING WALL METAL FRAMING, PER PLAN 5/8" GYP. BD. POPLAR CROWN MOLDIN WOOD BLOCKING AS REQ. 1 X 9 MDF( P2 ) LINE OF FLUTED TRIM BEYOND GYP. BD. PAINT WHERE EXPOSED( P2 METAL FRAMING, PER PLAN GYP. BD. PAINT WHERE EXPOSED ( P2) LINE OF FLUTED TRIM BEYOND 1 X 6 BASE( P2 ) CROWN MOLDING ( MR) 1" = 1' -0" FLUTED TRIM EXISTING DEMISING WALL (WHERE OCCURS) GYP. BD. PAINT WHERE ( P2 )OCCURS G.C. TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 1/4" TEMPERED MIRROR AS REQ. (SEE ELEVATIONS) FLUTED TRIM 1 X 6 WOOD BASE ( P2 ) 3 5/8" MET. STUD HANGER WITH HILTI DN 32 SHOT PINS @ 24" O.C. SECURED AS REQUIRED TO STRUCTURE, ABOVE. 5/8" GYB. BD. 3 5/8" METAL STUD FLUTED TRIM 5/8" GYP. BD. ALIGN GWB WITH THE FASCIA ( P2 ) ( MR) MIRROR PANEL (WHERE OCCURS) A6.1 C SECTION DETAIL - SALES FLOOR SOFFIT 1 1/2" = 1' -0" AS REQUIRED COLUMN ELEVATIONS SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW 3 5/8" MET. STUD HANGER WITH HILTI DN 32 SHOT PINS © 24" O.C. SECURED AS REQUIRED TO STRUCTURE, ABOVE. 5/8" GYB. BD. 3 5/8" METAL STUD, TYP. TYP. CROWN MOLDING FLUTED TRIM 1�0� -DI J G.C. TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 1/4" TEMPE MIRROR AS REQ. (SE ELEVATIONS) ( MR ) FLUTED TRIM 1 X 6 WOOD BASE ( P2 ) cove covekOce it yok?' 010 8746 PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS 12/21/07 (:` ,k3:E. e 2007 E. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVVILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON REVISIONS NO REASON DATE 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.Iittleonline.com 11. /S d/ ;1:12,? eend tu•• tsew S : J :iI . be ; pe ,":' i ; ;!'i i °.ci{ll 1 rcb/.'ddG ' .0 ; ;P,:. `fl . f f.'t' trprv,h4,1 04, ropyJ? i other !/! 3rlilf' drawl 1('' ;! ?'`,'.i:a/ their ;;.;%'Iten r ;; 'e ''5 /'rr /'1'ni,r i :m,7 a ;,y 71'17 ;;,t!e ehr wri%' Tip !1(; /et' /? r'Ihui ;;(4; ?'2, CLIENT NAME b numG aEEs Aivirizicx G}i'r0 D11� n _ PROJECT NAME T uJ i 0 ct 03 a2 I cc CO I. CO J Z d7 2 V Ect cc _ uj J M W O V) V N W H co N 0 cn PROJECT TEAM SHEET TITLE. _ DETAILS - SALES FLOOR COLUMNS PROJECT NUMBER 625- 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. A6.1 0 3/4" WIDE LAY IN GRID SYSTEM IS NOT ALLOWED. USE SLIM LINE TYPE -- - - - 4 , ,, 1 2" O to LSSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 WALL / COLUMN OR CABINET FINISH WHERE OCCURS r 0' - 3 3/8" LANDLORD NOTE: ALL SUPPORTS TO BE FROM STRUCTURAL BEAMS AND JOISTS AND NOT FROM DECK ABOVE WALL - MOUNTED PLUMBER'S PIPE RAIL 3 " =1 PROVIDE BLOCKING TYP. FLAT HEAD SCREW 1/4" HOLE FLANGE BASE THREADED GALVANIZED NIPPLE ELBOW FITTING 1" O.D. GALVANIZED PIPE WALL WHERE OCCURS T- FITTING MID - SUPPORT @ EVERY 8' O.C. MAX. 12" WIDE SHEET METAL BACKING. A6.2 SHEET METAL BLOCKING DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1 ' -0" J ) L 1 " =1' -0" BRICK WALL FINISH WOOD BLOCKING DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'_0" GYP BD CEILING SYSTEM DETAIL A6.2 1 1/2" = 1' -0" J 1 1 J 1 7[ ) ( DECK OR STRUCTURE ABOVE #12 HANGER WIRE SUSPENDED GYP. BD. CEILING SYSTEM (ARMSTRONG OR EQUAVALENT) 5/8" GYPSUM BD. a } SHEET METAL SCREW 2 - #8TEK EACH STUD TYPICAL AT ITEMS WEIGHING LESS THAN 50LBS MTL STUD METAL CORNICE WHERE OCCURS AT METAL CEILINGS (CM2) GROUT( G1 ) SIMONS THIN BRICK VENEER ( BR) ( B3 ) REVIEW BRICK LAYOUT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CALCULATE BRICK SQ. FT. WITH TIGHT GROUT JOINTS ICBO #1715P 6 "x16GA STUD BACKING 1/8" WELDED TO A MINIMUM OF 3 -STUDS AT ITEMS WEIGHING LESS THAN 50LBS SHEET METAL SCREW 2 - #8TEK EACH STUD TYPICAL AT ITEMS WEIGHING LESS THAN 50LBS MTL STUD 6 "x16GA STUD BACKING 00/1 CEILING HEIGHT SEE CEILING PLAN COMPRESSION STRUT MAIN RUNNER. CROSS RUNNER. A6.2 DETAIL @ CEILING BRACING 3" = 1' -0" PER PLAN C (MTL)CEILING RUNNER TRACK SAME GAUGE AS STUD. MIN. 1" WIDE FLANGES, MAIN RUNNER OF SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 2 1/2" METAL STUD INFILL, ANCHOR TO TOP AND BOTTOM OF CHORD ° WALL FRAMING PER PLAN TYPICAL CEILING SUPPORT GRID 3" - 1'-0" 3 " = 11-0" NOTE: FOR POWDER DRIVEN FASTNERS (SILL ANCHORAGE) USE: ERICO TOOL & FASTENERS -ICBO #ER 4546; HILTI INC -ICBO #ER 1290; #TW RAMSET /RED HEAD -ICBO #ER 1147 OR EQUAL 1 1/2" = 1'_0" CEILING DETAIL MAX. 8" MAX. OR 1/4" LENGTH OF THE RUNNER WHICHEVER IS LEAST UP TO 8' -0 ", MAX STRUT. CONSISTS OF 25 GAUGE METAL STUD WITH 1 -5/8" FLANGES AND 1/2" LIPS. STRUTS TO BE PLACED 12' -0" O.C. ON EACH DIRECTION. STANDARD No. 6X7/16 PAN HEAD SHEET METAL SCREW. ATTACHED TO MAIN RUNNER TYPICAL DETAIL @ COMPRESSION STRUT DETAIL @ TYPICAL CONN. ATTACHED RUNNER TO STRUCTURE OR ROOF DECK ABOVE ADEQUATE FOR THE LOAD IMPOSED. STANDARD No. 6X7/16 PAN HEAD SHEET METAL SCREW MALL DECK MALL STRUCTURAL STEEL BOLT BRACING TO UNISTRUT. AS PER VENDOR SPECIFICATIONS UNISTRUT SECURED PERPENDICULAR TO MAIN STRUCTURE SYSTEM ATTACHEMENTS 3 5/8" METAL STUD BRACING ATTACHED TO UNISTRUT SCREW BRACING TO WALL STUDS W/ (3) #8 SCREWS CEILING PER SCHEDULE 12 GAUGE SUPPORT WIRES IN 4 DIRECTIONS, SPLAYED 90° FROM EACH OTHER. CONNECT TO STRUCTURE ABOVE W/ APPROVED HANGERS. WIRES SHALL BE ATTACHED TO SUSPENSION MEMBERS W/ A MIN. OF THREE TURNS. SECURE BOTTOM TRACK TO SLAB USING POWDER DRIVEN FASTENERS MIN .1450, MAX. SPACING OF 24" OC DO NOT CONNECT STUD BRACING TO ROOF DECK DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 - Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 f +t f /SPi7i.'inx ;l.f1f/ i1. %' f7:'a ?yi7 si (' .' IF t ;. ','(it;, °,`." Al I .J .r: I1774'l:fllite l ;l'Sf: /Y.:a Tbe /,.7 as,' +'J/ L; f:/;, ^,:in; :' #t/';r/ F;ir -,j' q •r;(te f! r 1J f'.mLihsfed Ili a any mfii ,q will ;;r saJ,i i to legal ::Ginn. j JOHN C. KOM!SIN STATE OF WASHINGTON I REVISIONS NO REASON DATE Landlord I City Revisions 02.21 08 CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT' MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS www.Iittleonline.com 8746 � c :i::: D O n IGF SEE Al ERIC "UGH T4D rj_ t El : 2€07 M T W J CO Q 2 N cc CO IA T Qw< WI-W = W V�� O acc W I- 0 RECEI "r crrY OF '1 u K 7 i vL MAR 07 ZUUB PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE BUILDING DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 A6.2 V - , , 3 7 3' - 9 1/2" A: it I E; TOPPER SECTION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" NOTCH ALLOWS TOP UNIT TO REST INTO BASE UNIT LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. TOPPER ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" TOPPER ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1/2" = 1' -0" LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. TOPPER ELEVATION NOTCH ALLOWS TOP UNIT TO REST INTO BASE UNIT TOPPER SECTION 1/2" = 1' -0" TOPPER ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1' -0" TOPPER ELEVATION ML.1 i 1 /2" = 1/2" = 1' -0" 13 �� 3' 8" LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. — LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. TOPPER ELEVATION 15 ML.1 12 ML.1 11 ML.1 1 /2" - 1' -0" SECTION @ POS SIM. JEAN WALL CAB. PLAN 4' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1/2" = 1' -0" WALL UNIT PLAN 1/2" = 1' -0" WALL UNIT PLAN 1 /2" - 1' -0" 1/2" = 1' -0" CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE BEYOND DATA PHONE AND POWER PER ELECTRICAL PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC SITE - INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED BASE SIM SIM SIM PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC WALL UNIT PLAN PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC SITE - INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED BASE JEAN WALL CAB. PLAN LINE OF ANGLED PORTION OF CABINET PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC LINE OF ANGLED PORTION OF CABINET PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC LINE OF ANGLED PORTION OF CABINET CV N 1 /2" = 1' -0" ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 8' -0" ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 7 ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION REAR 8 ft ML.1 1 /2" = 1' -0" ML.1 1 /2" = 1' -0" y TRASH 2' -21/2" POS / ACCESSIBLE COUNTER W/ WOOD FRAME AND GALVANIZED STEEL IN -LAY 2" AND 1" I.D. PLASTIC GROMMET 8' -0" 8' -0" CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP PLAN 8 ft 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. Q CV GALVANIZED STEEL PURSE RAIL PIN/TAG RECEPTACLE DATA PHONE AND POWER PER ELECTRICAL 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE — CASH DESK SCREEN EAS UNIVERSAL MAGNET DETACH ER SINK -IN -DRILL 2 1/2" DIATHRU HOLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION ML.1 1 /2" = 1' -0" ( Th \ ML.1 co C., CASHWRAP ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" ACCESSIBLE COUNTER W/ GALVANIZED STEEL FINISH 2" AND 1" I.D. PLASTIC GROMMET i 8' -0" --1 Ci ` ;J1 CASHWRAP ELEVATION 8' -0" TELEPHONE SHELF u u 2' -21/2" w y CASHWRAP ELEVATION REAR 8 ft 8' -0" 6 3/4" CASHWRAP PLAN 8 FT CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. -- CASH EQUIP. SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. of -CL WILO PIN/TAG RECEPTACLE PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. DATA PHONE AND POWER PER ELECTRICAL CASH DESK SCREEN EAS UNIVERSAL MAGNET DETACHER SINK -IN -DRILL 2 1/2" DIATHRU HOLE L ITTL DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 ?'big & ark: „n d r:;: devio sIi' 'r; rug the proper:::: . 1j4 i )1rer iji(• i.. l �f.�i:erfu: ur �.:c:;rs::,' rh. The ••J`,n7riuC.'Fi ; r,, e.,:ipvirg or: other iw this (i i ?// avhour tbeir117itte11 riir. 'zt ■ i p tw any .?::T77g >emie'r will be P. i'iro le legal a( i . PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MLANAC:N.R MPW DRAWN BY BJS www.Iittleanline.corn JOHN C. KOMISIitI STATE OF W'ASHiNGTC: 874 r 0 \ 0 UN61PEES AmE1 1C . ± ` r , muucx ry ntE � (L,i Lillie 2007 M WJ0�0 41 2 co cc LU J c0 J Z J WV? Ni 0 U) REVISIONS NO REASON DATE CITY OF TUkN:witA MAR 0 7 'IUDU PERMIT CENTER MILLWORK DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 U - U i, —/ 3 7 A: it TOPPER SECTION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" NOTCH ALLOWS TOP UNIT TO REST INTO BASE UNIT LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. TOPPER ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" TOPPER ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1/2" = 1' -0" LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. TOPPER ELEVATION NOTCH ALLOWS TOP UNIT TO REST INTO BASE UNIT TOPPER SECTION 1/2" = 1' -0" TOPPER ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1' -0" TOPPER ELEVATION ML.1 i 1 /2" = 1/2" = 1' -0" 13 �� 3' 8" LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. — LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. TOPPER ELEVATION 15 ML.1 12 ML.1 11 ML.1 1 /2" - 1' -0" SECTION @ POS SIM. JEAN WALL CAB. PLAN 4' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1/2" = 1' -0" WALL UNIT PLAN 1/2" = 1' -0" WALL UNIT PLAN 1 /2" - 1' -0" 1/2" = 1' -0" CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE BEYOND DATA PHONE AND POWER PER ELECTRICAL PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC SITE - INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED BASE SIM SIM SIM PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC WALL UNIT PLAN PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC SITE - INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED BASE JEAN WALL CAB. PLAN LINE OF ANGLED PORTION OF CABINET PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC LINE OF ANGLED PORTION OF CABINET PAINT GRADE POPLAR CABINET,FOIC LINE OF ANGLED PORTION OF CABINET CV N 1 /2" = 1' -0" ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 8' -0" ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 7 ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION REAR 8 ft ML.1 1 /2" = 1' -0" ML.1 1 /2" = 1' -0" y TRASH 2' -21/2" POS / ACCESSIBLE COUNTER W/ WOOD FRAME AND GALVANIZED STEEL IN -LAY 2" AND 1" I.D. PLASTIC GROMMET 8' -0" 8' -0" CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. ACCESSIBLE CASHWRAP PLAN 8 ft 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. Q CV GALVANIZED STEEL PURSE RAIL PIN/TAG RECEPTACLE DATA PHONE AND POWER PER ELECTRICAL 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE — CASH DESK SCREEN EAS UNIVERSAL MAGNET DETACH ER SINK -IN -DRILL 2 1/2" DIATHRU HOLE CASHWRAP ELEVATION ML.1 1 /2" = 1' -0" ( Th \ ML.1 co C., CASHWRAP ELEVATION 1 /2" = 1' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" ACCESSIBLE COUNTER W/ GALVANIZED STEEL FINISH 2" AND 1" I.D. PLASTIC GROMMET i 8' -0" --1 Ci ` ;J1 CASHWRAP ELEVATION 8' -0" TELEPHONE SHELF u u 2' -21/2" w y CASHWRAP ELEVATION REAR 8 ft 8' -0" 6 3/4" CASHWRAP PLAN 8 FT CASH EQUIPMENT SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. -- CASH EQUIP. SCREEN MATCH CASHWRAP BASE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. 1" O.D. PLUMBER'S PIPE GALVANIZED STEEL TOP PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. of -CL WILO PIN/TAG RECEPTACLE PAINT GRADE POPLAR TYP. DATA PHONE AND POWER PER ELECTRICAL CASH DESK SCREEN EAS UNIVERSAL MAGNET DETACHER SINK -IN -DRILL 2 1/2" DIATHRU HOLE L ITTL DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 ?'big & ark: „n d r:;: devio sIi' 'r; rug the proper:::: . 1j4 i )1rer iji(• i.. l �f.�i:erfu: ur �.:c:;rs::,' rh. The ••J`,n7riuC.'Fi ; r,, e.,:ipvirg or: other iw this (i i ?// avhour tbeir117itte11 riir. 'zt ■ i p tw any .?::T77g >emie'r will be P. i'iro le legal a( i . PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MLANAC:N.R MPW DRAWN BY BJS www.Iittleanline.corn JOHN C. KOMISIitI STATE OF W'ASHiNGTC: 874 r 0 \ 0 UN61PEES AmE1 1C . ± ` r , muucx ry ntE � (L,i Lillie 2007 M WJ0�0 41 2 co cc LU J c0 J Z J WV? Ni 0 U) REVISIONS NO REASON DATE CITY OF TUkN:witA MAR 0 7 'IUDU PERMIT CENTER MILLWORK DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 14 ML.2 13 ML.2 FILL NAIL HOLES W/ WOOD FILLER TO MATCH COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST. THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. BOX ONE Te C) C7 JEAN CABINET TO WALL 3" = 1' -0" FINISH WALL PER PLAN 0 010 !iI ♦ ♦ ik1 ■1 0' - 1" 0'- 03/4" 3" = 1 ASSEMBLY NOTES: 3" = 1' -0" 3" = 1' -0" END BOX 1. FILL NAIL HOLES W/WOOD FILLER TO MATCH PAINT COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT. 2. ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST, THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. JEAN CABINET END UNIT 0' -1' WALL UNIT HEAD TRIM- FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC BASEBOARD BEYOND WOOD BLOCKING AS 0' - 0 3/4" REQUIRED LINE OF WALL, FINISH PER PLAN ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST. THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. BOX TWO FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTTED TRIM, FOIC FILL NAIL HOLES W/WOOD FILLER TO MATCH PAINT COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT. JEAN CABINET TO JEAN CAB. TRIM DO NOT SCRIBE END PANEL TO WALL FINISH FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTED TRIM, OFIC PIN NAIL TRIM TO WALL UNIT; FILL NAIL HOLES AS REQ'D SITE INSTALLED POPLAR TRIM, FOIC. CONTINUE TRIM AT INFILL CORNER PANEL WHERE EXIST. WALL UNIT PER PLAN, FOIC LINE OF VERTICAL TRIM BEYOND 11 ML.2 EQ. FINISH WALL PER PLAN 0' -07/8" F 0' - 1 5/8" WALL UNIT TO WALL 3" = 1 0' - 1 5/8" WALL UNIT TO WALL UNIT 3" = 1 3" = 1' -0" 3 =1 3 " = 1' -0" 7 HANGBAR ELEVATION ML.2 3 " = 1 '_ 0 " EQ. EQ. SHELF SECTION PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH FACE OF CABINET BELOW FACE OF BASE BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. CONT. BLK'G AS REQ'D FACE OF CABINET BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. FACE OF BASE BELOW 1" MAXIMUM - GC MAY ADJUST CABINET SPACING TO ACCOMMODATE VARYING NICHE DIMENSIONS SCREW WALL TOGETHER AT TOP OF CABINET PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH DO NOT SCRIBE END PANEL TO WALL FINISH FINISHED END PANEL BY FIXTURE VENDOR PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH FACE OF CABINET BELOW FACE OF BASE BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. FREE STANDING WALL UNIT MELAMINE FINISH, TOP & BOTTOM HANGBAR SHELF SECTION PAINT GRADE TRIM FRONT & BACK WHITE MELAMINE FINISH TOP & BOTTOM PAINT GRADE POPLAR TRIM FRONT @ BACK V MELAMINE FINISH TOP & BOTTOM GALVANIZED STEEL SLEEVE OUT HANGBAR FACEOUT BAR C w w 0 w Q w w w 0 w w C w } 2' -0" cv 0 _:::: 1 /2" = 1 �_��� 1 = 1 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1' -0" 4' -0" ' LINE OF SITE OF SITE INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC ASSEMBLED WALL UNITS BASE UNIT ELEVATION SHELF WITH FACE OUT RAIL FLUTED TRIM CROWN MOULDING PLAIN SHELF NOTE: 1. PROVIDE A TOTAL OF (8) EIGHT STANDARD SHELVES; (6) SIX TO BE INSTALLED, AND (2) TWO TO BE STORED 2. PROVIDE (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES, INSTALLED 3. NOTES (2) TWO AND (3) THREE APPLY TO A TYPICAL CEILING HEIGHT OF 12' - 0 ". MILLWORK VENDOR TO ADJUST AS NECESSARY PER INCREASE OR DECREASE IN CEILING HEIGHT. PAINTED BASE LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, OFCI 1/2" = 1' -0" ML.2 1 /2" = 1' -0" NOTE: 1. EACH CABINET TO INCLUDE (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES, AND (1) ONE COMBO SHELF WITH A STRAIGHT BAR. 2. IN ADDITION TO NOTE 1, MILLWORK TO PROVIDE; a). 20% EXTRA "STANDARD SHELVES" b). (4) FOUR - EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH CURVED BAR c). (6) SIX - EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH STRAIGHT BAR 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1'- 61/2" Co ca y LINE OF SITE INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM BEYOND .... .. ................ . �, ww, JEAN WALL CABINET ELEVATION JEAN WALL CABINET SECTION 1'- 61/2" BASE UNIT SECTION 8 A. SITE INSTALLED PAINTED CROWN MOULDING TYP. TYP. ADJUSTABLE SHELF ON RECESSED STANDARDS W /HANGBAR, (2) PER UNIT SITE - INSTALLED BASE RefiEN eooe. p O W Oi '5011.0 SITE - INSTALLED BASE ASSEMBLED WALL UNIT SECTION L DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 This elHn d p.1:r• I;1 sbi.41.41 :LP t%ir' property " ,1 . 1? i,, il:?ii/ (.O;1su ;'F; g. ; b f 7 /I21i14 i,r, r. / h • j e ir other ;,'s, li/ ;•ii i'! ;?ii :IFe. witlibli/ their ' ii AP ?? r, nom' is /'?vhib f9d and a?iy 1^ia ±F ?,7,71 /,' 3 :i ii? s ,hk.r 1(' r'Aha+i a .IIF.k. JOHN C. ICOM.SIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME DRAWN BY BJS www.littleonline.com EIZILCA PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PRojEcr MANAGER MPW M T Liu —1 co co LLI s J Z �a � � J W 0 Cr) U na (CI Cn CI) PROJECT TEAM REVISIONS NO REASON DATE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEETTITLE• • MILLWORK DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089-01 ISSUE DATE . SHEET NO. \A2 , 132 7 C2) 12 •( B \ \, ' . T 11 Er M L.2 t A h � C , — ML.2 ■ 1111111 T1 MI 7 T 12 11 e ML.2 A ` '1....) ML.2 • 1.... i ;' \ (C; , 14 ML.2 13 ML.2 FILL NAIL HOLES W/ WOOD FILLER TO MATCH COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST. THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. BOX ONE Te C) C7 JEAN CABINET TO WALL 3" = 1' -0" FINISH WALL PER PLAN 0 010 !iI ♦ ♦ ik1 ■1 0' - 1" 0'- 03/4" 3" = 1 ASSEMBLY NOTES: 3" = 1' -0" 3" = 1' -0" END BOX 1. FILL NAIL HOLES W/WOOD FILLER TO MATCH PAINT COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT. 2. ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST, THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. JEAN CABINET END UNIT 0' -1' WALL UNIT HEAD TRIM- FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC BASEBOARD BEYOND WOOD BLOCKING AS 0' - 0 3/4" REQUIRED LINE OF WALL, FINISH PER PLAN ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST. THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. BOX TWO FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTTED TRIM, FOIC FILL NAIL HOLES W/WOOD FILLER TO MATCH PAINT COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT. JEAN CABINET TO JEAN CAB. TRIM DO NOT SCRIBE END PANEL TO WALL FINISH FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTED TRIM, OFIC PIN NAIL TRIM TO WALL UNIT; FILL NAIL HOLES AS REQ'D SITE INSTALLED POPLAR TRIM, FOIC. CONTINUE TRIM AT INFILL CORNER PANEL WHERE EXIST. WALL UNIT PER PLAN, FOIC LINE OF VERTICAL TRIM BEYOND 11 ML.2 EQ. FINISH WALL PER PLAN 0' -07/8" F 0' - 1 5/8" WALL UNIT TO WALL 3" = 1 0' - 1 5/8" WALL UNIT TO WALL UNIT 3" = 1 3" = 1' -0" 3 =1 3 " = 1' -0" 7 HANGBAR ELEVATION ML.2 3 " = 1 '_ 0 " EQ. EQ. SHELF SECTION PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH FACE OF CABINET BELOW FACE OF BASE BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. CONT. BLK'G AS REQ'D FACE OF CABINET BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. FACE OF BASE BELOW 1" MAXIMUM - GC MAY ADJUST CABINET SPACING TO ACCOMMODATE VARYING NICHE DIMENSIONS SCREW WALL TOGETHER AT TOP OF CABINET PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH DO NOT SCRIBE END PANEL TO WALL FINISH FINISHED END PANEL BY FIXTURE VENDOR PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH FACE OF CABINET BELOW FACE OF BASE BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. FREE STANDING WALL UNIT MELAMINE FINISH, TOP & BOTTOM HANGBAR SHELF SECTION PAINT GRADE TRIM FRONT & BACK WHITE MELAMINE FINISH TOP & BOTTOM PAINT GRADE POPLAR TRIM FRONT @ BACK V MELAMINE FINISH TOP & BOTTOM GALVANIZED STEEL SLEEVE OUT HANGBAR FACEOUT BAR C w w 0 w Q w w w 0 w w C w } 2' -0" cv 0 _:::: 1 /2" = 1 �_��� 1 = 1 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1' -0" 4' -0" ' LINE OF SITE OF SITE INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC ASSEMBLED WALL UNITS BASE UNIT ELEVATION SHELF WITH FACE OUT RAIL FLUTED TRIM CROWN MOULDING PLAIN SHELF NOTE: 1. PROVIDE A TOTAL OF (8) EIGHT STANDARD SHELVES; (6) SIX TO BE INSTALLED, AND (2) TWO TO BE STORED 2. PROVIDE (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES, INSTALLED 3. NOTES (2) TWO AND (3) THREE APPLY TO A TYPICAL CEILING HEIGHT OF 12' - 0 ". MILLWORK VENDOR TO ADJUST AS NECESSARY PER INCREASE OR DECREASE IN CEILING HEIGHT. PAINTED BASE LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, OFCI 1/2" = 1' -0" ML.2 1 /2" = 1' -0" NOTE: 1. EACH CABINET TO INCLUDE (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES, AND (1) ONE COMBO SHELF WITH A STRAIGHT BAR. 2. IN ADDITION TO NOTE 1, MILLWORK TO PROVIDE; a). 20% EXTRA "STANDARD SHELVES" b). (4) FOUR - EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH CURVED BAR c). (6) SIX - EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH STRAIGHT BAR 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1'- 61/2" Co ca y LINE OF SITE INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM BEYOND .... .. ................ . �, ww, JEAN WALL CABINET ELEVATION JEAN WALL CABINET SECTION 1'- 61/2" BASE UNIT SECTION 8 A. SITE INSTALLED PAINTED CROWN MOULDING TYP. TYP. ADJUSTABLE SHELF ON RECESSED STANDARDS W /HANGBAR, (2) PER UNIT SITE - INSTALLED BASE RefiEN eooe. p O W Oi '5011.0 SITE - INSTALLED BASE ASSEMBLED WALL UNIT SECTION L DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 This elHn d p.1:r• I;1 sbi.41.41 :LP t%ir' property " ,1 . 1? i,, il:?ii/ (.O;1su ;'F; g. ; b f 7 /I21i14 i,r, r. / h • j e ir other ;,'s, li/ ;•ii i'! ;?ii :IFe. witlibli/ their ' ii AP ?? r, nom' is /'?vhib f9d and a?iy 1^ia ±F ?,7,71 /,' 3 :i ii? s ,hk.r 1(' r'Aha+i a .IIF.k. JOHN C. ICOM.SIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME DRAWN BY BJS www.littleonline.com EIZILCA PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PRojEcr MANAGER MPW M T Liu —1 co co LLI s J Z �a � � J W 0 Cr) U na (CI Cn CI) PROJECT TEAM REVISIONS NO REASON DATE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEETTITLE• • MILLWORK DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089-01 ISSUE DATE . SHEET NO. T 7 12 •( B \ \, ' . T 11 Er M L.2 t A h � C , — ML.2 ■ 14 ML.2 13 ML.2 FILL NAIL HOLES W/ WOOD FILLER TO MATCH COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST. THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. BOX ONE Te C) C7 JEAN CABINET TO WALL 3" = 1' -0" FINISH WALL PER PLAN 0 010 !iI ♦ ♦ ik1 ■1 0' - 1" 0'- 03/4" 3" = 1 ASSEMBLY NOTES: 3" = 1' -0" 3" = 1' -0" END BOX 1. FILL NAIL HOLES W/WOOD FILLER TO MATCH PAINT COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT. 2. ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST, THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. JEAN CABINET END UNIT 0' -1' WALL UNIT HEAD TRIM- FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTED TRIM, FOIC BASEBOARD BEYOND WOOD BLOCKING AS 0' - 0 3/4" REQUIRED LINE OF WALL, FINISH PER PLAN ASSEMBLE SIDES AND BOTTOM FIRST. THEN NAIL BACK ON TO SQUARE UNIT. BOX TWO FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTTED TRIM, FOIC FILL NAIL HOLES W/WOOD FILLER TO MATCH PAINT COLOR. DO NOT REPAINT. JEAN CABINET TO JEAN CAB. TRIM DO NOT SCRIBE END PANEL TO WALL FINISH FILLER PIECE IS PRE - ATTACHED TO EACH BOX PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED FLUTED TRIM, OFIC PIN NAIL TRIM TO WALL UNIT; FILL NAIL HOLES AS REQ'D SITE INSTALLED POPLAR TRIM, FOIC. CONTINUE TRIM AT INFILL CORNER PANEL WHERE EXIST. WALL UNIT PER PLAN, FOIC LINE OF VERTICAL TRIM BEYOND 11 ML.2 EQ. FINISH WALL PER PLAN 0' -07/8" F 0' - 1 5/8" WALL UNIT TO WALL 3" = 1 0' - 1 5/8" WALL UNIT TO WALL UNIT 3" = 1 3" = 1' -0" 3 =1 3 " = 1' -0" 7 HANGBAR ELEVATION ML.2 3 " = 1 '_ 0 " EQ. EQ. SHELF SECTION PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH FACE OF CABINET BELOW FACE OF BASE BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. CONT. BLK'G AS REQ'D FACE OF CABINET BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. FACE OF BASE BELOW 1" MAXIMUM - GC MAY ADJUST CABINET SPACING TO ACCOMMODATE VARYING NICHE DIMENSIONS SCREW WALL TOGETHER AT TOP OF CABINET PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH DO NOT SCRIBE END PANEL TO WALL FINISH FINISHED END PANEL BY FIXTURE VENDOR PIN NAIL AS REQUIRED, FILL WITH WHITE WOOD FILLER TO MATCH (E) FINISH FACE OF CABINET BELOW FACE OF BASE BELOW VERTICAL DOUBLE COVE TRIM, TYP. FREE STANDING WALL UNIT MELAMINE FINISH, TOP & BOTTOM HANGBAR SHELF SECTION PAINT GRADE TRIM FRONT & BACK WHITE MELAMINE FINISH TOP & BOTTOM PAINT GRADE POPLAR TRIM FRONT @ BACK V MELAMINE FINISH TOP & BOTTOM GALVANIZED STEEL SLEEVE OUT HANGBAR FACEOUT BAR C w w 0 w Q w w w 0 w w C w } 2' -0" cv 0 _:::: 1 /2" = 1 �_��� 1 = 1 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1 /2" = 1' -0" 4' -0" ' LINE OF SITE OF SITE INSTALLED TRIM, FOIC ASSEMBLED WALL UNITS BASE UNIT ELEVATION SHELF WITH FACE OUT RAIL FLUTED TRIM CROWN MOULDING PLAIN SHELF NOTE: 1. PROVIDE A TOTAL OF (8) EIGHT STANDARD SHELVES; (6) SIX TO BE INSTALLED, AND (2) TWO TO BE STORED 2. PROVIDE (2) TWO COMBO SHELVES, INSTALLED 3. NOTES (2) TWO AND (3) THREE APPLY TO A TYPICAL CEILING HEIGHT OF 12' - 0 ". MILLWORK VENDOR TO ADJUST AS NECESSARY PER INCREASE OR DECREASE IN CEILING HEIGHT. PAINTED BASE LINE OF SITE - INSTALLED TRIM, OFCI 1/2" = 1' -0" ML.2 1 /2" = 1' -0" NOTE: 1. EACH CABINET TO INCLUDE (3) THREE STANDARD SHELVES, AND (1) ONE COMBO SHELF WITH A STRAIGHT BAR. 2. IN ADDITION TO NOTE 1, MILLWORK TO PROVIDE; a). 20% EXTRA "STANDARD SHELVES" b). (4) FOUR - EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH CURVED BAR c). (6) SIX - EXTRA COMBO SHELVES WITH STRAIGHT BAR 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" 1'- 61/2" Co ca y LINE OF SITE INSTALLED FLUTED TRIM BEYOND .... .. ................ . �, ww, JEAN WALL CABINET ELEVATION JEAN WALL CABINET SECTION 1'- 61/2" BASE UNIT SECTION 8 A. SITE INSTALLED PAINTED CROWN MOULDING TYP. TYP. ADJUSTABLE SHELF ON RECESSED STANDARDS W /HANGBAR, (2) PER UNIT SITE - INSTALLED BASE RefiEN eooe. p O W Oi '5011.0 SITE - INSTALLED BASE ASSEMBLED WALL UNIT SECTION L DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 This elHn d p.1:r• I;1 sbi.41.41 :LP t%ir' property " ,1 . 1? i,, il:?ii/ (.O;1su ;'F; g. ; b f 7 /I21i14 i,r, r. / h • j e ir other ;,'s, li/ ;•ii i'! ;?ii :IFe. witlibli/ their ' ii AP ?? r, nom' is /'?vhib f9d and a?iy 1^ia ±F ?,7,71 /,' 3 :i ii? s ,hk.r 1(' r'Aha+i a .IIF.k. JOHN C. ICOM.SIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME DRAWN BY BJS www.littleonline.com EIZILCA PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PRojEcr MANAGER MPW M T Liu —1 co co LLI s J Z �a � � J W 0 Cr) U na (CI Cn CI) PROJECT TEAM REVISIONS NO REASON DATE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEETTITLE• • MILLWORK DETAILS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089-01 ISSUE DATE . SHEET NO. SECTION 00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", AIA A201 is hereby made a part of these documents as if bound herein. Copies of the AIA A201 can be obtained from Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 00 72 00 SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Lucky Kid Brand Dungarees of America B. The Work consists of the following: 1. The Work includes: Interior upfit of a retail space. C. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 1.3 OWNER- FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated on drawings. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner - furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4. If Owner - furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner- furnished products. Using Owner - furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner- furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. 8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner - furnished items at Project site. 9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner - furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 10. If Owner- furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner- furnished items into the Work. 1.4 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have designated use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, tenants, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Occupancy: Tenants will occupy site and adjacent building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize Work so as not interfere wi h operations. Maintain i i xi conflicts and facilitate Owner and tenant usage. Perform the W a of to t day-to-day day ex st ng a exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, facilities corridors, or other occupied or used acil ties without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50 division format and CSI /CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 10 00 SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Owner or Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.2 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner- Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. B. Contractor - Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish an activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting times, ty p a q g an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On approval of a Proposal Request, Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures on AIA Document G701. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 26 00 SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Owner at earliest possible date but no later than five days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 1.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Owner indicated in Agreement. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Submit two signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Owner by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of preconstruction conference. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 29 00 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Owner will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 5 days for review of each resubmittal. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Owner will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document 6810. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Reviewed or Approved as Noted." H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Owner will return one copy. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Submit two sets, Owner will retain one, retain one as Project Record Sample. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. a. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples. 2. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application n i i in Division 1 i n "Payment Pr f r Payment: with requirements specified f ed 0 Sect o Procedures." o a me t Comply ith re u Y P Y q p 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not return copies. B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 OWNER'S ACTION A. General: Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Owner will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Owner will stamp each submittal with an action stamp. C. Informational Submittals: Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved ": When used to convey Owner's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Owner's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Owner. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within theconstruction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install ": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working todimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 42 00 SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charge; unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges; unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; ortabI e g g, g g pp p minimum 2 -3/8 -inch- OD line posts and 2 -7/8 -inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1 -5/8 -inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. B, Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular -type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self - contained, liquid - propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline- burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilitiesto condition existing before initial use. 1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elementsbeing installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner; unless otherwise indicated. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and tra conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: machine and Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile ac hin e a d compu ter in each field office. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two -way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic all in field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within CO 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 1���l�' 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after S bs antlah omple tion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire- fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's or Landlord's existing parking areas for construction personnel. D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Pest Control: Engage pest - control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. I. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to- ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire - retardant plywood on construction operations side. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire - protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities topermanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 50 00 1) CODE COMPUOICE. APPRO R 2. 7,0 11a D s DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING • 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 Tbis cirri itv![Te'.5' %[i ?' 1 :7 S%:ron!!i'r tI :, v •i :irvet?i ei,.l biterlierar' t:.C;a.;:,!fT {. be !'p/' ::idi4T;,m. r,; ii P'•i)!'t,Ttt!, f /ti;ii iifi! ;iv E:' tC'ea' il:'ii; » (r ii!rct ii / i;•t ;hai;'d G ;,,• ,m %Mr' * iie ii will he :ie ' ii° if' a CLIENT NAME MPW BJS www.Iittleonline.coln ail _ itE.te 2007 JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON DRAWN BY O DUNGUfEES Arkl ER1€ . TOO TOUGH TO DM PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER RECEI'r CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER , 625- 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 SP.1 SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. I. Research /evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. g. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. h. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. i. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. j. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitutionto produce indicated results. 3. Owner's Action: If necessary, Owner will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 5 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Owner will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Owner cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project- specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Owner's. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 1. Request do not impact the standard finishes for design intent. 2. Products indicated are no longer available. 3. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Owner andArchitect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 4. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 5. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 6. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. B. Timing: Owner will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 60 00 SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility, landlord, and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Owner and Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Owner promptly. B. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed b g g g g , p g by Owner. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 5 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or r that will not damage exposed property and surfaces. g p E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory- authorized service representative is required to inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation. 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01 73 00 SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: List services /systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services /systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services /systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or load - deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in -place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in -place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Areas: Avoid interference w' h f inin r r i assa a to adjoining Adjoining reas. A o d It use of adjoining areas or interruption of free 1 9 p passage 1 9 areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign m r r cutting. remaining portion of pipe or conduit p t matter atte c tt . g construction operations requiring cutting are complete. Proceed with patching after cons p q g g lete. p C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate v' of patching and refinishing. e Idenceo putt ga d n repair space. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, her , p atch and p air floor and wall surfaces in the new p ace. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. an in lace ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang g Pa , 9 P 9 rY P Pp earance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01 73 29 SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the work is not 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security pro 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Owner, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.2 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Owner's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest - control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notifyContractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.3 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. ZE1.4 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste - removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 complete. DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING: 5815 Westpark Drive NC 28217 17'tr d;: len.d t.e des. 7 sh' w? ;;lY tbe 'Mpetf :: of j4„ 1 ,recl 1 • - 1 1 _Cii53:i'. %f.' r !P' , l «<,,on . . >t�l %!% h `.k'T use oithii h without prohibited �P Nei :rr r '� %.h � A,.,:•:i: :bell. .,. •c.P�: fr ,.P... . f .LIJ,. l,. s a,., (t.. will he Ju/;,', I? ""'gal JOHN C. KO' !SIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CIIARC E Josh Cool PROJE(; I• tvLANA(:HR MPW BJS www.littleonline.com DRAWN BY Lithle 2007 K .44_ o a nu 1 RtES A11ERa €A TOO n1JGH T REVISIONS NO REASON DATE RECEi :• CITY OF TUPW A MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE • - • SHEET NO. SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner and tentants will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so operations will not be disrupted. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. D. Sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. E. Coordinate reuse and storage of removed materials with Owner's Representative and landlord. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire - protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services /Systems: Maintain services /systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service /System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services andmechanicaVelectrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services /systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services /systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame- cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire - suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA- approved landfill. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 SECTION 03 30 53 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." C. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I /II. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. B. Normal- Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water - soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High - Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High - Range, Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Multi -ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. B. Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self - expanding cork. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. when dry. B. Moisture- Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal- Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape. 2. Thickness: Minimum of 15 mils. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. R it m n r l vapor retarder f r I 1. p p Repair damage and esea apo before e p acing concrete. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one - fourth of concrete thickness. C. Isolation Joints: Install joint - filler strips at junctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth - Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form - facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid - applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid - applied or direct -to- deck - applied membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following, methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture- Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 3.10 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 03 30 53 SECTION 03 49 00 - GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include GFRC design mixes. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer who participates in PCI's Plant Certification Program and is designated a PCI- Certified Plant for Group G - Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete. B. Source Limitations: Obtain GFRC panels through one source from a single manufacturer. C. PCI Manuals: Comply with PCI MNL 128, "Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels" and PCI MNL 130, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Products." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GFRC MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III, white to achieve sample finish color. 1. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N. B. Glass Fibers: Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16 percent, 1 to 2 inches long, and complying with PCI MNL 130. C. Sand: Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements of ASTM C 144; passing No. 20 sieve with a maximum of 2 percent passing No. 100 sieve. D. Facing Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation, and PCI MNL 130, 1/4 -inch maximum size. E. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water - reducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant. F. Water: Potable; complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 130. G. Polymer- Curing Admixture: Acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion complying with PCI MNL 130. H. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. I. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M. 2.2 ANCHORS, CONNECTORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Carbon -Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Carbon -Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, AISI Grade 1018. C. Bolts: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325. 2.3 GFRC MIXES A. Backing Mix: Proportion backing mix of portland cement, glass fibers, sand, and admixtures to comply with design requirements. Provide nominal glass -fiber content of not less than 5 percent by weight of total mix. B. Face Mix: Proportion face mix of portland cement, sand, facing aggregates, and admixtures to comply with design requirements. 2.4 PANEL FRAME FABRICATION A. Fabricate panel frames and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with components securely fastened, according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section. 1. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Fasten framing members of hollow structural sections, steel channels, or steel angles by welding. Comply with AWS D1.1 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 3. Weld flex, gravity, and seismic anchors to panel frames. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies, if necessary, to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies in a manner that prevents damage or significant distortion. 2.5 GFRC FABRICATION A. Proportioning and Mixing: For backing mix, meter sand/cement slurry and glass fibers to spray head at rates to achieve design mix proportions and glass -fiber content according to PCI MNL 130 procedures. B. Spray Application: Comply with general procedures as follows: 1. Spray mist coat over molds to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch on planar surfaces. 2. Proceed with spraying backing mix before face mix has set, using procedures that produce a uniform thickness and even distribution of glass fibers and matrix. 3. Consolidate backing mix by rolling or other technique to achieve complete encapsulation of glass fibers and compaction. 4. Measure thickness with a pin gage or other acceptable method at least once for each 5 sq. ft. of panel surface. Take not less than six measurements per panel. C. Hand form and consolidate intricate details, incorporate formers or infill materials, and over spray before material reaches initial set to ensure complete bonding. D. Attach panel frame to GFRC before initial set of GFRC backing, maintaining a minimum clearance of 1/2 inch from GFRC backing, and without anchors protruding into GFRC backing. E. Build up homogeneous GFRC bonding pads over anchor feet, maintaining a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch over tops of anchor feet, before initial set of GFRC backing. F. Inserts and Embedments: Build up homogeneous GFRC bosses or bonding pads over inserts and embedments to provide sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. G. Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC panels so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 130 for dimension, position, and tolerances. H. GFRC Finish: As indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC panels to supporting members and backup materials. B. Lift GFRC panels and install without damage. Install temporary supports and bracing required maintain position, stability, and alignment nstal GFRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide p ry pp a a gas qu d to stab ty, a d al gnment of panels until permanent connections are completed. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width. 2. Remove projecting hoisting devices. D. Connect GFRC panels in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after connecting is completed. E. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 requirements for welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Erect GFRC panels to comply with noncumulative tolerances of PCI MNL 130. 3.2 REPAIRS A. Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy of GFRC panel and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Architect. B. Remove and replace damaged GFRC panels when repairs do not comply with requirements. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to GFRC manufacturer's written instructions. Clean soiled GFRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Prevent damage to GFRC surfaces and staining of adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 03 49 00 Do oti DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 .: www.Iittleon Iine.corn n(.( fl.edeignthorinCift .•'Y %;Di.& I ='vjn ?) m: 4 jiff/ , 1 thite era/ 1"'this..i'73;1i, Tbe " Pgiiketion, rotre 'rig or other use of r„'ii L! n;i ".77(' :3P ;;'+.','.i/ their ron.tr ??t 71 pmhibeted and any r '.af'P77i. .' sai7Pit :P a/ anion PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW BJS DRAWN BY LII:E.te 2007 CLIENT NAME .... JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON PROJECT NAME M T co LU 03 a co Z c c I w MI M W V) � a ci W (N 0 PROJECT TEAM RE" ;: ?? CITY OF TU WILA MAR 0 7 Z008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THIN BRICK 1. General: Provide shapes by manufacturer indicated 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. D. Water: Potable. 2.3 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard - strength cleaner designed for removing mortar /grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer ofmasonry units being cleaned. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full -size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor - driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unshipped edges. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Install thin brick system in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instruction. C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 3.2 CLEANING A. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Templates: For anchors and bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 4. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold- formed steel tubing. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, 1 inch outside diameter, galvanized plumber pipestandard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 6. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20, high - zinc -dust- content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value ofjoined pieces. 1. rill and punch metals cleanly Cut d a u c eta s c ea and accurately. burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. y y g rp g a eas o e posed su aces 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes,plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. C. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners anduse concealed field splices where possible. Pr vi f p Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not left exposed joints y g t at a e of to be eft as a posed to nts but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. B. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM 7 END OF SECTION 05 50 00 pa ga a g t co p y t S A 780. SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. r Data: For P oduct ata. o each type of process and factory fabricated product. 1. Include data for wood preservative and fire retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, 545, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD - PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 2.3 FIRE - RETARDANT- TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type where indicated. B. Identify fire - retardant- treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Non - Load - Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. C. Other Framing: No. 2 grade and the following species: 1. Douglas fir - larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 WOOD PANELS A. Fire - retardant, Economy grade, Rotary cut, White birch panels. 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Trim to match wood panels. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction including blocking, nailers, and furrings. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire- retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch nominal thickness. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure - preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. Fasteners to be compatible with pressure - preservative treatment chemical. B. Wood Panel Fasteners: Star drive trim head galvanized screws. 1. Product: McFeeley; .0722 -TF6 -7 x 2 1/4 inch. 2. Fasten 16 inches o.c. with a minimum of 1/4 inch recess. C. Power- Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272. D. Screws for Fastening to Cold- Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF &PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber. E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron - treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass -fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination,or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire - resistance characteristic specified for each product in Part 2. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire - test - response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface - burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.2 SLAG - WOOL - FIBER/ROCK- WOOL -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced, Slag -Wool- Fiber /Rock -Wool -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. B. Faced, Slag -Wool- Fiber /Rock -Wool -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane -faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category 1(membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil- scrim - kraft, foil- scrim, or foil- scrim - polyethylene vapor- retarder membrane on (1)face. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturers standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicatedunless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Install 1-1/2-inch-thick, unfaced glass -fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings so that insulation extends over entire ceiling. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 SECTION 07 81 00 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product in dicated. t ata o eac type of oduct tYP p B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of applied fireproofing material f r h n r i n exte t o ed o eac co st uct o and fire resistance rating, a applicable design P g app pP 9 designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and minimum thicknesses. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by SFRM manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. C. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." pY " D. Delete first ara ra h and subparagraphs below if no re required. If retaining, in i I i size, g p not q indicate location, s e, and 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced -air circulation until fire - resistive material dries thoroughly. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire - response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SFRM A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: a. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK -6 /HY. b. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300. 2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE - RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire- resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire - resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire - resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire - test - response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire - Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire - resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fire - resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire - resistive material. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Conduct tests according to fire - resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. C. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire - resistive materials during application. D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire - resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. E. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM. F. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire - resistive material where required to achieve fire - resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated. G. Extend fire - resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire - resistive covering in a single course. H. Spray apply fireproofing materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. I. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire - resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article. J. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. K. Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidenceof soiling. L. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. END OF SECTION 07 81 10 SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For the following constructions, provide penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire - resistance -rated nonloadbearing walls, including partitions, with fireprotectionrated openings. B. FRated Systems: Provide penetration firestop systems with FRatings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fireresistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. TRated Systems: For the following conditions, provide penetration firestop systems with TRatings indicated, as well as FRatings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located in construction containing fireprotectionrated openings. 3. Penetrating items larger than 4inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall crosssectional area. D. For penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing provide moistureresistant penetration firestop systems. 2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. E. For penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flamespread ratings of less than 25 and smokedeveloped ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestop system manufacturer's C. Qualification Data: If requested by Architect, for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who specializes in the installation of firestop and has completed penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful inservice performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. C. FireTestResponse Characteristics: Provide penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and followup inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. enetration firestop system products bear classification m rkin f li i t d ea a of qualified ed testin and inspecting agency. P P Y p 9 q testing p g . g Y b. penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. DAP Inc. 2. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Isolatek International. 4. Specified Technologies Inc. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated b penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming /damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag /rockwoolfiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming /damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Firerated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. n r l: Provide fir m n inin h Ge e a a de esto s ste s co to t e types of fill materials indicated in the Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part firestop systems 9 h'p p Y rt 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. B. Latex Sealants: Singlecomponent latex formulations that after cure do not reemulsify during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factoryassembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminumfoilfaced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. E. Intumescent P nh nin dielectric, w r i utties� No Nonhardening ate res stint putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. p g 9 ounds. p F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Singlecomponent intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Pillows /Bags: Reusable, heatexpanding pillows/bags consisting of glassfiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineralfiber, waterinsoluble expansion agents and fireretardant additives. H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, siliconebased liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. I. Silicone Sealants: Moisturecuring, singlecomponent, siliconebased, neutralcuring elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (selfleveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. :cm o1f REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE e APPROV MR2,1 l a Oty Of "NOM PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming /damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce crosssectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestop systems with pressuresensitive, selfadhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "WarningPenetration Firestop SystemDo Not Disturb. Notify Building Owner of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in whichopenings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage ordeterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestop systems immediately and installnew materials to produce penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 f +f.( 11 rrwin,q £ / 7' tL:r .ksv..1 sk' n an property „r I :fin �:.�. rrF,. ,r-i I., - -�..,. drirq..ui { - 1.....t2a1,.u; ..L'::SY...Hti. The kiaae eur, , .!. weri,f or bflifT liSd +/ +i iY;il;J'i1;1' ' �: ,.. ;; to u.:, �;:; 1..,. t:,•: �t; erl,o,,e,.'r. ara !.'f. &leer in fP.hui . ^,((l,• ?::. CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME . MPW DRAWN BY BJS www.IIttleonline.com 746 JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON E nu NtAREEs AAI' .ER1€ 1'p TpS1CH Tq Ili$ PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER LitE.l: 2007 rO to to J co w J 00 0 < N a CO LLI J I. CO Z cr) aw a cc w 1- w Z to U Q N IA = N 0 PROJECT TEAM REVISIONS NO REASON DATE RECE', 'F'D CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 0 7 Z006 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROTECT NUMRER 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1,2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. B. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within two years of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: To match adjacent substrates, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid - applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -200. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL 2 c. Tremco; Vulkem 245. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Single- Component Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; 864. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal. c. Tremco; Spectrum 3. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5, Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 6. Stain - Test - Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. D. Single- Component Mildew- Resistant Neutral- Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation: 898. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniplus. c. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5, Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type 0 P, Grade NF. B. Products: 1. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 +. 2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 3. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT - SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 SECTION 0811 13 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3, Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Kewanee Corporation (The). 5. Mesker Door Inc. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll -Rand company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral- board, or vertical steel- stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire - protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: R -value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single- Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic- coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI /SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold - rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI /SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI /SDI P250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI /SDI A250.6. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic- coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold - rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI /SDI A250.6. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap- and - stirrup or T- shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip -on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8 -inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 -inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors againstwater penetration. wee -hole openings sin bottom o exte o d non. p p g al P 9 9 P C. Hollow Metal Frames: are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal s. Where frames a e ab toted s c , p g p g J ame thick ess eta as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1 Three anchors er jamb high. from 60 to 90 inches P 1 b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 0. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. P YP jamb. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 4. Door Silencers: Except on weather - stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single -Door Frames: Three door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI /SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface - mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI /SDI A250.6 and ANSI /DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with electrical. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer or finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating. Shop Primer: ANSI /SDI A250.10. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI /SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire - protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb that extends to floor, and secure with post installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3, Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In -Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7, Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non- Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust - inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 0811 13 SECTION 0814 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: For each species and finish required. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." B. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Comply with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspection agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing according to NFPA 252. C. Fire Rated Glazing: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Assemble exterior doors, including components, with wet -use adhesives. B. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea - formaldehyde resins. 2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Construction, General: 1. Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Premium. 2. Grade of Doors for Opaque Finish: Custom. 3, Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: As indicated. B. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. 2. Flat -Panel Construction: Veneered, wood -based panel product. C. Door Construction for Opaque Finish: 1, Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or edge - glued, finger - jointed lumber. 2. Flat -Panel Construction: Veneered, wood -based panel product. 2.3 FIRE RATED GLAZING A. Provide Fireglass 20 by Technical Glass Products with sandblast finish in size indicated on Door Schedule. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame - opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. D. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing." 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Finish wood doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish wood doors indicated to receive opaque finish. B. Grade: Custom. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to AWI System TR -4 conversion varnish. D. Staining: Match Architect's sample. E. Effect: Open -grain finish. F. Sheen: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard, and as indicated. B. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non - fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. END OF SECTION 08 1433 SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold - rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Factory- Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer. D. Drywall Beads: 0.0299 -inch zinc - coated steel sheet to receive joint compound. E. Manufacturer's standard finish. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060 -inch- thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- thick sheet metal with 1 -1/4 -inch- wide, surface- mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Spring - loaded, concealed -pin type. 5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release. 6. Lock: Cylinder. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08 31 13 L I T T L E ' .. DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL, _CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com da; r«ar;'!,ry;rt- . dvesbrran an' ,::e e%`J J /, l;rrer: i; i:'el . I r itee CoN!uh'fng. ; !'+e !r Jduerion, r ./;'7, g o r Ott ;se +)/ :i'ri !iron" rri: ioit`J•".r.'i t.Wr ;i tttf?7 ri%r ent is prohibited :mil aJ:; ", r716_f eSi7eii.' will 7i? „ 3! f 5, c legal „ ti, 8746 JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME BJS ,JI:¢te 2007 :: :s: : 4 nU ARt ES AmEllzi €A 7E- e DRAWN BY PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER MPW PROJECT NAME M LU T 0 4X OD a CC 00 J H 00 Z • W • U c c I W M Z0 r w O II a U) PROJECT TEAM RECSO .w CITY OF TUMiAALA MAR 0 7 2008 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER - 625- 4089 -01 SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum- framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units to function properly. B. Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. C. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have condensation - resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for aluminum - framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum- framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Structural failures including, not limited to, excessive deflecti on. a. Str u ailu es but of excess 9, , b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Failure of operating components to function properly. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Basis of design for the storefront system is YKK YES 20, subject to compliance with requirements provide the namedproduct or a comparable product by an available manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/8 308M. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant primer. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M. 3. Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high - strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self - locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or ste complying ATM A 123/A 2 M or ASTM A 153M requirements. nd a ry s. of p g ed ca # steel inserts with S 23/A 1 3 M A 153/ E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 2.5 DOORS A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation. 1 Door Construction: 1 -3/4 -inch overall thickness, minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum t n it . M h n corners uctro t , wrth ubular rail a d st a members Mechanically faste co Hers with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: As indicated. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap -on, extruded- aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. B. Door " or Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardw are. o are s sp in s trop oo 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum- framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt- mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION Form aluminum before o Hum sha e finishin . a shapes finishing. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single -door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. E. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. F. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory- installed hardware before applying finishes. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I. 1. Color: As indicated on Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Field - Installed Hardware: Install surface- mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum- framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch. END OF SECTION 08 41 13 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire -rated applications. C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface - applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI 115 -W Series. s. Co I A PY C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. END OF SECTION 08 71 00 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: 12 -inch square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality -Q3; of class indicated. 1. Ultra -Clear (Low -Iron) Float Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87. a. Products: 1) AFG Industries Inc.; Krystal Klear. 2) Pilkington Building Products North America; Optiwhite. 3) PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 104 ; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition as 8, yp ( pa g ), ty Q n indicated. o 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. C. Ceramic- Coated Vision Glass: Float glass with ceramic enamel applied by silk- screened process and complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated glass), I (transparent I glass), Quality-Q3, Specification 95-1-31 in NA Tempering "En i Standards Manual," and other requirements specified. Type ( p ent f at g as ), Q allty Q3, Spe atron No 9 n GA p ng g neering Sta s Manua , a her requ e pecrf ed . D. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned); and of quality, finish, and pattern specified. E. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II (patterned flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned); and of quality, finish, and pattern specified. F. Insulated -Glass Units, General: ASTM E 774 provide clear, Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lite. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating - glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant- substrate testing. 4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. B. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 - D00- - ott SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with GANA's "Glazing Manual" and GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors" unless more stringent requirements are indicated B. Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated in second subparagraph below. 1. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. Tempered Clear Glass Mirrors: Comply with ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements In annealed float glass before silver coating is applied, for coating requirements, and with other requirements not affected by tempering process; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied. 1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glassedges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead- shield expansion -bolt devices for drilled - in -place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION Mirror Sizes: To it Project and f r em erin mirrors to final sizes and shapes. A. zes. o su ct be o e t cut al s es a J tempering, p B. utouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts they Fab sate s be o e p g fo o holes hout a g le su tea s so y fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: As indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. For wall- mounted mirrors, install mirror hardware as indicated. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. D. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. END OF SECTION 08 83 00 SECTION 09 2216 - NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblyindicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspection agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS Ti Wire: ASTM A 641/A 6 Class 1 zinc coating, temper, 25 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. Tie AS 41 M, C as coat g, per, 0 06 ramete oub e st 75 er . e B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels: Cold- rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide drawings. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold - Rolled Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. Minimum base metal thickness and depth as indicated on drawings. 3. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. Minimum base metal thickness as indicatedon drawings. F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross - furring members tha t 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640 -C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Metal base thickness and depth as indicated on drawings. Ilp Type Joints: Where B. S Head Joi : indicated, provide the following: ated, p o 1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. D. Cold - Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. Depth as indicated on drawings. Clip Angle not less than 1 1/2" by 1 1/2 ", 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. Minimum Base Metal Thickness and depth as indicated on Drawings. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Cold - Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare -steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 2. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- diameter wire. H. Z- Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 in,:h, minimum bare -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. an Dep5h EI • ..cate,,d q�, CODE C i� PPROVE I�I terlock A Cif! Of Tug PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying,or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locationsof hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. ZE3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead suoports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Fire - Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire - resistance -rated assembly indicatedand support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire- resistance -rated assembly indicated. 4. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. D. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Z- Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Building Insulation ") vertically and hold in place with Z- furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09 2216 MPW 8748 PRINCIPAL iN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER Lir:Ele 2007 DRAWN BY BJS REVISIONS NO REASON 12/21/07 MAR 0 7 2008 DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive' • Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com 17,i, (5 igpin,,' s%'le ii alr t! e' T <i$fi"I� r✓ f F"',i')elf4'fie?Fi, (., /:;7r, e ;r ;i'/ kve ;Jae/J.:'v :: ✓ ✓r'T " ,y'i(ien (orient IF /Vrbibii;'ti ani7 any intringe'Tirer;t win' Jiv mJ; e ' to legal ;+riion. JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CITY OF TUXWILA CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME Ft J CO W J CO Q cn CC CD J W C CO O J Z a a av CC W W W CO C.) _ " 0 PROJECT TEAM PERMIT CENTER DATE emorammimmimm SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. SP.6 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire- Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire - resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G -P Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. B. Type X: Thickness: 5/8 inch, tapered edge. C. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch, tapered edge. 2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum- coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting - typetaping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all - purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying -type, all- purpose compound or high -build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's writtenrecommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flexible Type: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. Primer application to surfaces are specified in 09 Sections. rimer and its pp spec ed other Division . s 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, orirregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Paver tile. 2. Metal edge strips installed installations. st s sta ed as part of tile t g p p PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturer indicated. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. B. Polymer- Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile- setting materials. C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, white zinc alloy, exposed -edge material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile- setting materials. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. H. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. I. Install tile on floors with 1/4 grout joint. J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA F113. 1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Polymer- modified unsanded grout. END OF SECTION 09 30 00 SECTION 09 51 23 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical tile ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items. Show size and location of initial access modules. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: 1. Fire - Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface- Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. a. Smoke- Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwiseindicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc - coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung ") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- diameter wire. E. Seismic struts and seismic clips. F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that usedfor exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the finish schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less- than - half -width tiles at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire - resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile- to -tile joints are closed by double lap of material. END OF SECTION 09 51 23 SECTION 09 51 33 METAL PAN CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes clip -in metal pans and suspension system for ceiling. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface- Burning Characteristics: Complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CEILING PANS A. Metal Pan Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal pans of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Sheet Metal Characteristics: For metal components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roughness, stains, or discolorations. 2.2 METAL PAN CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturer indicated on drawings. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, with applicable ATM requirements. and finishes indicated that comply S C 635 equ B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc - coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641 /A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Yield stress of wire to exceed 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.106 -inch- diameter wire. C. Seismic Stabilizer Bars, Seismic Struts, and Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard. D. standard secure acoustical metal in at Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer's sta da d hold hold-down clips spaced to sec to pan s place to molding and trim perimeter. p E. Exposed Edge Moldings and Trim: As required comply with seismic requirements of authorities having conceal ed es of and posed Metal Edg g equ ed to co p y th se s q g to g penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of pans and runners, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching acoustical metal pan ceiling units, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FINISHES A. Finish: As indicated by manufacturer's designation on Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of each suspended decorative grid and where necessary to conceal edges of grids. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Cut metal pan units for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by other work through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling or variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher - leveled metal sheet. F. Install metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. END OF SECTION 09 51 33 SECTION 09 64 00 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days afte wood flooring installation. 1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity plannedFor building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. 2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Lucky Brand Jeans has a National Account Agreement with Wood Flooring Distributors to provide wood flooring indicated. 1. Contact Name: Jim Gourley Jr. 2. Company: Praire Shores LTD & Bonedry 3. Contact Address: 8989 Lakeshore Drive, Pleaseant Prairie, WI 53158 4. Phone: 262 - 694 -9748 5. Fax: 262 -694 -9437 6. Email: jgourleyjr @wi.rr.com. 2.2 FIELD - FINISHED WOOD FLOORING A. Solid -Wood, Strip Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and groove and end matched, and with backs channeled (kerfed) for stress relief. 1. Product: Owens; Item No. PF5W03P. 2. Species and Grade: Select white oak; premium grade. 3. Thickness and Face Width: 5/8 inch thick by 3 inches wide. 4. Lengths: Random lengths. 5. Edge: Square edge. B. Urethane Finish System: Complete water -based system of compatible components that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated. 1. VOC Content: When calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), as follows: a. Finish Coats and Floor Sealers: Not more than 350 g /L. b. Stains: Not more than 250 g /L. 2. Finish Coats: Formulated for multicoat application on wood flooring. 3. Floor Sealer: Pliable, penetrating type. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet not less than 8.0 mils thick. B. Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application. 1. Provide products by one of the following manufacturers: a. Franklin. b. Bostic Best. c. Sika. C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex - modified, hydraulic- cement -based formulation. 1. Product: Ardex; K15. D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." E. Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. For adhesively applied wood flooring, verify that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Substrate Moisture Testing, General: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer or, if none, comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Concrete Substrates: 1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test per ASTM F 1869, as follows: a. Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. and perform not less than 2 tests in each installation area with test areas evenly spaced in installatior area. substrates have maximum m i r of 3 lb of water /1000 sq. f. in 24 hours. b. Proceed with installation only after sub a o stu a vapor emission rate q t ou s . 2. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8 -inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10 -foot straight edge. a. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 3. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, Proceed with installation nl f r n i or dust. Prac t only after unsatisfactory sfactory conditio ns have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION with flooring manufacturer's wri n installation i ions but not less than applicable recommendations A. Comply w g tte nstructi app in NW FA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B. Wood Sleepers and Subfloor: Install according to requirements in Division 06. C. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 3/4 inch. D. Solid -Wood, Strip Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate. 1. Install countersunk screws at each end of each piece in addition to blind nailing. Cover screw heads with wood plugs glued flush with flooring. fewer h n 2 countersunk piece, spaced not more than i inches each piece, in addition to blind nailing. 2. Install no than cou to sunk nails at each end of each p p of o e t an 6 nches along length of p . a g Fill holes with matching wood filler. E. Wood Trim: Nail baseboard to wall and nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not nail to flooring. 3.3 FIELD FINISHING A. Machine -sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding- machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. ations in NWFA's "Installation i rin 1. Comply with applicable recommendations Guidelines: Wood Flooring." g B. Apply floor- finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and three finish coats. 1. Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples. 2. For water -based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize grain raise. C. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film th might cause condensation. END OF SECTION 09 64 00 DotooiN . DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING I' 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte;. NC.28217 it www.littleonline.com 'f ['i.F dralring a:it'the i au'Sift3 _bmv,n am If,'properly versified /117eg ,, - other use f/''/) iYT::;PIJr'i. ;J''?;:) :i;i eir ;i'ritlen rony?flt 21 probitizted mid a?:; mfriv,',' me,,f will be j3!i':;.°i: to legal artion. JOHN C. Ka !SIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME Josh Cool MPW PRoJECr NLANAGER DRAWN BY BJS 12/21/07 i Litt lie 2007 nuNTREEs A ERICA Ta ToucH r o 1" PROJECT NAME I I PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE M tri T W J Co 0aN aE ♦a CC CO � UJ J CO J Z d) • W< cc I W 1- W = Z 0 W V) Q • N W 1-- U) 0 PROJECT TEAM CITY OF MAR 07 6168 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089-01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. . SP.7 SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1.48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3.48 hours after installation. B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturer indicated. B. Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered). D. Style: Cove (with top -set toe). E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. F. Height: As indicated. G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Corners: Job formed or premolded. I. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. B. Material: Rubber. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water - resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g /L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g /L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture - vapor- emission rate of 3 lb of water /1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job - Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil immediately after completing resilient product installation: B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 6513 SECTION 09 65 16 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in heat - weldingtechniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and 48 hours post installation. C. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 5 linear feet for every 150 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width foreach color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Finish Schedule. B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, Portland cement based or blended hydrauliccement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water - resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Heat - Welding Bead: Solid- strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor covering. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture- vapor - emission rate of 3 lb of water /1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built - infurniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completedinstallation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. E. Heat - Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fusesections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoiningfloor covering surfaces. F. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces, sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly,and Damp -mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil immediately after completing floor covering installation. G. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations andplacement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 6516 SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and 48 hours post installation. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066, subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water - resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions ind C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of minimize running joints. the Finish Schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Finish Schedule. 2.2 WALL- COVERING PRODUCTS I of wall covering from the same run number or dye General: Provide rolls of each type o a co e l g o t e sa e lot. y 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew- resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer /Sealer: Mildew- resistant primer /sealer complying with requirements in Division 09 Section " Painting (Professional Line Products)" and recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall- covering manufacturer. 3. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. C. Acclimatize wall- covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Cut wall - covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. B. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. C. Install reversing every other strip. D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. E. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or END OF SECTION 09 72 00 based formulation provided or approved icated. tiles, and in maximum available lengths to PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture - vapor- emission rate of 3 lb of water /1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. B. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built -in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. C. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. D. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. E. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methodsrecommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 6519 SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire - test - response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface- Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame - Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke - Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rolls of Wall- Covering Material: Full -size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. a change of pattern or spacing between strips. SECTION 09 91 20 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). B. Samples: Provide 12 by 12 inch samples of each paint color and finish. Paint sample to be applied on same type of substrate as indicated. C. Qualification Data: For Applicator, if requested by Architect. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and labeled. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. ICI Paints (ICI Paints). 2. Porter Paints (Porter). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 4. Sherwin - Williams Co. (Sherwin- Williams). 5. Flame Control Coatings, Inc. (Flame Control Coatings) 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best - quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint - material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations and on Finish Drawings. 2.3 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1. ICI Paints; 1000 Prep & Prime Hi -Hide Wall Interior Water -Based Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Porter; 867 ProMaster 2000 PVA Drywall Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 4. Sherwin - Williams; PrepRite High Build Interior Latex Primer /Surfacer B28W601 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. B. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic - Enamel and Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finishes: Factory- formulated acrylic -latex -based interior wood primer. 1. ICI Paints; 3210 Prep & Prime Gripper Multi- Purpose Interior /Exterior Water -Based Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 2. Porter; 1129 Blanket Acrylic Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 4. Sherwin- Williams; PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer B49W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. C. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory- formulated quick -drying rust - inhibitive acrylic -based metal primer. 1. ICI Paints; 4160 Devguard Multi- Purpose Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils. 2. Porter; 215 porter Guard DTM White Acrylic Metal Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -712 Pitt-Tech Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Sherwin - Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B66W1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. D. Interior Zinc - Coated Metal Primer: Factory- formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. ICI Paints; 4160 Devguard Multi- Purpose Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Porter; 215 Porter Guard DTM White Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -712 Pitt -Tech Water Borne Acrylic DTM Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 4. Sherwin - Williams; B66W1 Direct to Metal (DTM) Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Low - Luster Acrylic Enamel for Gypsum Board: Factory- formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. ICI Paints; 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Porter; 6129 ProMaster 2000 Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils. 4. Sherwin- Williams; ProMar 400 Interior Latex Egg -Shell Enamel B20 -4400 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel for Gypsum Board, Wood, Hardboard, Ferrous and Zinc- Coated Metal: Factory- formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application. 1. ICI Paints; 1406 Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2. Porter; 6139 Promaster 2000 Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of less than 1.5 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 4. Sherwin- Williams; ProMar 400 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel B31 -4400 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. C. Interior Intumescent Overcoat for Wood: 1. Intumescent Overcoat: Intumescent low -gloss latex coating applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. a) Flame Control Coatings, Inc.: Flame Control No. 40 -40, low - gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION present, f r m wi requirements for aint a Iication.Com I w/ procedures specified i D A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator o compliance pace th paint pp p y p n A P4. PDCA 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify p applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn - through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint - spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provide othe to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low - Luster Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low - luster acrylic enamel. 2. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. B. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic - enamel and semigloss alkyd - enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. c. Intumescent Overcoat: Intumescent low -gloss latex coating C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. D. Zinc- Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc - coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc - coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. E. Gypsum Board to Receive Wallcovering: 1. Primer: Two coats of Latex Wall Size. --END-OF-SECTION-09-9-1-20 Comply with procedures specified i - ti- P1 C 311 140 42*-- ® �' D DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL. CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC 28217 www.littleonline.com e L sI s1u137fl a:1. ^. i. des 4i0 S%•bivi3 «n tt ' i be t:+ / t'k 1 i1Per lrth vita a i fq' #se ' j tf i ii ; ? :;; lit; withoUi tf Ji' ;i itten ri nont fs prohibited :mei any "ftit 'iFli+:7if will be s'J. J ec:' t legi< action. JOHN C. KOMISI STATE OF WASHINGTON DUNG, TEES .P 1 iER�C A cx r o l?tJ? PROJECT NAME. p DO PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool ti i,na:dle 2007 to T W J000 aco a cc � J H 03 aw Q 2 v W H W F..�J W Cn W W 0 U) PROJECT MANAGER MPW DRAWN BY BJS REVISIONS NO REASON DATE CITY OF TI ,y, ` ' A, MAR 07L PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE. SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625- 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE . SHEET NO. 12/21/07 SP.8 SECTION 09 98 20 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer, as defined in Division 01, who has completed FRP panel installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide fiberglass- reinforced plastic wall panels that are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for the fire performance characteristics indicated below. Identify wall panel materials with appropriate markings from the testing and inspection organization. 1. Flame Spread: Class C. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, texture, grade, finish, and type of wall panel material from a single source with resourcesto provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall panel material until the space to receive the wall panel material is enclosed and weatherproof. Do not install materials until the ambient temperature within the building is maintained and stabilized at not less than 60 deg F for not less than 10 days prior to beginning of the installation and 10 days following installation. 1. During and after installation, shield walls from exposure to direct sunlight to avoid blistering and distortion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product: 1. Marlite FRP. 2.2 FIBERGLASS- REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELS A. Sheet Wall Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard textured, semirigid, fiber - reinforced plastic sheets, thickness as indicated. Material shall be chemical and stain resistant. Plastic sheets shall comply with performance characteristics specified. 1. Sheet Size: 48 x 120 inches. 2. Sheet Thickness: 0.090 (3/32 ") inch thick. 3. Color: As indicated. B. Impact Strength: Provide wall panel materials with a minimum impact resistance of 12 ft.lbs /inc. notched when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256. C. Water Absorption: Provide wall panel materials with a maximum water absorption of .08 percent in 24 hours at 25 deg C. D. Expansion: Provide wall panel materials which have a thermal coefficient of linear expansion of 1.7 x 10 -5 in. /in. /deg F. E. Government Approval: USDA accepted. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Wall panel manufacturer shall provide all components to insure a complete installation. B. Moldings: All joints shall receive extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) moldings. Provide inside corners, outside corners, division bars and capping strips. 1. Color: To match panels. C. Fasteners: Provide high - impact thermoplastic drive rivets, color to match wall panel. D. Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturer for application to various substrates. E. Sealant: Provide sealant recommended by manufacturer. RT 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates scheduled to receive fiberglass- reinforced plastic wall panel materials for compliance with manufacturer's requirements and conditions affecting performance. 1. Wall surfaces to receive wall panel materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose paint, and scale. 2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. Provide skim coat over rough walls to smooth surface. 1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of wall panel materials. 2. Test masonry and plaster substrates to receive wall panel with an electronic moisture meter. Moisture content shall be within manufacturer's recommended limits. 3. Prime and seal substrates, if required, in accordance with wall panel materials manufacture's recommendations for thetype of substrate. 4. Acclimatize materials by removing from packaging in areas of installation, not less than 48 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wall panel materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Cutting: Do all cutting with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips. 2. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. 3. Install seams plumb at least 24 inches from corner. On walls taller than length of sheets, end match veneers at horizontal joints. 4. Fasteners holes in the panels must be predrilled 1/8 inch oversize. 5. Using a 1 /4 -inch notched trowel, apply adhesive to panel back for 100 percent coverage. 6. Moldings: Install silicone sealant within moldings. Install moldings at all perimeter edges of panels except above the ceiling plane, in the longest practical lengths. Tightly butt end joints and miter corners of moldings. 7. Installation Type: Full -wall height. 3.4 CLEANING A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean plastic and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Remove any excess adhesive or sealant from face seams, perimeter edges or adjacent surfaces using solvent or cleaner recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Remove and replace damaged sheets or sheets that cannot be cleaned. D. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 09 98 20 SECTION 1014 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005 -H32. B. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass- fiber - reinforced polyester panels with a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790. C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A -1 (cell -cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Cutout Characters: with square -cut, smooth edges. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.5 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall- Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two -Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl- covered or rough surfaces. END OF SECTION 1014 00 SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BATHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on drawings. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. END OF SECTION 10 28 00 SECTION 10 52 00 - FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. B. Maintenance data. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers; Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within Six years from Substantial Completion warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 2. JL Industries, Inc. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire - protection cabinet indicated. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. C. Multipurpose Dry - Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL -rated 4- A:60 -B:C, 10 -lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel container. 2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 2. JL Industries, Inc. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with black plated or baked - enamel finish. C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. in locations heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable havin ' B. Install fire protection specialties and at mounting helg is d cated o , o g acceptab a to g urisdiction. jurisdiction. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 10 52 00 SECTION 11 21 00 -- MERCHANDISING DISPLAY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized installer. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide fabrics with the surface - burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products indicated on Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, and substances that will impair installation. B. Install merchandising display system in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. C. Provide vertical support systems, shelves, caps, hang rails, clips, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. 3.2 PROTECT A. Protect merchandising display system from damage until substantial completion. Replace damaged system components with new. END OF SECTION 11 21 00 SECTION 12 4.8 50 - FOOT MATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of floor mat indicated. B. Maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher fortype of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy 5005 -H15. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6061 -T6 or alloy 6063 -T5, T6, or T52 as standard with manufacturer. Coat surface of frame in contact with cementitious materials with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.2 FLOOR MAT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Finish Schedule. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. 1. Field verify dimensions of area indicated to receive floor mat. 2. Where notching is required of floor mats to fit opening; notching is to be completed in factory by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine floor conditions for compliance with location and size requirements. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Install and protect per manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 12 48 50 W011 DIVERSIFIED. ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 5815 Westpark Drive Charlotte, NC. 28217 MPW www.IIttleonline.com ; !i! <.7:;iYy' (ma', %1!' u:'S;' <i1 sb!iwt7 are tit troperty of i)iret:'i/ d .-lrehi'e dieral Cots ii'fng. 7 i ; %4,' % %iTUj' ;V %iii r1;:^.;;7; 7'ithou/ their jii pfi foment i prohibited and any m/';'- nff ne;Jr will he sac,$,:' eo legal ariaoa. JOHN C. KOMISIN STATE OF WASHINGTON CLIENT NAME PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE Josh Cool PROJECT MANAGER DRAWN BY BJS ,c % ,:tale 2007 0 At) EUNG1 BEES AER1Cl GJ4 Ttl M T U.1 op a2N u) Ix co co - i-- J Z 2 U< W I- W M W V� O N a W 0 cn REVISIONS NO REASON DATE RE71, ;7' CITY OF T1.IKOALA MAR 0 7 PERMIT CENTER SHEET TITLE SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NUMBER 625 - 4089 -01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 SP.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER/MODEL DESCRIPTION LAMP A + JUNO SORSOPS- G10- 15S /50RPG 50 WATT METAL HALIDE 3/4" CONDUIT MOUNT (NOT INCLUDED) MHC5O1U/MP /4K B ® UGHTOLIER 1002PI -1048 LYTECASTER RECESSED DOWNLIGHT 50PAR30/H/NFL D1 AMERLUX CYLT20MMEST120CL/FL 120 VOLT METAL HALIDE TRACK LIGHTING ® SPOT LIGHTING 0 FLOOD LIGHTING HEAD FINISH: SILVER D1 B AMERLUX CYLT2OMMEBT120CL 120 VOLT METAL HALIDE TRACK LIGHTING a SPOT LIGHTING HEAD FINISH: BLACK F MERCURY • MI06- 232- RS -A —ELB -120 V 2 LAMP 4 SHALLOW WRAP AROUND 2- F32TE/TL735 I G EXCEUNE RLW-100-IN-G-C-NP (NP = NO PAINT) WALL MOUNT JAR WITH CAST WIRE GUARD - NO FINISH 60W 100A -90/EW EM ITES 2 HEAD = 12T12 -DEN -B 2 HEAD METAL FINISH, SINGLE GANG PLATE 12 VOLT, 12 WATT LAMP 02 -79 EX ® ALKCO EAX- 12 -FL -2 EXIT SIGN W /20 MIN BATTERY BACK -UP •PENDANT MOUNT WHERE INDICATED (2) 8 WATT T5 FLUOR EXEM HBP-PLED-5-R-DEN-B LED COMBINATION EXIT & EMERGENCY LIGHTING (COLOR - BLACK) _ CLG FAN q `?Y 0 REGENCY PROFESSIONAL SERIES PF52 -AB ANTIQUES BRASS FINISH, WALNUT BLADES R r , REJUVINATION RUFUS MODEL #W987 BLACK PORCELAIN FINISH WALL MOUNT FIXTURE - SEE TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS 1901 Newport Blvd. suite #300:•; Costa Mesa, Ca; 92627 ::?: .949:698.1 : - Fax 949.698,1433 www.littleonline.com This draping and the design show; am the prai5erty of Little Dizen jied Architectural Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other use of this draping Without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement Will be subject to legal action. 0 Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 -410 -2858 FAX 817 -251 -8411 CLIENT NAME 0 . ri tI N G Z Z S Tau T UUMTorIE 6, PRO]ECTTEAM:r .: .� Jam..:. ..... �. PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE PROJECT MANAGER AP /FL NO REASON I DATE ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN JAN 0 8 2008 PROLE :.Ny6EEL?;f + �_rt . • .= i : .iN�t:.'�'� 12/21/07 625-4089-01 LIGHTING GENERAL NOTE REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR EXACT LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS. abc def A -31 31 B r B 11 11'I 1 NL 27 ,f 23 1 23 23 s #J ,mss 7 25 `. 23 13 X23 A -15 •••• MEM •••■w ■■■■T =IMP ■®SIC ■■■■N T.C. & V.0 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" LIGHTING PLAN KEYED NOTE NORTH O EMERGENCY LIGHTS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE NORMAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT SERVING THE AREA & BE CONNECTED AHEAD OF THE LOCAL SWITCH /CONTACTOR. U CooNO INSTALLED T USED L.-PROJECT MANAGER FOR THE EXACT LOCATION. NUMBER DENO I E6 I I-<ANSI- URMEIR VA SIZE. O CEILING EXHAUST FAN TO BE CONNECTED TO TOILET ROOM LIGHTS & IS REQUIRED TO BE INTERLOCKED & CONTROLLED BY THE OCCUPANCY MOTION SENSOR SWITCH. REFER TO MECHANICAL PLAN FOR OTHER DETAIL & INFORMATIONS. ® MASTER SWITCH LOCATION FOR LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL. SEE LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM FOR DETAIL. ® SALES FLOOR CEILING FANS SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY SWITCH INDIVIDUALLY & NOT BE WIRED THRU CONTACTOR. © PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX, TOGGLE DISCONNECT SWITCH IN NON - VISIBLE LOCATION AND FINAL CONNECTION FOR • 120 VOLT SIGN. THE SIGN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH INTERNAL GROUND FAULT PROTECTION PER N.E.C. ARTICLE 600 -23b. NOTE: THE CIRCUIT FOR SIGNAGE MUST BE A DEDICATED ISOLATED 3 -LINE CIRCUIT CONSISTING OF HOT, NEUTRAL & GROUND WIRES LEADING DIRECTLY TO THE PANEL V.C. - VIA CONTACTOR T.C. - VIA TIME CLOCK ® OCCUPANCY MOTION SENSOR SWITCH SIMILAR TO HUBBELL WS120277W2 FOR CONTROL OF LIGHT & EXHAUST FAN. SET SWITCH FOR 15 MINUTES ® INDIVIDUAL SWITCHES FOR THE SALES AREA CEILING FAN. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH THE PROJECT MANAGER. ( J (Ti) BREnNOT USED 30V i USEDR AGNETIC A MAXIMUM OF 3 0 WATTSCLOSURE THAT CONTAINS TWO (2) "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID " NOTE: LIGHT FIXTURES ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. FOR QUESTIONS REGARDING THE LIGHT FIXTURES, PLEASE CONTACT NICOLE KONG AT CAPITOL LIGHTING 1-866- 895 -1230. LANDLORD NOTE: EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE TYPES AND LOCATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO BUILDING DEPT. AND FIRE APPROVAL. 1±1 ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, ETC. SHALL BE U.L. LISTED. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, WIRING METHODS, ETC. WITHIN A CEILING RETURN AIR PLENUM SHALL BE "PLENUM RATED /APPROVED" AS REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING DEPT. VERIFY ANY /ALL REQUIREMENTS WITH THE BUILDING DEPT. AND TENANTS ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BID. 25 25 NL 23 D6b Oitt 2006 IECC Report Date: 01/03/08 Data filename: VAHHH ProjectskLITTLE\LCI\Lucky Brand Jeans1.07-194 SouthoenteriEngineeringtEnergy Calcs\LBJ- Southcenter Malt 1-3-08.ock Section 1: Project Information Project Trt le: Lucky Brand Jeans: South Center Mall Construction Site: 633 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA 98188 Section 2: General Information Building Use Description by: Activity Type Project Type: New Construction Section 3: Requirements Checklist U Li COMcheck Software Version 3.4.1 Lighting Compliance Certificate Allowed Watts Actual Watts 4614 3608 Owner/Agent: Activity Type(s) Floor Area Retail 2244 Interior Lighting: O 1 • Total actual watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts. Complies YES Designer/Contractor: Dori Penn Consulting Engineer 635 Westport Parkway Grapevine, TX 76051 817-410-2a58 Exterior Lighting: U 2. Efficacy greater than 45 lumens/W, Exceptions' Specialized lighting highlighting features of historic buildings: signage; safety or security lighting; low-voltage landscape lighting • 3. Comply with Sections 505.2.4 and 505.6 of IECC 2006 and attach documentation. Controls, Switching, and Wiring: 4 Independent controls for each space (switch/occupancy sensor) Exceptions. Areas designated as security or emergency areas that must be continuously illuminated. Lighting in stairways or corridors that are elements of the means of egress. 5, Master switch at entry to hotel/motel guest room. 6. Individual dwelling units separately metered 7 . Each space provided with a manual control to provide uniform light reduction by at least 50%. Exceptions: Only one luminaire in space; An occupant-sensing device controls the area; The area is a corridor, storeroom, restroom, public lobby or sleeping unit Areas that use less than 0.6 Wattslsq ft. Page 1 of 3 ▪ 8. Automatic lighting shutoff control in buildings larger than 5,000 sq.ft, Exceptions: Sleeping units, patient care areas; and spaces where automatic shutoff would endanger safety or security. 0 9. Photocell/astronomical time switch on exterior lights. Exceptions: Lighting intended for 24 hour use. ▪ 10. Tandem wired one-lamp and three-lamp ballasted luminaires (No single-lamp ballasts). Exceptions: Electronic high-frequency ballasts; Luminaires on emergency circuits or with no available pair. Section 4: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2008 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.4.1 and to comply with the m ndat y requirements in the Requirements Checklist. 1=ILI Name - Title Project Notes: Lucky Brand Jeans- Southcenter Mall 633 Southcenter Parkway Space # 1535 Tukwila, WA 98188 Signature .0 Date Page 2 of 3 • COMcheck Software Version 3.4.1 Lighting Application Worksheet 2006 IECC Report Date: Da filename: VAHHH Projects\UTILENLCItLucky Brand Jeans\07-194 Southoenter\EngineeringkEnergy Calos1LBJ- Southcenter Mall Section 1: Allowed Lighting Power Calculation A Area Category Retail 2244 1.5 Allowance: Merchandise Display Fix. ID: D1 780(a) 1.6 Total Allowed Watts = (a) Area claimed must not exceed the illuminated area permitted for this allowance type. (b) Allowance is (B x C) or the actual wattage of the fixtures given in Section 2, whichever is less. Section 2: Actual Lighting Power Calculation A Fixture ID : Description I Lamp/Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast . HID 1: A: METAL HALIDE/Metal Halide 50W / Electronic Incandescent 4: B: RECESSED DOWNLIGHT I Incandescent 50W Incandescent 2: Dl: TRACK HEAD / Incandescent 35W Incandescent 2 copy 1: D1 B: TRACK HEAD / Incandescent 35W Incandescent 2 copy 1: G: WALL SCONCE / Incandescent 60W Linear Fluorescent 1: F: FLUORESCENT / 48" T8 32W1 Electronic Section 3: Compliance Calculation Xt k•Wk `x; . k■‘ B Floor Area (ft2) C Allowed Watts I ft2 D Allowed Watts (B x C) 3386 1248(b) 4614 B C D E Lamps/ # of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt, 1 12 50 600 7 80 7 64 Total Actual Watts = 1 1 1 1 2 10 48 15 50 25 26 If the Total Allowed Watts minus the Total Actual Watts is greater than or equal to zero, the building complies. Total Allow Watts Total Actual Watts = Project Compliance 500 1248 390 420 448 3606 4614 3606 1008 Page 3 of 3 JAN 0 8 2008 r 7/17z - ilAso LITTLE DIVERSIFIED ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTING 1901 Newport Blvd. suite #300 Costa Mesa, Ca. 92627 Ph. 949.698.1400 Fax 949.698.1433 www.littleonline.com draN and the' CICS,;;;?: 41, 1;A' prOpertp' itik Diver() fic'd .• Irchlteagr,d e• Irk ti+1 eirdIPM:' ll'11107 tte)r a /7 (n/ ri,ruerri y f twrir hrted :.;;;ei r nil je? Lillie 2007 dp DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817-410-2858 FAX 817-251-8411 CLIENT NAME --40•15 (1) t ickAa " 3 )14,1 414 0 nuNG4nErs Aim EiZIAr'A. PROJECT NAME PROJECT TEAM . • PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE HHH PROD Fri MANAGER LIJ rZ 17_ X LL SHEET TITLE ELECTRICAL LIGHTING COMPLIANCE FORMS PROJECT NUMBER • 625-4089-01 ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. 12/21/07 El i IP 121 1r IMMENNEMNIE ■ ■■I■■■ ■■_u• IM ■I■■■M IRE • # Rim FPVAV -1 © PANEL 'A' ■ ■■ ■1r 17 } ■M ■ ■■ ■■■■■!ii■ iIi ■■ ■ ■.m� ■ ■■I ■■■■IA■1■ ■■■■ ■■■■WM1■ I ■ ■■■■■ ■r■N '36 ■ ■■ ■r: m`l3611 4 H1° ' t. °M ■■ i••i i ■■ F I■■''■ ■■ UPS n ®It=s'= c r EINIMMENMERMagi •i __. MICAIIIIlAA1M ■ •111■■ ■rr •• u ■ ■I•■ •11M1 IIII■■I ■ ■■ii■iil 1 ■111If1Si■ ■■■ moms z 1 4 � ' i L • ■ • • • • • • • " 6 1 " • • • • • • • • • ■ ■ mil 0 CI r u n � I=ow A 0 l I u u I. J 4 r 0 0 =I `�r► i 1-11 11 > A -35 DED REC. A-22 DED. REC. A - DED. REC. A -26 DED. REC. A -42 A -12 A- 8 12 It LV Il* Vic --- ' — � 3 I 111 ; II LV 1Jm1 LV- UPS # 1 • r • 1 m \ANVVV1. UPS #3 A - 38 TRENCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT COORDINATE WITH LANDLORD'S REPRESENTATIVE STUB CONDUITS UP IN CASHWRAP. t z 12 i>_.— 5_L A -28 A -18 0 12 8 mama ZOOMS r .' LOW VOLTAGE NOTES 1/4" = 1' -0" LOW VOLTAGE WIRING INCLUDES TELEPHONE WIRING, SECURITY SYSTEM WIRING, COMPUTER/DATA WIRING AND SOUND SYSTEM WIRING. TELEPHONE WIRING AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY LUCKY BRAND . REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONTACT AND TELEPHONE NUMBER. SECURITY WIRING AND EQUIPMENT IS BY LUCKY BRAND. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR CONTACT INFORMATION. INSTALL 2 WEEKS PRIOR TO TURN OVER DATE. EACH DOORWAY SHOULD HAVE CONCEALED WIRING RUN TO TOP OF DOOR. THIS WIRING SHOULD BE RUN IN CONCEALED CONDUIT TO SECURITY BACKBOARD LOCATION. A SECOND MOTION DETECTOR DEVICE MOUNTS IN THE CENTER OF THE STORE CEILING, AND A CONDUIT RUNS TO THE BACKBOARD. COMPUTER.WIRING AND EQUIPMENT IS SUPPLIED BY LUCKY BRAND JEANS. EQUIPMENT INCLUDES 2 COMPUTER SYSTEMS IN OFFICE AREA AND TWO CASH REGISTERS. WIRING SHOULD BE RUN IN DATA CONDUITS FROM CASH REGISTER TO OFFICE DESK LOCATION. CONDUIT TO COMPLY WITH CATEGORY 5 RULES OF INSTALLATION. SOUND SYSTEM IS PROVIDED BY DMX/AEI MUSIC SYSTEMS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR CONTACT INFORMATION AND TELEPHONE FOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. SOUND SYSTEM USES A 5 SPEAKER DESIGN, WITH 4 COMPACT SPEAKERS MOUNTED TO THE TOP OF THE CABINETS AND ONE SUB - WOOFER PLACED ABOVE THE DRESSING ROOM CEILING. G.C. TO PROVIDE PLYWOOD TOP AT DRESSING ROOM. G.C. ALSO TO PROVIDE CONDUIT TO THE LOCATIONS PROVIDED. STUB OUT WITHIN 2" OF TOP OF CABINETS. STUB OUT TO BE NO LONGER THAT 2" AND INCLUDE PLASTIC BUR -RING. A VOLUME CONTROL UNIT WILL BE MOUNTED INTO A J -BOX MOUNTED IN THE CASH REGISTER CABINET. WIRING SHOULD BE IN DATA CONDUIT THAT RUNS FROM CASH REGISTER TO BACK OFFICE TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. AT BACKBOARD STEREO EQUIPMENT WILL BE MOUNTED DIRECTLY TO WALL. '..�'iNHPr -"v: N....• • ••• •�Wn }Xi:}.WX4.WXh.N..LN: 1YhYlMP: Nf P»# MK^ Y.:•. D: C�^ bYYM» r: nYttaavrxe 'vr�.vnmorovsrorru I ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN POWER PLAN KEYED NOTES PROVIDE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE LOCATED AT CEILING, ONE AT EACH SIDE OF FRONT DISPLAY WINDOW FOR FUTURE CHRISTMAS LIGHTS, DISPLAYS, ETC. (TYP OF 2). SECURITY CONTACTOR SWITCH. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. JUNCTION BOX & DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR WATER HEATER POWER CONNECTION. TELEPHONE BOARD LOCATION. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD. NOT USED. PEOPLE COUNTER SYSTEM, CEILING MOUNTED. G.C. TO PROVIDE 1" EMPTY CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING TO DATA CLOSET. PROVIDE ACCESS PANEL. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH LCI PROJECT MANAGER. E.C. TO PROVIDE EMPTY 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING TO STOREFRONT DOOR FOR ADT /SECURITY WIRING. ADT WILL PULL WIRES AFTER CONSTRUCTION IS CLOSER TO COMPLETION. INSTALL A DELIVERY BU77FR AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. PROVIDE A DELIVERY BUZZER SIMILAR OR EQUAL TO EDWARDS DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM COMPLETE WITH TRANSFORMER, LOUVERED COVER PLATES AND PUSH BUTTOM (WEATHERPROOF FOR OUTSIDE LOCATIONS). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY JUNCTION BOXES, CONDUIT & WIRE TO COMPLETELY INSTALL THE DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM. EXIENOT USED)EI-ECTOR <1a> EXI USEDOF GFCI RECEPTACLE. <11> PROVIDE J -BOX & 3/4 "C WITH PULL STRING FOR HVAC T- STATS. COORDINATE WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS. I] 7 JAN 0 8 2008 ` r 7 DiVSRsFLED. ARCHITECTURAL•_ 00NSULT NG 1901 Newport'Blvd. suite #300:. Costa Mesa, Ca: 92627 Ph-949.698.1400 Fax 949.6984433- This droning and the design shown are the popery of Little Disersified Architectvaul Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other use of this draining oitbout their Written consent is prohibited and any infringement hill be ,rubj'eet to legal action CLIENT NAME - HHH EM DRAWN BY AP /FL NO www.littleonline.com © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 517 -410 -2858 FAX 817 -251 -8411 t flu NGA E S 1'4 ERIC TOO TOUCH TQ 0l PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE PROJECT MANAGER • 2ROIECLNOMBER :=:':�...,..:.ityct ".z; 5SOEOATE= 625-4089-01 12/21/07 REASON DATE cimmenzazzffiz ELECTRICAL NPOWER PLAN o 'JS s, y ` l ■■■■.■■m ■id E3.0 MEMO 1111111•1111111111tiik MINIM I II I unannilmairar I■1i 0=112 Ell MEI _ Illrl_ ___' ED A -22 DED. REC. A -24 DED_ REC. A -26 •ED. REC. A-42 P I • 1 I � 1 1 -+ TRENCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. COORDINATE WITH LANDLORD'S REPRESENTATIVE STUB CONDUITS UP IN CASHWRAP. NO REASON DMX MUSIC SYSTEM ON SHELF A-4 VOICE JACK FOR MUSIC MUSIC FAX INVENTORY (1) DUPLEX OUTLET ON UPS #2 NOTE: UPS POWER MUST RUN IN SEPARATE CONDUIT, NOT WITH HOUSE POWER. MANAGERS DESK ELEVATION NTS DEDICATED DUPLEX OUTLETS ON (3) SEPARATE DEDICATED CIRCUITS #1, 42, #3 OUTLETS 6" APART (BACKUP OUTLETS SHOULD UPS FAIL) 66 PHONE BLOCK PATCH PANEL DATA CLOSET ELEVATION NTS i4 DATA PLAN KEYED NOTES PHONE SYSTEM UPS CIRCUIT #3 DUPLEX OUTLETS SET TIGHT TO SHELVES PHONE SYSTEM UPS CIRCUIT #3 UTILITY (A -30) - v N zzr (2) DUPLEX OUTLETS 3" APART BOTH ON UPS CIRCUIT #3 MONITOR AND KEYBOARD ELECTRICAL J -BOX (FOR U.P.S. CIRCUITS #1, #2, #3) WITH (3) 15 AMPS GROUNDED "PIGTAILS" WITH 3 PRONG MALE PLUG PIGTAILS SHOULD BE 72" LONG. NEMA L5-30R ON DEDICATED I.G. CIRCUIT (442) PEOPLE COUNTER SYSTEM, CEILING MOUNTED. G.C. TO PROVIDE 1" EMPTY CONDUIT TO DATA CLOSET. PROVIDE ACCESS PANEL. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH LCI PROJECT MANAGER. DATA SYSTEM INSTALLATION NOTES 1. THE AREA WILL REQUIRE THREE 32" BY 30" SHELVES TO BE INSTALLED AT 24" AFF, 54" AFF, AND 78" AFF. 2. ONE NEMA L5-30R RECEPTACLE WILL BE INSTALLED UNDER THE BOTTOM SHELF AT 18" AFF TO SUPPLY POWER FOR UPS UNIT. 3. ONE ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX WILL BE INSTALLED AT 18" AFF TO HOUSE THREE UPS CIRCUIT PIG TAILS. ALL PIGTAILS ARE TO BE 60" IN LENGTH, LABELED WITH THE CIRCUIT THAT THEY SERVE AND HAVE A 15 AMP MALE PLUG. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PASS & SEYMOUR #5965 15A, 125V, 2-POLE, 3 WIRE PLUG ENDS. (SEE DETAIL 3 ON SHEET E -3.0). 4. THREE DEDICATED CIRCUIT DUPLEX OUTLETS WILL BE INSTALLED ON THE FRONT WALL FOR UPS EMERGENCY BACKUP AT 18" AFF 6" APART. 5. THREE UPS CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN IDENTIFIED: A) CASH REGISTER LOCATION 1 (1 DUPLEX OUTLET) WILL BE ON UPS CIRCUIT 1. B) CASH REGISTER LOCATION 2 (1 DUPLEX OUTLE I) WILL BE ON UPS CIRCUIT 2. C) MANAGERS OFFICE PC LOCATION WILL HAVE 1 DUPLEX OUTLET UPS CIRCUIT #2. D) SERVER LOCATION WILL HAVE 5 DUPLEX OUTLETS 3" APART AT 60" AFF HEIGHT BETWEEN THE SHELVES ON UPS CIRCUIT 3. E) UPS CIRCUIT FACE PLATE NEED TO BE LABELED WITH THE CIRCUIT # IT SERVES AND MUST BE ORANGE IN COLOR. (i.e. UPS 1, UPS 2, OR UPS 3) NOTES: 1. 2. THE 1" CONDUITS FROM THE DMX MUSIC SYSTEM WILL ALSO BE HOME RUN TO THE DATA CLOSET STUBBING AT 9' AFF (1 FOOT ABOVE THE PATCH PANELS). CASH REGISTER LOCATION 3 (1 DUPLEX OUTLET) WILL BE ON UPS CIRCUIT 1. i DATA PLAN 1 DATA PLAN E3.0 1/4" = 1' -0" 6 ADDITIONAL DEDICATED CIRCUITS WERE IDENTIFIED IN THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS: A) AT EACH OF THE 2 CASH REGISTER LOCATIONS A QUAD OUTLET 2 1/4" APART FROM THE UPS OUTLETS. B) A DUPLEX OUTLET WILL BE INSTALLED AT THE 60" AFF IN THE DATA AREA BETWEEN THE SHELVES AND 3" TO THE TIGHT OF THE 5 UPS DUPLEX OUTLETS. 7 A KEYBOARD SHELF ON RAILS WILL BE INSTALLED UNDER THE COUNTER IN THE MANAGER'S DESK WHERE THE PC WILL BE INSTALLED. Pik 8. THE STEREO SYSTEM WILL RESIDE ABOVE THE MANAGER'S DESK. 9. COORDINATE LOCATION OF THE PHONE SYSTEM. 11. V08 10. VOICE AND DATA PATCH PANELS WILL BE AT THE 7' AND 8' HEIGHTS OF THE DATA CLOSET TO THE LEFT OF THE PHONE SYSTEM. THE D -MARK WILL BE EXTENDED FROM THE BACK DOOR INTO THE DATA AREA. 12. THE THREE 1" CONDUITS FROM THE CASHWRAP FOR VOICE AND DATA WILL BE HOME RUN TO THE DATA CLOSET STUBBING UP AT 9' AFF (1 FOOT ABOVE THE PATCH PANELS). 13. THE (THREE) 1" CONDUIT FROM THE MANAGER'S OFFICE WILL ALSO BE HOME RUN TO THE DATA CLOSET STUBBING UP AT 9' AFF (1 FOOT ABOVE THE PATCH PANELS). 14. VOICE/DATA LOCATIONS: A) ALL VOICE/DATA LOCATIONS WILL STANDARDIZE IN A 4 JACK HOUSING. TOP 2 FOR VOICE, BOTTOM 2 FOR DATA. ALL RUNS WILL BE ENHANCED CAT 5 STRAIGHT THROUGH. B) THE VOICE JACKS WILL BE MARKED V1 - VXX BOTH ON VOICE PATCH AND AT JACK HOUSING. C) THE DATA JACKS WILL BE MARKED D1 - DXX. BOTH ON THE DATA PATCH AND AT THE JACK HOUSING. D) THERE WILL BE 2 VOICE/DATA LOCATIONS AT THE CASHWRAP. ONE FOR EACH CASH REGISTER LOCATIONS. E) THERE WILL BE 1 VOICE/DATA LOCATION AT THE 18" AFF IN THE MANAGER'S OFFICE UNDERNEATH THE MANAGER'S PC LOCATION. (THIS IS IN ADDITION TO ANY JACK LOCATIONS SPECIFIED BY CHRISTI). F) THERE WILL BE 1 VOICE/DATA LOCATION AT THE 60" AFF BETWEEN THE SHELVES IN THE DATA CLOSET FOR THE STORE SERVER. 0) THERE WILL BE 1 VOICE JACK FOR THE STEREO EQUIPMENT AND SHOULD BE UNDERNEATH THE STEREO LOCATION, WHICH IS OVER THE MANGER'S DESK H) THERE WILL BE 1 VOICE/DATA LOCATION AT 18" AFF IN THE MANAGER'S OFFICE UNDERNEATH THE MANAGER'S PC LOCATION. THIS LOCATION SHOULD BE LABELED AS "FAX" AND ALSO SHOW THE FAX PHONE NUMBER. I) THERE WILL BE 1 VOICE/DATA LOCATION AT 36" AFF IN THE MANAGER'S OFFICE ABOVE THE DESK AND TO THE RIGHT OF THE MANAGER'S PC LOCATION. THIS LOCATION SHOULD BE LABELED AS "INVENTORY' ALSO SHOW THE INVENTORY PHONE #.. j) ALL CONDUIT SHOULD BE SOLID END TO END AND HAVE PULL STRING. 744 lj mcaaw.muaPv 1 te EXPIRES DEC 2 0 2009 l 1901 Newport Blvd. suite #300 Costa Mesa, Ca: 92627':::; Ph. 949.698.1400 :; ::: Fax 949.698:1433.: www.Iittleonline.tom Thu drawing and the design shown are the property of Little Disenified Architectural Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other rue of thy drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be su J'ect to legal action. CLIENT NAME HHH EM DRAWN BY AP /FL •D U M 7- i t t$ AI1E R1C rrtu T U TO Di / © Little 2007 PROJECT MANAGER PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE 12/21/07 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY. SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE. TEXAS 76051 617-410-2858 FAX 817 - 251$411 PROJECT NAME"..: PROJEeTTEAM.M. DATA CLOSET PLAN F JAN 0 8 2008 L 625-4089-01 DATE =ISSUEDA'[E'=ti r : SHEETNQ:� - .. 'z_cs- "._.: :r•: E3.0 VOLTAGE : 1201208V, 30, 4W MOUNTING : SURFACE BUS RATING : 225A NEW PA N E L B OA R D 'A' MAIN BREAKER IOOA LOCATION : STOCKROOM LCL LTG, ZONE CIR. NO. DESCRIPTION CB LOAD C8 DESCRIPTION CIR- NO. LTG. ZONE LCL AMP POLE A B C AMP POLE • ' B A A C C A - - - ❑ D D D 0 D 1 EX1NL /STOCKROOM 20 1 600 RECEPTACLES 8.560 20 1 CEILING FAN 2 A MOTORS 3 TOILET /STOCKROOM LIGHTS _ _ { 1'0 FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING 1 r 1 . 0 - _ 1.0 • STEREO /DEDICATED #5 4 S SHOW WINDOW TRACK LIGHTS - • 12S . - ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 4.230 1.0 4.200 4.200 STEREO/DEDICATED #5 6 7 SPARE 1.0 1.7so 1.760 1.0 0 720 TOTAL NOTES • USE GREATER VALUE OF •• N.E.C. ARTICLE 220-12 REQUIREMENT SHOW WINDOW) MINUS ACTUAL •.. N.E.C. ARTICLE 220-12 REQUIREMENT TRACK UGHTING) OR ACTUAL •••• 125% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR NEC - DEMAND KVA x 1000 SYSTEM VOLTAGE X 29.725X 1000 20.134 FOOT OF WINDOW LIGHTING OF (150VA LIGHTING VA. IN SYSTEM. APPLIED AMPERAGE SALES AREA RECEPTACLES . 8 9 ' SIGNAGE THE TWO CATEGORIES (200VA PER INSTALLED SHOW - THE GREATER INSTALLED TRACK OF COMPRESSOR . MINIMUM FEEDER =35.8 AMPS VA. PER 2 FOOT OF ONLY ON ONE UNIT. USE 60 AMP SERVICE 480 x1.73 1200 0 SPARE 10 11 FITTING ROOM LIGHTS 620 720 SALES AREA RECEPTACLE 12 13 SALES AREA PENDANT 364 a SPARE 14 15 ENTRY LIGHTS 300 200 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 15 17 STOCK ROOM RECEPTACLE V 540 360 SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE 18 19 WATER HEATER 20 2 2100 0 SPARE 20 21 i 2100 200 DEDICATED RECEPTACLE #1 22 Z3 SALES AREA TRACK LIGHTS 20 1 DEDICATED RECEPTACLE #2 24 25 SALES AREA TRACK LIGHTS DEDICATED RECEPTACLE #3 26 27 SALES AREA TRACK UGHTS \§ A \ SECURITY 28 29 SALES AREA TRACK UGHTS 260 180 UTILITY RECEPTACLE 30 31 SALES AREA TRACK LIGHTS UPS BACKUP 32 33 SALES AREA TRACK LIGHTS 416 360 TELEPHONE BOARD 34 35 VAV CONTROL MANAGER'S DESK 36 37 SPARE 720 P.O.S. RECEPTACLE 38 39 SPARE ACT 40 41 FACP ' I 6,660 6,706 ; -;; 6,768 , T UPS TOTAL VA: 21,578VA TOTAL AMPS: 59.9 A 42 LOAD PER PHASE (1LE.C. CONNECTED) LCL @ 25% PER PHASE 380 662 402 TOTAL LOAD PER PHASE: (N.EC. DEMAND) 7.040 7,368 7,170 ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY SUP4P8LOY,30,4W,60HZ DESCRIPTION ACTUAL CONNECTED KW/KVA POWER FACTOR ACTUAL DEMAND KVA N.E.C. CONNECTED KW/KVA N.E.C. DEMAND FACTOR N.E.C. DEMAND KVA UGHTING 3.676 1 . 0 3.676 3.676 1 4.595 TRACK UGHTING 1248 1 . 0 1248 1248 (92 FT) X 0.150 6-900 2 •• SHOW WINDOW LIGHTING ALLOWANCE 0.690 1 . 0 0.690 0.690 (17' X 0.200)- .- 0 2.710 RECEPTACLES 8.560 1 . 0 8.560 8.560 1.0. 10KW 0.5 REMAINING KW 8.560 MOTORS _ 1.0 _ _ { 1'0 FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING -- 1 . 0 - _ 1.0 • AIR CONDMONING SYSTEM _ - 1.0 - • - • 12S . - ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 4.230 1.0 4.200 4.200 1.25 5.250 MISCELLANEOUS 1.7sD 1.0 1.7so 1.760 1.0 1.760 TOTAL NOTES • USE GREATER VALUE OF •• N.E.C. ARTICLE 220-12 REQUIREMENT SHOW WINDOW) MINUS ACTUAL •.. N.E.C. ARTICLE 220-12 REQUIREMENT TRACK UGHTING) OR ACTUAL •••• 125% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR NEC - DEMAND KVA x 1000 SYSTEM VOLTAGE X 29.725X 1000 20.134 FOOT OF WINDOW LIGHTING OF (150VA LIGHTING VA. IN SYSTEM. APPLIED AMPERAGE 20.134 20.134 �• THE TWO CATEGORIES (200VA PER INSTALLED SHOW - THE GREATER INSTALLED TRACK OF COMPRESSOR . MINIMUM FEEDER =35.8 AMPS VA. PER 2 FOOT OF ONLY ON ONE UNIT. USE 60 AMP SERVICE 480 x1.73 TRANSFORMER LOAD SUMMARY SUPPLY 3,4W,60HZ DESCRIPTION ACTUAL CONNECTED KW/KVA POWER FACTOR ACTUAL DEMAND KVA N.E.C. CONNECTED KW/KVA N.E.C. DEMAND FACTOR NEC. DEMAND KVA LIGHTING 4.924 1-0 4.924 4.924 1 '� 6.155 SHOW WINDOW LIGHTING ALLOWANCE 0.690 1 . 0 0.690 0.690 (17 X 0200)- •• 0.690 2.710 RECEPTACLES 8.560 1 �0 8.560 0.000 8.560 0.000 1.0 a 10KW 0.5 REMAINING KW 8.560 MOTORS 0.000 1 . 0 1.25 0.000 FOXED ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING . 0.000 10 1'0 0.000 0.000 _ 1 0.000 AIR CONDMONING SYSTEM 0.000 1'0 0000 0000 1 .... • 0000 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 4200 1 . 0 4.200 4.200 1.0 5.250 MISCELLANEOUS 1.760 1.0 1.760 1.760 1 . 0 1.760 TOTAL NOTES • USE GREATER VALUE OF •• NEC. ARTICLE 220-12 REQUIREMENT- SHOW WINDOW) MINUS ACTUAL ••• N.EC. ARTICLE 220-12 REQUIREMENT TRACK LIGHTING) OR ACTUAL "••• 125% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR USE 30 KVA, 480V- 20.134 FOOT OF WINDOW UGHTING OF (150VA UGHTING VA IN SYSTEM. APPLIED 20.134 20.134 24.435 THE TWO CATEGORIES (200VA PER INSTALLED SHOW - THE GREATER INSTALLED TRACK OF COMPRESSOR 120)208V, 3 PHASE TRANSFORMER. VA. PER 2 FOOT OF ONLY ON ONE UNIT. METER ENCLOSURE & SOCKET TO BE FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY TENANTS EC. IF NOT EXISTING FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID. TENANTS EC. SHALL PROVIDE THE REQUIRED METER -IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY'S GUIDELINES & REQUIREMENTS. LANDLORD'S MAIN SWITCHBOARD, 277 / 480 V, 30, 4W. FIELD VERIFY 1 12 CONDUIT PROVIDED BY THE LANDLORD STUBBED -UP TO THE POINT OF INTERCEPTION WITHIN THE TENANT PREMISES. FIELD VIERFY PRIOR TO BID. CABLE 4#2 THHN + 1#8 GROUND TO BE FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY TENANTS E.C. FROM LANDLORD SWITCHBOARD TO TENANTS DISCONNECT SWITCH NO SCALE LEASE UNE EXISTING 200A, 3P, 480V DISCONNECT SWITCH TO BE REPLACED BY 100 A, 3P, 480V FUSED AT60A PROVIDED BY LANDLORD AT TENANTS EXPENSE. FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID. LANDLORD L.Q. 60A, 3P, 480V, 4W DISCONNECT SWITCH TO BE FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY TENANTS E.C. PROVIDE 3-60A FUSES. 1" C, 346 THHN. PANEL 'A' 120/208V, 30, 4W 100A M.C.B. (N) TENANTS SPACE POINT WHERE TO INTERCEPT& EXTEND THE 1 1/2' C STUBBED -IN. PROVIDE PULL/ CONNECTION BOX IF NECESSARY. #6 COPPER GROUND CONNECTED TO BUILDING STEEL AND NEAREST UNDERGROUDN COLD WATER PIPE AND /OR GROUND RODS. ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM (ELEVATION) 30 KVA 480V- I20208V, 30, 4W DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER. LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL PANEL HEIGHT TIME CLOCK 117C, 2412 THHN + 1 #12 CRD. 1 1/7 C, 4#2 THHN,1 #8 GRD FINISH FLOOR LEVEL 24 HR/7 DAY PROGRAMMABLE TIME CLOCK/SWITCH NEUTRAL (N) OVERRIDE ROTARY SWITCH GOOD FOR 2 HRS MINIMUM. A-16 SWITCH STATION LOCATED IN ACCESSIBLE AREA COORDINATE WITH THE PROJECT MANAGER FOR THE EXACT LOCATION. EXPIRES DEC 2 0 2009 625-4089-01 1.9.966QATE2- Wg1yr : REEPNO. - E: 12/21/07 A -16 24 HR/7 DAY PROGRAMMABLE TIME CLOCK/SWITCH N ZONE A NO SCALE ZONE B ZONE C ZONE D - A -5 - A -9 -. A-15 - A-1B TT SHOW WINDOW /SIGN & RECEPTACLE - A3 - SPARE SPARE ____ SPARE STOCK ROOM LIGHTS - A -11 - A -13 -- SPARE -- SPARE SALES AREA UGHTS - LOW LIGHTS - A-23 - A -25 - A -27 A-29 UGHTING CONTROL PANEL ASCO UGHTING CONTACTOR OR APPROVED EQUAL (TYP.) - A31 - A-33 - SPARE - SPARE LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM SALES AREA LIGHTS - HIGH LIGHTS s -0 4 1901 Blvd.' suite #300 Costa. Mesa, Ca: 92627 Ph. 949:698;1400 L Fax 949.698.1433 www.littleonline.com This droning and the design shorn are the property of Little Ditersf ed Architectural Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other use of this droning 37tbout their Britten consent is prohibited and any infringement sill be subject to legal action. dp © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 - 410 -2858 FAX 817251-8411 CLIENT NAME { 93-444: -__ ,)-,-----4,,,,-----r-- DUNGAREES tom. ' .FI iC .. . E+,, TOO TOBGR TO WE ry - s PROJECT NAME. PROJECLTEAM:: PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE HHH PROJECT MANAGER EM DRAWN BY AP /FL. Sa w > co co CL a co # r C Vr a�< ri o LLI M 0 NO REASON DATE : .$HEET,IITC - ,_ Y a -.. - -..., �. � ' �•- i'_- 'x<v�.w'_- ':����...- _rte - . ELECTRICAL PANELS AND RISER DIAGRAlI JAN 0 8 2008 - 1=1 5 )qVal - 0 rJ ,/1\KnEi ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACTOR OBLIGATION: BY SUBMITTING A BID, THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SUBCONTRACTORS, AND THEIR SUPPLIERS INDICATE UNDERSTANDING OF AND AGREEMENT WITH THE TERMS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS. FURTHER, THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT, IN GENERAL, SPECIFICATIONS WILL GOVERN METHODS AND MATERIALS AND ARE TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE COURSE OF THE CONSTRUCTION AS A MATTER OF LEGAL OBLIGATION IN EXECUTION OF CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACTUAL DUTIES. WHERE DEVIATIONS FROM THESE DOCUMENTS BECOME NECESSARY, I.E., SUBSTITUTE METHODS OR MATERIALS, TIME CHANGES OR OTHER CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR RECOGNIZES THESE MUST BE AGREED TO BY THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD PRIOR TO THAT AGREEMENT HAVING HAVING LEGAL FORCE. SITE INVESTIGATION: PRIOR TO THE BID, PROSPECTIVE CONTRACTOR AND HIS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL VISIT THE SITE, INVESTIGATE ALL FACETS OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AS PREPARATION TO SUBMITTING AN ACCURATE, REALISTIC BID. UNDERSTAND ALL INHERENT DIFFICULTIES IN EXECUTING THE DESIGN INTENT, KNOW WHAT MANNER OF EFFORT AND WHICH MATERIALS WILL BE REQUIRED TO PRODUCE WHAT IS CALLED FOR, AND BE PREPARED TO MAKE COST SAVINGS RECOMMENDATIONS TO THE DESIGN TEAM WHERE IMPLEMENTATION OF SAID SUGGESTION WILL INCREASE THE PROJECT VALUE WITHOUT A REDUCTION OF THE OVERALL QUALITY FAILURE TO VISIT SITE AND UNDERSTAND ALL ASPECTS OF THE HIS TASK AND THE LEVEL OF PERFORMANCE REQUIRED WILL RESULT IN NO EXTRA COMPENSATION FOR THE CONTRACTOR COORDINATION: AFTER CONTRACT (OR LE I I tR OF INTENT) IS AWARDED, PREPARE TO MARSHALL NECESSARY PROJECT STAFF AND BEGIN TO COORDINATE ALL ASPECTS OF THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WITH OTHER TRADES, EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS, LOCAL UTILITIES, THE OWNER, HIS VENDORS, THE DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD, EXISTING CONDITIONS, BUILDING OFFICIALS, AND OTHER PERSONAL OR CIRCUMSTANCES REQUIRED TO PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH AN OPERATIONALLY COMPLETE AND SAFE FACILITY. ONCE SCHEDULE IS SET AND PROJECT GO AHEAD AGREED TO , IT WILL BE LED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR BUT WITH ALL NECESSARY INPUT FROM THE RESPECTIVE TRADES REQUIRING ASSISTANCE TO PROPERLY PERFORM THEIR PART OF THE PROJECT PROVIDING ORGANIZATION AND COOPERATION: ORGANIZE JOB SITE ARRIVALS OF MANPOWER AND MATERIALS TO COINCIDE WITH THE PROJECT SCHEDULE IN THE MOST EFFICIENT MANNER, COOPERATE AT ALL TIMES WITH THE VARIOUS AUTHORITIES FROM DESIGN TEAM AND LOCAL BUILDING OFFICIALS AS WELL AS OTHER TRADESMEN SUCH THAT THE DESIGN MAY BECOME A PHYSICAL REALITY WITH THE LEAST AMOUNT OF ACRIMONY, DELAY, AND ADJUSTMENT SHOP DRAWINGS: SUBMIT SEVEN SETS OF SHOP DRAWINGS WITHIN 21 CALENDAR DAYS OF CONTRACT AWARD, BUT PRIOR TO SUBMISSION, VERIFY THE AVAILABILITY OF EACH ITEM, WHETHER SPECIFIED OR SUBSTITUTED. IF FOR SOME REASON THE SPECIFIED PRODUCT CANNOT BE OBTAINED IN TIME TO MEET THE SCHEDULE, OFFER A PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION OF LIKE OR BETTER QUALITY WITH AN EXPLANATION FROM THE EQUIPMENT REPRESENTATIVE THAT THE DATE CANNOT BE MET PRODUCT VERIFICATION: PRIOR TO ORDERING, VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF EACH SPECIFIED ITEM. CHECK ALL SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT AGAINST THE SPACE MADE AVAILABLE FOR IT AS SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. IF SUFFICIENT SPACE HAS NOT BEEN ALLOCATED ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS TO ACCOMMODATE SUBSTITUTION, INFORM ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. IF THIS REQUIREMENT IS NOT MET, ANY ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED TO CORRECT DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS MAY BE AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE CATALOG VERIFICATION: VERIFY THAT THE CATALOG NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE CURRENT. IF MANUFACTURERS HAVE MODIFIED NUMBERS OR THE NUMBERS ARE IN ERROR, SO INDICATE WITH A LETTER OF EXPLANATION ON CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD AND INCLUDE ANY REQUIRED CATALOG UPDATES WITH SHOP DRAWINGS. DO NOT ASSUME THAT THE SUBSTITUTE PRODUCT WILL BE ACCEPTED AND INSTALL PRIOR TO AGREEMENT FROM THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL. TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN THE EQUIPMENT BEING REMOVED AND REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE COUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS: THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS OWN MEASUREMENTS, LENGTHS, QUANTITY COUNTS, EQUIVALENCY OF APPEARANCE, DIMENSIONS, AND FUNCTIONS, AND FUNCTIONS OF ANY SUBSTITUTE ITEM, AND BY SUBMITTING A BID AND /OR ANY SIMILAR BUT UNSPECIFIED ITEM, HE IS AGREEING THE SUBMITTAL ITEM WILL MEET THE INTENT OF THE DESIGN IN ALL ASPECTS AT LEAST AS WELL AS THE SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT. THEREFORE, CLAIMS BASED ON APPROVED SUBMITTAL WHICH CONTAIN ERRONEOUS EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONS, QUANTITIES, OR DIMENSIONS WILL NOT BE HONORED CONFLICTS: IF A CONFLICT EXISTS BETWEEN THE ELECTRICAL AND ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS WHICH PREVENT THE CONTRACTOR FROM EXECUTION OF THE DESIGN, OR ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONFLICTS WITH OTHER DISCIPLINES IN A WAY AS TO IMPOSE HARDSHIP ON OWNER OR UNDUE DIFFICULTY TO ONE OR ANOTHER OF THE TRADES, CONTRACTOR SHALL POINT OUT CONDITION IN WRITING AND SUBMIT TO APPROPRIATE MEMBER OF DESIGN WITH WORK WHERE CONFLICT EXISTS UNTIL DECISION HAS BEEN MADE AND DIRECTIVE ISSUED TO THE CONTRACTOR FROM APPROPRIATE AUTHORITY BIDDER INITIATED CHANGES: DISCREPANCIES OR CONFUSION DUE TO ELEMENTS FOUND IN DESIGN DOCUMENTS ARE TO BE NOTED BY BIDDERS, ALL COSTS TO CORRECT ACCOUNTED FOR IN BID, THESE COSTS SHOWN SEPARATELY, AND ERRORS LISTED AND SUBMITTED WITH BID. THIS IS SO THAT AN ADDENDUM MAY BE ISSUED TO ALL BIDDERS. THE INTENT OF THIS ENTRY IS TO ELIMINATE THE NEED FOR CHANGE AFTER THE CONTRACT IS GRANTED. SHOULD AN OBVIOUS AND PREVENTABLE ERROR BE NOTED AFTER THE BID WHICH COULD HAVE BEEN AVOIDED BY TIMELY ADDENDUM, COST FOR CORRECTION WILL BE BORN BY THE CONTRACTOR, LOW BIDDER NOTWITHSTANDING FIELD INITIATED CHANGES: FIELD CONDITIONS MAY DICTATE NEED FOR MINOR CHANGES IN ORDER TO BEST ACCOMMODATE TRUE INTENT OF THE DESIGN. PROVIDED THE CHANGE IS REQUESTED IN A TIMELY MANNER, AND IMPROVES THE PROJECT, DOES NOT INCREASE COSTS, PERMISSION MAY BE READILY GRANTED. HOWEVER, CHANGES WHICH DO NOTHING TO IMPROVE THE PROJECT, IE., LAST MINUTE SUBSTITUTIONS WITH EQUIVALENT OR INFERIOR PRODUCTS BECAUSE OF A PERCEIVED DELAY, WILL NO BE ACCEPTED SPECIFICATIONS 1. SCOPE: A. PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND WORKING INSTALLATION WITH ALL EQUIPMENT CALLED FOR IN PROPER OPERATING CONDITIONAL DOCUMENTS DO NOT SHOW OR LIST EVERY ITEM TO BE PROVIDED. IF AN ITEM IS NOT SHOWN OR LISTED AND CLEARLY NECESSARY FOR PROPER OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT WHICH IS SHOWN. PROVIDE LIKE ITEM WHICH ALLOWS THE SYSTEM TO FUNCTION PROPERLY AT NO ADDITIONAL COST B. PROVIDE, RENOVATE, OR RECONFIGURE PORTIONS OF EXISTING 3 -PHASE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AS INDICATED WITH CODE SIZE GROUNDING AS INDICATED C. FURNISH NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND ASSOCIATED GROUNDS, WIRING AND CONDUIT D. COORDINATE OUTLET AND CONDUIT LOCATIONS FOR TELEPHONE/DATA WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITH TELE/DATA VENDOR/INSTALLER E. PROVIDE RECEPTACLES. CONDUIT, WIRE, PLATES AND WIRING DEVICES AS SHOWN ON THE DOCUMENTS F. TESTING TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER, ARCHITECT AND TENANT OF ALL ELECTRICAL APPARATUS G. ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS FOR LINE VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER THIS CONTRACT, FURNISHED BY OWNER EQUIPMENT, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT AS INDICATED IN DOCUMENTS INCLUDING SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION AS PROJECT PROGRESSES H. WHERE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES ARE SHOWN TO BE REUSED, REPAIR, REPLACE AND RELAMP DAMAGED EQUIPMENT. MATCH (E) LAMPS OR, IF CALLED FOR REPLACE BALLASTS AND LAMPS WITH T8 LAMPS AND ELECTRONIC BALLASTS. IF LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE INDICATES WORK CONTRARY TO THIS DIRECTIVE, IT SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE I. OTHER WORK AS OUTLINED BY THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT OR SHOWN ON DOCUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONTRACT BUT NOT NECESSARILY NOTED IN THE ELECTRICAL DESIGN. SEE ALL OTHER TRADES DOCUMENTATION FOR RELATED WORK 2. RULES AND REGULATIONS: ALL WORK AND MATERIAL SHALL BE IN FULL RD LATEST RULES AND ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATES U 5 N REGULATI ONS OF THE STATE ADMINISTRATIVE CODES (E.G., TITLE 24), NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC), INFORM BUILDING CODE (UBC), AND MUNICIPAL ELECTRICAL CODES. 3. FEES AND PERMITS: OBTAIN AND PAY ALL LICENSES AND PERMITS 4. INSTALLATION (GENERAL): A. WORK INSTALLED TO ARCHITECTS SATISFACTION. WORK JUDGED NOT ACCEPTABLE SHALL BE CORRECTED OR REPLACED AT NO COST. B. WIRING SHALL BE INSTALLED CONCEALED WHEREVER POSSIBLE. IN UNFINISHED AREAS EXPOSED CONDUIT MAY BE USED WITH PERMISSION OF THE OWNER C. ALL WORK SHALL BE INSTALLED NEATLY. RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LEVEL AND STRAIGHT. CONNECTORS, LOCKNUTS, SCREWS, CLAMPS, JOINTS SHALL BE PROPERLY TIGHTENED D. CONDUIT, OUTLETS, AND EQUIPMENT: CLEAR BEAMS OF OBSTRUCTIONS. DO NOT CUT INTO OR REDUCE THE SIZE OF ANY LOAD - CARRYING MEMBER WITHOUT APPROVAL OF THE BUILDING OWNER AND /OR ARCHITECT. CHECK DRAWINGS AND WORK OF OTHERS TO PREVENT INTERFERENCE. ROUTING DEVIATIONS TO AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST. ALL CONDUITS SHALL RUN PARALLEL OR AT RIGHT ANGELES TO BUILDING WALLS, CEILINGS, OR BEAMS. CONDUITS SHOULD BE LOCATED ABOVE OR ADJACENT TO DUCTS, NO PENETRATION OF DUCTS PERMITTED. . • E. SLEEVES, CORING, CHASES, AND CONCRETE EXPANSION ANCHORS: 1) PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED SLEEVES, CORING, CHASES, CONCRETE EXPANSION ANCHORS, ETC -, BEFORE ANY ROUGH -IN; BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CORRECT LOCATION, INSTALLATION OF SAME 2) SLEEVES AND CHASES ARE PROHIBITED IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS EXCEPT WHERE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE OWEN AND /OR ARCHITECT 3) PENETRATIONS IN THE PR-OR POST TENSIONED CONCRETE SLABS MUST AVOID TENNONS, OBTAIN BUILDING MANAGEMENT APPROVAL PRIOR TO PENETRATING. X -RAY TO LOCATED TENONS AS REQUIRED F. CUTTING, MARKING, AND REPAIRING: 1) ALL CUTTING. CORING. AND REPAIRING. INCLUDING STRUCTURAL REINFORCING, NECESSARY FOR THIS WORK SHALL BE DONE BY THE TRADE RESPONSIBLE FOR CUTTING BUT UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE ELECTRICAL 2) NO CUTTING OR PATCHING DONE WITHOUT APPROVAL REPAIR DAMAGE DONE TO ORIGINAL CONDITION 3) SEAL ALL NEW AND EXISTING OPENINGS INTO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS TO MAINTAIN FIRE RATING. REFER TO PENETRATION DETAILS IN THESE DOCUMENTS 5. WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING: A. BECAUSE MAIN SERVICE EQUIPMENT AS WELL AS DISTRIBUTION AND BRANCH PANELS MAY BE EXISTING, EXISTING SYSTEM SHALL REMAIN ACTIVE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. SUCH PORTIONS OF THE EXISTING SYSTEM DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF THIS CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE RESTORED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION 6. SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS: INTERRUPTION OF POWER SERVICE SHALL BE HELD TO A MINIMUM. ALL INTERRUPTIONS MUST BE SCHEDULED FOR OFF HOUR ONLY AND BE APPROVED IN WRITING WITH THE OWNER, ONE (1)WEEK IN ADVANCE, OF SHUTDOWN 7. COORDINATION WITH OTHERS: NO EXTRA COMPENSATION ALLOWED FOR EXTRA WORK RESULT MG FROM LACK OF COORDINATION WITH OTHERS OR FAILURE TO VERIFY LOCATIONS AND MEASUREMENTS ON THE JOB SITE 8. MATERIAL (GENERAL): A. ALL MATERIALS TO BE NEW, PACKED IN ORIGINAL CONTAINER, INSTALLED AND TURNED OVER FREE OF RUST, CORROSION, OR DEFECTS. PROPERLY STORE ALL MATERIALS B. MATERIALS REQUIRE APPROVAL FROM UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES OR FORM OTHER STATE APPROVED AGENCIES C. MANUFACTURE'S RECOMMENDATIONS: ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED INSTRUCT ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. ALL WORK NOT SO INSTALLED SHALL BE REINSTALLED IN CORRECT MANNER AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER 9. SHOP DRAWINGS: A. WITHIN (10) DAYS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT, SUBMIT (6) COPIES OF A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL MATERIALS USED ON THE PROJECT, SPECIFYING MANUFACTURER, GRADE, TRADE NAME, CATALOG NUMBER, AND ALL OTHER PERTINENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. PARTIAL LIST NOT ACCEPTABLE 11. A. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSE FOR HIS OWN ACCOUNTS. NO APPROVAL OF MATERIALS IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF QUANTITIES B. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT USED FOR THIS OWR, IF REJECTED. DRAWINGS T BE REVISED AS DIRECTED AND RESUBMIT, FOR FINAL APPROVAL C. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW: C. D. 13. 1) PHYSICAL SIZE AND ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT IN SPACE ALLOWED. 2) WIRING DIAGRAMS OF ALL EQUIPMENT SHOWING ALL CIRCUIT DEVICES, CONDUCTOR SIZE, TYPE, ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, ETC 3) SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL COMPONENTS, INCLUDING LABELS FROM APPROPRIATE DESIGN FACILITIES 4) RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES E. FURNISH SIP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT DATA FOR•THE FOLLOWING: LIGHTING FIXTURES, PANELBOARDS, CONTROL DEVICES, FIRE/LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT, TRANSFORMERS, ALL TYPES OF WIRING DEVICES, OTHER EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL AS REQUESTED F. ALL MATERIALS OF A GIVEN TYPE. e.a.. WALL SWITCHES, PLATES. RECEPTACLES, ETC„ SHALL BE OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER WHOSE EQUIPMENT IS IN CONCERT WITH BUILDING STANDARDS AND ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS. MULTIPLE MANUFACTURERS FOR SAME PRODUCT NOT PERMITTED G. FURNISH (6) COPIES OF LIGHT FIXTURE CUTS (IN BROCHURE FORM AND INDEXED FLYLEAF IN FRONT). WHERE MULTIPLE TYPES OR CATALOG NUMBERS ARE SHOWN ON SHEETS, UNDERLINE OR OTHERWISE SUITABLE IDENTIFY PROPOSED EQUIPMENT H. DO NOT SUBMIT INFORMATION MORE THAN ONCE FOR EQUIPMENT ALREADY APPROVED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY ASKED. REPEATED SHOP DRAWING REVIEW OF ALREADY ACCEPTED EQUIPMENT WILL BE BACK CHARGED TO CONTRACTOR ANY MAY RESULT IN REJECTION OF EQUIPMENT 10. RACEWAYS: A. ALL POWER WIRING IN RACEWAYS B. INSTALLATION SCHEDULE: 1) INTERIOR CONCEALED: EMT (OR MC CABLE WHERE PERMITTED) 2) ALL FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: GALVANIZED FLEXIBLE CONDUIT- (INTERIOR); LIQUID- TIGHT FLEX (EXTERIOR, WET, OR VIBRATING EQUIPMENT) 3) EXPOSED UP TO 8' -0 ": EMT, IMC, RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AS REQUIRED BY OWNER OR LOCAL CODES 4) EXPOSED ABOVE 8' -0": EMIT (OR MC CABLE WHERE PERMITTED) 5) EIGHT WIRE ISOLATED GROUNDING SYSTEM: EMT OR MC CABLE (8 WIRE) (MC CABLE ONLY WHERE PERMITTED) 6) RIGID OR IMC: AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES OR ASS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS 7) CABLE TRAY : POWER AND TELE/DATA WIRING IN SEPARATE BARRIERED SECTION 8) UNDER FLOOR RACEWAY: TRIPLE DUCT WITH DEVICES FOR GENERAL AND TECHNICAL POWER AND TELE/DATA SYSTEM 9) 2- 1/2 "C. & ABOVE IMC OR RIGID 10) UNDERLAB: WRAPPED RIGID STEEL OR•SCHEDULE 40 PVC, IF PERMITTED (MINIMUM 3/4" C,) C. ALL CONDUIT MUST BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO PULLING WIRE D. RACEWAY MATERIALS: 1) RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (ONLY AS INDICATED OR REQUIRED BY LOCAL AUTHORITY): MANUFACTURERS; WALKER, NATIONAL, APPLE TON, TRIANGLE, ROME, GENERAL ELECTRIC. RIGID STEEL : GALVANIZED OR SHERHARDIZED. ALL FITTINGS THREADED. BENDS 1 -1/4 INCH OR LARGER: FACTORY. RUNNING AND EXPOSED THREADS NOT PERMITTED. REAM ALL CUTS. 2) ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING: MANUFACTURERS; SAME AS CONDUIT. GALVANIZED OR INSULTED THROATS. COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS WITH PLASTIC INSULATED THROATS. COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS SIZES 3/4 INCH AND LESS, SET SCREW, THREADED COMPRESSION; COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS SIZED 1 INCH AND ABOVE THREADED COMPRESSION TYPE OR SET SCREW TYPE. REAM ALL CUTS. BRANCH CIRCUITS FROM PANEL TO FIRST BOX IN SYSTEM REQUIRED TO BE EMT OR RIGID. UP TO AND INCLUDING 2" C ONLY 3) FLEXIBLE CONDUIT: MANUFACTURERS; SAME AS CONDUIT. GALVANIZED STEEL FITTINGS: "JAKE" AS MANUFACTURED BY W.F. CURLEE MFG. CO. 4) IF MC CABLE PERMITTED, ROUTE LOOSE WIRING FROM PANEL TO 12 "x12 "x4" PULL & TERMINATION BOX IN SPACE: USE 3/4 "C. MINIMUM. CORRECT WIRE QUANTITY MC CABLE PERMITTED FROM BOX TO OUTLETS AS PERMITTED BY CODE AUTHORITY AND TENANT. SIX AND EIGHT WIRE MC FOR SIX AND EIGHT WIRE SYSTEMS. DO NOT "MULTIPLE UP' TWO AND THREE WIRE MC. AFC CABLE OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL FOR CONCEALED LOCATIONS ONLY. PROVIDE PROPER COLOR CODING A. HOME RUNS WITCH CONNECT THE FIRST LIGHT FIXTURE OR RECEPTACLE WITH THE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANEL. HOME RUNS MUST BE IN RIGID CONDUIT. ALL WIRING WITHIN PARTITION CONSTRUCTION. ALL IN -WALL CONCEALED WIRING A. B. MUST BE RUN IN RIGID CONDUIT. WHERE INSTALLED ABOVE THE CEILING, ALL CABLE MUST BE INSTALLED IN A NEAT AN ORDERLY MANNER, AND SECURED AS REQUIRED BY CODE. B. 5) PROVIDE 360 DEG. EXPANSION JOINTS FOR CONDUIT RUNS CROSSING BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS UNLESS FLEXIBLE CONDUIT USED. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT PERMITTED INSIDE TENANT SPACE ONLY 6) OR CABLE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS SERIES 24 "x6" NOMINAL WITH CENTER DIVIDER SUPPORT SYSTEMS: RACEWAY SUPPORTED AT INTERVALS NOT OVER 10 -FEET. PROVIDE AT LEAST ONE SUPPORT NOT OVER 18- INCHES FROM EACH JOINT OR CHANGE IN DIRECTION. CLAMPS: ONE HOLE MALLEABLE IRON WITH CLAMP BACK IN EXPOSED AREAS. 2 -HOLE PIPE STRAPS IN CONCEALED AREAS. TRAPEZE HANGERS FOR MULTIPLE CONDUIT RUNS OR CABLE TRAY. CANDY CLIPS PERMITTED FOR MC CABLE ONLY WHERE LOCAL AUTHORITIES AND BUILDING OWNER PERMIT 12. OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES: A ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: STEEL CITY, APPLETON, RACO, PYLE NATIONAL, KILLARK AND BELL B. OUTLET BOXES: INTERIOR ONE PIECE STAMPED STEEL GALVANIZED. MINIMUM BOX SIZE: 4 -INCH OCTAGON OR SQUARE. PLASTER RINGS, EXTENSIONS PROVIDED WHERE NECESSARY 4 "5 X 2 -1/8 "D MINIMUM BOX SIZE FOR MORE THAN ONE DEVICE PROVIDE RING TO MATCH WIRING DEVICES NOTE: PRIOR TO COMPLETION, ANY AND ALL OUTLETS MAY BE MOVED BY ARCHITECT ONE TIME UP TO 10' -0" W/O COST TO OWNER OR TENANT WIRE: COPPER SIMILAR TO TRIANGLE. GENERAL WIRE, GENERAL ELECTRIC, ROME XHHW OR THHN/THWN. COLOR CODE TO MATCH EXISTING OR AS INDICATED ON SCHEDULE ON DWG El. NO WIRE SMALLER THAN #12 AWG FOR 120V AND ABOVE. PROVIDE #10 AWG WHEN LENGTH OF #12 WIRE EXCEEDS 100' OF ELECTRICAL DISTANCE. SOLID UP TO AND INCLUDING #8; #6 AND ABOVE STRANDED. ONLY SOLID WPE WILL BE ALLOWED AT ANY SCREW TERMINAL 14. GROUNDING: 18. 15. A. GROUNDING (CONDUIT ONLY NOT PERMITTED): 1) WHERE SHOWN: GROUNDING OF TWO TYPES: ISOLATED GROUNDING FOR ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT, EQUIPMENT GROUNDING FOR SAFE I Y SUPPOSES (PROVIDE (2) WIRES) 2) WHERE NOT SHOWN: EQUIPMENT GROUNDING FOR SAFETY PURPOSE (PROVIDE (1) WIRE) B. PROVIDE BOND WIRE (EG) IN ALL RADEWAYS, INCLUDING LIGHTING CIRCUITS. SIZE PER NEC 20-95 C. PROVIDE INSULATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING AS FOLLOW: 1) FOR STANDARD GENERAL USE 120V 3- -WIRE GROUNDING RECEPTACLE CONNECT GROUNDING SCREW ON DEVICE TO BOND WIRE AND TO BOX. (5 WIRE SYSTEM - 3 CONDUCTORS, 1 NEUTRAL, 1 EG) 2) FOR ISOLATED 120V 3 -WIRE GROUNDING RECEPTACLE CONNECT ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR DIRECTLY TO GREEN GROUNDING SCREW THAT IS ISOLATED FROM MOUNTING STRAP. CONNECT BOND WIRE AS DESCRIBED ABOVE AT B.1 (8 WIRE SYSTEMS - 3 CONDUCTORS, 3 NEUTRALS, 1 EG, 11G) 3) PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR LIGHT FIXTURES WITH SOLID- STATE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS WIRING, DEVICES, AND PLATES ( LEVITON, HUBBLELL): A. SWITCHES: 1) LEVITON DECORA SERIES, 20A 120/277V, ROCKER TYPE 2) WHITE FINISH OR MATCH EXISTING AS DIRECTED B. RECEPTACLES: 1) STANDARD: EQUAL TO HUBBELL #5362 OR LEVITON DECORA. WHITE FINISH OR TO MATCH EXISTING AS DIRECTED. PROVIDE G -1 FOR MAINTENANCE/ UTILITY ROOM AND KITCHEN EQUIPMENT WHERE WITHIN 6' -0" OF WATER 2) EQUAL TO BUBBELL #G- 5362ISP, (ORANGE OR WHITE W/ ORANGE DOT) FOR ISOLATED GROUND. PROVIDE FOR OFFICE USE, COMPUTERS, OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND FLOOR MONUMENTS FOR WORKING STATIONS. PROVIDE WITH INTEGRAL SURGE SUPPRESSION R FLOOR MONUMENTS: EQUAL TO WALKER SERIES: CELLULA LOOR MONUMENTS. Q 0 LKER 500 : S S 1) #513 ALL FOR POWER 2) #501 FOR DATA/TELEPHONE, WITH ATT. #106, BRUSH CHROME D. FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS: EQUAL TO WALKER 800 SERIES. PROVIDE CARPET FLANGES AS REQUIRED E. 3 -PHASE MOTOR DISCONNECT: EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 3110. ALL SAFETY SWITCHES SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY TYPE F. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE UL LISTED AND SUITABLE FOR THE APPLICATION. EQUIPMENT EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER OR DAMP LOCATIONS SHALL BE SO LISTED. ALL CABINETS HOUSING ELECTRONICS SHALL BE DUST TIGHT AND SO LISTED G. MANUAL MOTOR STARTING SWITCH: EQUAL TO SQUARE- D CLASS 2510 F, SM, OR T DEPENDING ON HP AND PHASE H. MAGNETIC STARTERS: EQUAL TO SQUARE -D CLASS 8536 WITH SOLID STATE OVERLOAD RELAY AND CONTROL TRANSFORMER TO SUIT CONTROL CONDITIONS I. PLATES: BAKELITE PLASTIC SMOOTH FINISH. EQUAL TO LEVITON OR HUBBELL J. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL WIRE (PER PHASE) FOR ALL CIRCUITS SERVING ISOLATED GROUND OUTLETS (8 WIRE SYSTEM) K. SURGE SUPPRESSION OUTLETS: EQUAL TO HUBBELL #531IS WHITE W /BLUE UL LISTED DUPLEX SUPPRESSION RECEPTACLE TRIANGLE) 125 20A U EX SUP C PTACLE 16. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS (OR AS INDICATED IN FIXTURE SCHEDULE): E A. FURNISH AND INS TALL FIXTURES COMPLETE WITH FITTINGS, STEMS, AND COMPONENT PARTS TO MAKE A COMPLETE INSTALLATION INCLUDING LAMPS OF THE TYPE AND WATTAGE CALLED FOR. LAMPS SHALL BE EQUAL TO GENERAL ELECTRIC, PHILIPS OR SYLVANIA B. BALLASTS: SOLID STATE, ELECTRONIC TYPE, UL LISTED, HIGH POWER FACTOR TYPE, EQUAL TO MAGNETIC B332IL (3 LAMP) B232IL (2-LAMP), OR ADVANCE DISCRETE VEL -2P32 -TIP (2 LAMP) OR VEL- 3P32 -TP (3 LAMP), OR APPROVED EQUAL MAXIMUM 10% THD. VOLTAGE AS INDICATED C. ALL FLUORESCENT LAMPS, T8, RAPID START, OR APPROVED EQUAL INCANDESCENT LAMPS RATED 130 VOLTS AND AS SPECIFIED. SPX35 LAMPS, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE D. COMPACT FLUORESCENT: PHILIPS OR EQUAL 2700K OR AS OTHERWISE INDICATED IN LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE E. INCANDESCENT: "A" BASE, PAR, R TYPE, OR AS NOTED MC CABLE AND SIMILAR PRE -WIRED ELECTRICAL CABLE ARE PROHIBITED IN THE FOLL(F.NREPAIR OR REPLACE ALL FIXTURES DESIGNATED TO BE REUSED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (IF REQUIRED): EXTENSION OF EXISTING LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM OR NEW SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS ALL DEVICES INDICATED IN DRAWINGS SHALL MATCH EXISTING PROVIDE ALL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE EXISTING SYSTEM WIRING REQUIREMENTS AND TEST FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION SUCCESSFUL FIRE ALARM BIDDER SHALL PREPARE DETAILED INSTALLATION DRAWINGS CAPABLE OF UL CERTIFICATION AS A SYSTEM FOR SUBMITTAL TO CITY FIRE OFFICIALS PRIOR TO ANY FIRE ALARM RUGH -IN CONSTRUCTION. OBTAIN OFFICIAL AGREEMENT FROM SAID OFFICIALS TO THE DESIGN AND METHODS TO BE EMPLOYED. THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS REQUIRED ALTHOUGH SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS TO LIMIT THE NEED FOR OTHER INFORMATION AS WELL 1) BATTERY CALCULATIONS. PROVIDE SUFFICIENT RECHARGEABLE GEL LL BATTERY BACKUP FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF 24 HOURS OPERATION AFTER LOSS OF ANY OTHER SOURCE OF POWER 2) SYSTEM MUST AS WELL SOUND AND FLASH ALARMS IN THE SPACE FOR MINIMUM OF 15 MINUTES AFTER THE 24 HOUR LOSS OF POWER HAS PASSED, HAVE 25% SPARE CAPACITY, AND BE ABLE TO BE ACTIVATED AND REPORT TO MAIN SYSTEM MONITOR FOR AT LEAST TWO MORE HOURS AFTER THE 15 MINUTE PERIOD OF ALARM HAS PASSED. ALL OF THIS WITHOUT BENEFIT OF COMMERCIAL POWER 3) VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS. PROVIDE STEP -BY -STEP CALCULATIONS INDICATING ALL LOADS, TAKING INTO ACCOUNT ALL WIRING AC /DC RESISTANCE, LENGTHS, AND LOADS. SHOW FORM OF CALCULATION USED AS WELL 4) SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS MATRIX. PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE MATRIX SYSTEM INDICATING REAL EVENT AND OPPOSE THAT EVENT AGAINST WHAT WILL BE THE EXPECTED RESPONSE BY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 5) ANNUNCIATION SCHEDULE INDICATE WHAT ZONE ANNUNCIATION MUST TAKE PLACE, SHOW LOCATION OF ENUNCIATOR, PROVIDE VERBIAGE EXPLAINING WHAT EACH ZONE IS IN TERMS OF DEVICE AND LOCATION 6) WHICH CONTROL ANEL TERMINALS PROVIDE NALS ARECONNECT WHICH INDICATE CONNECTED TO EACH TERMINAL AT EACH TYPE OF DEVICE. DIAGRAMS MUST BE SUCH THAT IT WILL BE CLEAR TO THE FIELD INSPECTOR THAT THE WIRING SYSTEM HAS BEEN PROPERLY TERMINATED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN ORDER TO OBTAIN NOT ONLY PROPER ALARM AND INITIATION SIGNALS BUT NOTIFICATION OF SHORT CIRCUIT OR CURRENT LOSS OR WIRE BREAKAGE IN ADDITION . 7) THIS INFORMATION MUST BE PRESENTED ON FACTORY AND UL CERTIFIABLE DRAWINGS TO ALL OF THE FOLLOWING: TO CITY FIRE OFFICIAL PLAN CHECKER, TO FIELD FIRE INSPECTOR FOR DETAILED TESTING AND VISUAL VERIFICATION OF SYSTEM, TO DESIGN ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT, TO OWNER FOR HIS RECORDS. ALL REQUIRED CORRECTIONS WILL BE CORRECTLY REFLECTED ON AS -BUILT DRAWINGS SUBMITTED AT PROJECT COMPLETION 8) ANY OTHER INFORMATION REQUIRED TO OBTAIN BUILDING AND OCCUPANCY PERMITS 19 20. FIRE ALARM DEVICES (IF REQUIRED): A. MUST BE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING CONTROL AND AUDIO EQUIPMENT PANELS; MUST BE IN CONFORMANCE W/ UL AND CSFM B. ALL MATERIALS WILL BE FURNISHED THROUGH BUILDING'S LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. PROVIDE POWER SUPPLY AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED C. ALL FIRE/LIFE SAFETY DEVICES ARE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO 110 CANDELA OUTPUT FOR STROBE LIGHTS EXIT LIGHTS: (SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE) DUAL LITE SERIES OR AS BUILDING STANDARD DICTATE GREEN ON WHITE/CLEAR OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. B. A. B. C. KEEP THE BUILDING CLEAN AND FREE OF REFUSE FROM THE WORK UNDER THIS SECTION. REFUSE AND WASTE MATERIAL MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE BUILDING IMMEDIATELY ALL PARTS OF THE EQUIPMENT TO BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND FREE FROM CEMENT, PAINT, GREASE, PLASTER AND DIRT. SURFACES TO BE PAINTED MUST BE THOROUGHLY SMOOTH AND CLEAN. ALL SURFACE FREE OR RUST ALL EQUIPMENT AND ALL WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE KEPT FREE FROM DAMAGE AND DIRT FORM THE WORK UNDER THIS SECTION 21. TRANSFORMERS: (WP WHERE REQUIRED) A. STANDARD DISTRIBUTION DRY TYPE: UL LISTED 150 DEGREE CELSIUS RISE, CLASS, AND SOUND RATING, KVA AS NOTED, STANDARD TAPS: (2) ABOVE AND (4) BELOW NOMINAL MANUFACTURER: SQUARE D OR APPROVED EQUAL B. K -RATED ISOLATION, NON - LINEAR, POWER CENTER TYPE: COPPER WINDINGS; DUAL THERMAL PROTECTION; TAPS: (2) ABOVE, (4) BELOW NOMINAL; OVERSIZED NEUTRAL; 97% MIN. EFFICIENCY; MULTIPLE ISOLATED SHIELDING, UL 1561 APPROVED. K- FACTOR OF 20 OR GREATER. 80 DEGREE CELSIUS MAXIMUM RISE. MGM OR APPROVED EQUAL 22 . C. BUCK/BOOST: UL LISTED, PROPER PHASING, MINIMUM KVA REQUIRED FOR LOAD UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, MINIMUM DIMENSIONS, PROPER GROUNDING AND O.C. PROTECTION. AME OR APPROVED EQUAL D. CONTROL AND OTHER SPECIALTY TRANSFORMERS: AS DESCRIBED ON THE DRAWINGS AND /OR AS REQUIRED TO ADEQUATELY PERFORM THE TASK IMPOSED. FURNISH INTEGRAL WITH EQUIPMENT WHERE AVAILABLE. COORDINATE WITH SUPPLIER A. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: 10,000A MINIMUM (120V) 14,000A MINIMUM (277V) B. FUSES: BUSSMAN ONLY, BELOW 100A: FRN -R AND FRS-R 100A & ABOVE: LPN -RK1 AND LPS -RK1 600A & ABOVE: (AS INDICADED). 23. BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD (PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR): EQUAL TO SQUARE D TUPE NQOB, NHEB, I -LINE. (CAPACITY AS INDICATED) CABINET: MINIMUM 20" WIDE, FACTORY KNOCKOUTS. FLUSH DOORS WITH CONCEALED HINGES. ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND ACCURATE TYPE WRITTEN DIRECTORY BEHIND PLASTIC PLATE ON INSIDE DOOR. KEY ALL PANELS THE SAME. CABINETS MADE OF COLD ROLLED SHEET STEEL, TRIM AND COVERS OF STRETCHER LEVELED STEEL. PROVIDE MULTIPLE BREAKERS WHERE REQUIRED. FACTORY LABEL ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND TERMINALS. INTERRUPTING RATING 14KA (277V) OR 10KA (120V) MINIMUM BUSSING: SILVER PLATED COPPER, SILVER PLATED CONTACTS PROVIDE SEPARATE COPPER EQUIPMENT AND ISOLATED GROUND BUSSES. SE GROUNDING DIAGRAM. TYPICAL ALL NEW PANELBOARDS. PROVIDE FACTORY MOUNTED IDENTIFICATION A. B. C. D. OVERCURRENT DEVICES MUST BE RATED FOR AVAILABLE FAULT LEVELS: E. MANUFACTURER: SQUARE D PREFERRED, SEMENS, OR GENERAL ELECTRIC ARE ACCEPTABLE A A AS ALTERNA TES F. LOAD CENTER PANELBOARDS ACCEPTABLE FOR RATINGS LESS THAN 100A AND IF APPROVED BY BUILDING G. 400A PANELBOARDS SHALL BE 1 -LINE CONSTRUCTION CAPABLE OF HOUSING 225/3 SUB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS H. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPLEMENT AS REQUIRED I. PROVIDE 200% NEUTRAL BUS WHERE ISOLATED GROUND BUS (IG) IS CALLED FOR J. ALL CIRCUIT SCHEDULES BREAKERS SHALL BE LABELED, AS TO TYPE OF LOAD AND LOCATION. PENCIL ACCEPTABLE, UNLESS TYPEWRITTEN LABELS REQUIRED BY BUILDING K. ALL CIRCUITS AND CIRCUIT WIRING SHALL BE LABELED IN PANEL L. CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE ALL PHASES ON EACH PANELBOARD TO WITHIN 7% 24. EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS FOR VARIOUS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN TERMINAL LOCATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED. PULL STRINGS REQUIRED IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS 25. RECORD DRAWINGS: A. MAINTAIN CLEAN, UNDAMAGED SET OF REPRODUCIBLE ORIGINALS AND BLUEPRINTS OF THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. MARK THE SETS WITH RED ERASABLE PENCIL AS WORK PROGRESSES TO SHOW THE ACTUAL INSTALLED WORK WHERE INSTALLATION VARIES SUBSTANTIALLY FROM THE WORK AS ORIGINALLY SHOWN B. MARK SPECIFICATIONS TO INDICATE APPROVED SUBSTITUTIONS. CHANGE ORDERS, ACTUAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS USED C. DO NOT USE RECORD DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES; PROTECT RECORD DRAWINGS FORM DETERIORATION AND LOSS INA SECURE LOCATION. PROVIDE ACCESS TO RECORD DOCUMENTS FOR REVIEW AND REFERENCE DURING NORMAL WORKING HOURS FOR THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION PERIOD D. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION, TRANSFER ALL AS -BUILT INFORMATION TO REPRODUCIBLE SEPIA DRAWINGS AND SUBMIT TO OWNER FOR RECORD. INCLUDE MARKED UP PRINTS 26. OWNER FURNISHED ELECTRIFIED FURNITURE OR OTHER EQUIPMENT: F xPIRfs DEC 2 0 2009 1901 NewportBlvd..suite #300 Costa Mesa, Ca. 92627 `. Ph. 949.698.1400 Fax 949.698.1433 EM www.littleonline.com This drawing and the design shawl are the property of Little DiivrJZfred Architectural Coiuulting. The reproduction, ccoing or other use of this drawing nithout their written consent is prohibited and any infringement hill be subject to legal action. dp CLIENT NAME HHH lic: k t ? ii 0 y '' 0 AMERICA, c. ro $1 d PROJECT :TEAM. PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE PROJECT MANAGER DRAWN BY AP /FL cr 12/21/07 © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 -410.2858 FAX 817 - 251.8411 PL, rolisnw NO REASON I DATE WHERE USED, CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY INVESTIGATE ALL ASPECTS OF USER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT WITH CAREFUL AND SPECIAL ATTENTION TO ELECTRIFIED FURNITURE WHETHER INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR OR NOT. PROPER INTERFACE BETWEEN CONTRACTOR A � INSTALLED ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND FURNITURE SYSTEM SHALL BE SPECIFICATIONS C w CA TION S COORDINATED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. OBTAIN INSTALLATION LITERATURE ` - " e ms • AND COMPLETELY UNDERSTAND SYSTEM PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN 27. GUARANTEE: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE THE ENTIRE ELECTRICAL ^. •`.' �/ INSTALLATION IN COMPLETE WORKING ORDER, FREE FORM ANY DEFECTIVEP, y4, MATERIAL, WORKMANSHIP, OR FINISH. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR OR < •( REPLACE WITHOUT CHARGE, ALL DEFECTS DUE TO FAULTY WORKMANSHIP �d OR MATERIAL FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER JAN 0 8 2008 625-4089-01 E5.6 . , ^'�n *x �h a •Y Vii. ..- i:. ='�- °,y ^ -' s:'� =r - a ..... � .��h`��� .r_ .. . SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM NOTE: ZONE 1 ZONE 2 rELRI (NON -SALES AREA) [ELR1 , ZONE 3 —[F] [F] (FIRE ALARM PULL STATION) F] ]—[S] [S] --[S] (FIRE ALARM AUDIONISUAL STROBE) ZONE 5 FS (WATER FLOW SWITCH) (IF APPLICABLE) FACP] (6 ZONES MINIMUM) > TO MALL FACP SYSTEM 1. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS TO HIRE MALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LAYOUT AS PER MALL, CITY, NFPA CODE REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS FROM THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THIS PROJECT.FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE ALL RELATED REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. . 2. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS BY SEPARATE PERMIT. FIRE ALARM GENERAL NOTES 1. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE UL LISTED AND APPROVED BY LOCAL FIRE OFFICIAL. 2. FIRE ALARM WARNING SYSTEM SHALL BE APPROVED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT. 3. ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING TO BE IN CONDUIT. 4. FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL RELAYS AND DRY CONTACTS FOR HVAC UNITS AS REQUIRED. RELAYS SHALL SHUT -DOWN HVAC UNITS UPON ANY ZONE ALARM. 5. TENANT'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE FINAL TESTED BY THE LOCAL BUILDING AND FIRE MARSHALL AND WITNESSED BY LANDLORD'S ON -SITE REPRESENTATIVE. 6. LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AT THE TENANTS SOLE COST AND EXPENSE. 7. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH ALL TRADES INCLUDED BUT NOT LIMITED TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING. FIRE SPRINKLER AND STRUCTURAL CONTRACTORS. INSTALL ALL WORK TO CLEAR NEW AND EXISTING ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. NO ITEM SUCH AS PIPE, DUCT, ETC. IS TO BE IN CONTACT WITH ANY EQUIPMENT. 8. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DEMOLITION WORK 9. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT FIXTURE LOCATION. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CUT SHEETS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR THAT DEVIATE FROM SPECIFIED ITEM FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE PURCHASE OF ANY SUCH EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES. 11. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF SMOKE DETECTORS AND FIRE ALARM INTERFACE PANEL IN TENANTS DEMISED PREMISES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE MADE FOR ANY EXTRAS DUE TO CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO VISIT THE JOB SITE AND /OR FAILURE TO PREDETERMINE ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS BID. 12. ACCESS TO ALL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE PROVIDED TO MEET CODE AND SERVICE/MAINTENANCE EASE. 13. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY WITH LOCAL CODES AS TO THE REQUIREMENT /INSTALLATION OF THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. 14. THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE PRETESTED PER LANDLORD'S CRITERIA AND LOCAL AUTHORITY. 15. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THE PROPER WORKING ORDER OF THE SYSTEM(S) AND MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. 16. FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE UL LISTED FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS AROUND ALL CONDUIT PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS. PENETRATIONS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF UL DETAILS WL1001 (UNINSULATED WALL) AND 5039 (INSULATED WALL). 1. 2. 3. TO FACP ZONE 3 NOTES: A- 41 FACP TO FACP ZONE 1 TO FACP: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS BY SEPARATE PERMIT. FIRE ALARM CODED NOTES TO FACP ZONE 2 CD DUCT CONTINOT U CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT DETECTOR TO FIRE ALARM rniN L uv ors t,=. TENANT LIFE SAFETY PANEL WITH BATTERY BACK -UP AND A MINIMUM OF 6 ZONES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL SHOULD BE TIED -IN WITH THE EXISTING MALL CENTRAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE LANDLORD ENGINEER ALL FINAL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION. ® FIRE ALARM HORN /STROBE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4 FIRE ALARM PULL STATION FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. U CEILING SMOKE DETECTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. FIRE ALARM STROBE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. [� TENANT LIFE SAFETY SPEAKER. FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE LOCAL FIRE AUTHORITY PRIOR TO THE START OF THE SYSTEM DESIGN. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHOWN IS NOT INTENDED TO REPRESENT THE FINAL SYSTEM DESIGN. THE SYSTEM SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND INTENDED TO BE USED BY THE SELECTED FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR TO SHOW THE BASIC CRITERIA FOR HIS BID. THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL DO THE ACTUAL SYSTEM DESIGN AND SUBMIT IT TO THE LOCAL FIRE AUTHORITY FOR APPROVAL. THE SUBMITTED DESIGN SHALL INCLUDE COMPLETE LAYOUT DRAWINGS. DEVICE LOCATIONS. DEVICE RATINGS. VOLTAGE DROP AND BATTERY CALCULATIONS. CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM, AND ALL OTHER REQUIREMENTS TO COMPLY WITH THE LOCAL FIRE ALARM AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS. ELR RELAY FS Ei O IFF =A - =TY = 'F' E\ ; CF _INE I A\ SI _I _.CWN :__A( w4 _ I _,04 SWI L Fire Alarm Plan 1/4" = 1' -0" FIRE ALARM LEGEND FACP I A \RU `AA\ . \ ''III ATI`'N, +'R '.F.F. C =LING A ::. \T= : -I(r :EL =C T IC S A(:I E I ;ETE :T(;h TO FACP.. DO - IR = A AI \A I ' =N AV R ° =; = TC: _= 7`cr1. tC CN U_\'li _ C !L 7 ; A.I .I :(,CT N: 11N - E SN:)<= :E :C 7 1R: F3 A :H E. = H:i E -(. 15:1. HD ,._ ,= Vl 1 F ? ; A. . F1=- \I ARN \TRH" AV' WITH R\ - TF =" . I -:NISI L_: A \. I\_ A___U ?' I dL ALJkv C,\II°F. ILl'. :.I \ATE WI - I- LA\ :L:' I) ALL FINAL SE3JEV2 == ( ;F NO»TH TO FACP EXPIRES DEC 2 0 2009 1901 Newport Blvd.: suite # . 300 .: .;: ;: Costa Mesa, Ca. 92627: ..._.. Ph:. 949.698.1400 Fax 949.698.1433: s This drawing and the design shown are the property of Little Dizer]•ified Architectural Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other rue of this riming ii tbout their written consent is prohibited and any infringement Hill be subject to legal action. dp CLIENT NAME PRO]ECI' TEAM :� <_z:::� PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE HHH PROJECT MANAGER EM , , �a r,. DRAWN BY AP/FL www.Iittleonline.corn © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY. SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817- 410 -2858 FAX 817 -251 -8411 trTA tct EUNGARZZS \ n YO y �REVISION5�.(.� _ `��`- _•,�`"'" - _.:.. _ ... = -y ysY;� r _ 12/21/07 REASON 625 - 4089 -01 roromEmmomstamants (FIRE ALARM PLAN JAN 08 Zou DATE pRO]ECENEIM6Ef :,.�,-h�. - :1558E; DATE � "...�wY�`::.�`�.$NEET:.NO:�a�w, �...,�.,.._...''�5?:�r� "•�..- E6.0 4. 9. M1.0 • 6 \ MECHANICAL 3D S.: CODED NOTES O EXTEND AND CONNECT 14 "0 S.A. PRIMARY DUCT TO EXISTING MAIN S.A. DUCT.FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION PRIOR TO BID AND CONSTRUCTION. O EXTEND AND CONNECT 6 "0 EXHAUST DUCT TO EXISTING MAIN EXHAUST DUCT. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO BID AND CONSTRUCTION. O 3 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PAINT THE DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES TO MATCH THE COLOR OF THE CEILING 1. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL CODES, LAWS, ACTS AND ALL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, LANDLORD'S CRITERIA AND AS PER LATEST EDITIONS OF ASHRAE AND SMACNA. 2 • THE COMPLETED INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLI- CABLE INDUSTRY STANDARDS OF GOOD PRACTICE AND SAFETY; AND THE MANUFACTURER'S STRICTEST RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT AND PRO- DUCT APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION. 3 • THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, LICENSES, DOCUMENTS AND SERVICES RELATED TO INSTALLATION OF THE WORK 5. ALL WORK SHALL BE LOCATED TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES PROVIDE ADEQUATE CLEARANCE FOR ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, PROPER OPERATION AND SERVICE OF EQUIPMENT. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE AND THOROUGHLY INSPECT ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS TO INSURE THAT THE WORK REPRESENTED ON THE DRAWINGS AND IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS CAN BE INSTALLED AS INDICATED. 7. VERIFY LOCATION OF ANY PENETRATION OF ROOF WITH LANDLORD. ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS, PATCHING, AND FLASHING SHALL BE BY LANDLORD'S ROOFER AT MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR EXPENSE. PROVIDE A READY -TO -USE SYSTEM WITH ALL WORK GUARANTEED IN WRITING AGAINST DEFECTIVE WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM TURN OVER TO OWNER. 8. LOCATIONS OF HVAC EQUIPMENT AND DUCTS SHOWN ARE SCHEMATIC ONLY. VERIFY STRUCTURAL DETAILS AND OTHER DETAILS THAT WILL AFFECT ROUTING AND PLACEMENT OF THESE COMPONENTS. IF MORE SUPPORTS ARE NEEDED FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT, COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECT. ALL DUCT SIZES SHOWN ARE CLEAR INSIDE. ALL DUCTS TO BE SHEET METAL DUCTS AS PER ASHRAE AND SMACNA GUIDELINES. IMRE EMI MOEN MEI= MEIN !� 3 IMENNEINEIME 1 14 "o 10 HVAC GENERAL NOTES FPVAV -1 FPVAV C- 22'X22" 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL STENCIL TENANT NAME AND SPACE NUMBER ON THE UNIT. G . D -6"X6 13. ALL SUPPLY DIFFUSERS AND RETURN GRILLES PASSING THROUGH FIRE RATED CEILING SHALL HAVE APPROVED FIRE DAMPER. r INSTALLATION ACCEPTANCE MAY BE SUBJECT TO CONSTRUCTION REVIEW BY AN INDEPENDENT AIR CONDITIONING FIRM. 10. PROVIDE PROPER DUCT TRANSITIONS FOR ACTUAL HVAC UNITS INSTALLED. ROOF PENETRATIONS, TO BE MADE AS PER LL. SPECS. VERIFY DETAILS WITH L.L.. 11. REMOVE AND DISPOSE ALL UNUSED PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND ACCESSORIES. DO NOT ABANDON. 12. COORDINATE ACTUAL LOCATIONS OF DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES WITH CEILING DETAILS AND OTHER FEATURES SUCH AS LIGHTING FIXTURES ETC. THAT MAY AFFECT PLACEMENT OF THE HVAC SYSTEM COMPONENTS. 14. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS AS SHOWN ON THE PLAN AT A . MINIMUM OF 3FT -4FT MAXIMUM AFF (VERIFY LOCAL CODE). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE WIRING AND CONTROLS AS REQUIRED. 15. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY ALL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING. COORDINATE WITH MALL REPRESENTATIVE FOR INTERLOCKING WITH MALL CONTROL SYSTEM (IF REQUIRED). 17. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST, START -UP AND BALANCE THE SYSTEM(S) AND MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED TO INSURE PROPER WORKING ORDER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO SUBMIT 3 COPIES OF THE AIRNWATER BALANCING REPORT. SUCH BALANCING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT AIRNVATER BALANCING CONTRACTOR, CERTIFIED BY THE ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL. 20 "x18" 12" NOTE : PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION/ BID THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THIS SITE AND FIELD VERIFY THE EXISTING LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF ANY LANDLORD PROVIDED, OR EXISTING, OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES THROUGH ROOF, LANDLORD PROVIDED CHILLED /HOT WATER PIPING MAINS, TOILET EXHAUST MAINS, OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK, CONDENSATE LINE MAINS, ETC. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ANY! CONDITIONS WHICH MAY CONFLICT WITH THE DESIGN SHOWN ON THESE PLANS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. tl� A -12 450 CFM A -12 450 CFM 0 18 "0 M1.0 M1.0 0. 1/4" = �,_o„ 1/4" W 1' -0" ,Igieici „ a�:•:•�••iTii HAWATIFA Al 3., • D-6"X6' 2. ALL WORK SHALL BE SCHEDULED WITH LANDLORD'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE. 3 D -6"X6" 1 10" 10" MECHANICAL PLAN SPRINKLER NOTES 3. ALL SYSTEM SHALL BE CHARGED AND OPERATIONAL WHEN THE CONTRACTOR IS NOT ON THE PREMISES. 5. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A SPRINKLER DESIGN AND AN INSTALLED SYSTEM ACCORDING TO NFPA 13. 6. STORAGE HEIGHT SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 18" BELOW THE SPRINKLER HEAD. THE REAR STORAGE WALLS SHALL BE MARKED TO INDICATE STORAGE HEIGHT, MAINTAINING THE 18" BELOW THE SPRINKLER HEADS. 4. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WHICH REVEALS THE LOCATION OF ALL THE RELEVANT EXISTING SPRINKLER HEADS, LIGHT FIXTURES, AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSERS, RETURN GRILLES AND EXISTING ITEMS, SUCH AS DUCTWORK THAT MIGHT DEFLECT SPRINKLER'S SPRAY PATTERNS. VERIFY HEIGHT OF SPRINKLER HEADS ABOVE STORAGE PLATFORMS. II 11 I I A -10 320 CFM 1. LANDLORD APPROVED CONTRACTOR SHALL BE EMPLOYED BY THE TENANT TO MODIFY, INSTALL SYSTEM AND PREPARE CONTRACTS DOCUMENTS PER CODE AND LANDLORD'S INSURER APPROVAL. D -6 "X6" I A - 320 CFM NORTH • GJS J'� O ti 44 " . ONAL �.:. E XPIRES D -6"X6" Ii 1) oil 14" SD P.O.C. ■ pa, k.,1 • __ FPVAV -1 NEW C - 22 "X22' EXISTING 10 "o S.A. R.A. SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER EXISTING RETURN AIR GRILLE A.P. ACCESS PANEL E.A. SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER NEW RETURN AIR GRILLE DOOR UNDERCUT EXISTING (N) NEW (L) LINED 10 "o EXISTING AIR GRILLE THERMOSTAT DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR POINT OF CONNECTION It A -10 A -10 385 CFM 385 CFM • "NOTE The Owner reserves the right to check construction compliance with plans and specifications. Should the owner find corrective work to be necessary, he will notify contractor of such work in writing and expect compliance performed with due diligence. If any corrective work is deemed to be necessary, the cost of reinspections will be borne by the contractor. If work is required by Owner in order to improve, change or correct air conditioning operational conditions due to: part malfunction, warranty or other inability to provide the comfort conditions required by the store, contractor shall be directed by Lucky Brand Jeans, to address this work in a timely manner. If it becomes evident that the contractor can not accomplish the task, then after 72 hours of written notice, the owner may at his discretion take over such work and backcharge the contractor for any corrective work that was required due to lack of performance, workmanship and/or adherence to plans and specifications." LEGEND AND SYMBOLS (N) (E) -A -10- (G.8 wain III ..x 1111 .� NEW DUCTWORK NEW DUCTWORK EXISTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN EXISTING DUCTWORK TO BE REMOVED MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER ■ NE MVD • AFD APPROVED FIRE DAMPER CFSD -0 ABD AUTOMATIC BACKDRAFT DAMPER DIFFUSER TYPE /NECK SIZE CFM REQUIRED MERC L D ARCHI TECTURA: CORSULTLNG- :i =' :`. 1901 Newpo Blvd. suite #300 `Costa Mesa, Ca. .92627 -. Ph 949.698.1400 -_Fax 949.698.1433_ This droning and the design 'balm are the properly of Little Dizers edArehitectiemJConnrlling. The reproduction, copying or other life of this drnning urtbout their uritten consent is probibiled and any iifringement ni/l he suYect to legal action CLIENT NAME • PRD]ECT.TEAM: :::: PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE HHH EM www.littleonline.com Q) L , - yt.t • 0 Y s o DUNGAREES iv. I .. \— iriGx'Ci3 D F PROJECT MANAGER DRAWN BY SG /GM NO © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 -410 -2858 FAX 817 -251 -8411 REASON : ;sHEET7 IIL MECHANICAL PLAN JAN 0 8 2088 DATE PRO]ECTNUMBER:�.*•'�;:: : - 625- 4089 --01 'L550E.DA'IEs�c,:�firr:;.� _SHEE'ENO; 12/21/07 M1.0 �� AIR FLOW (R.A. OR S.A.) 450 MECHANICAL 3D VIEW • • • " , , • ... ' •„„ „ • „ • • „ • • • • • • • , fr" „ •-• , " ••••' • • • , • • .• •," •• .••,, • • ' . • , •• • , • • r •• ' • „ , ,-• ". • `, . „ . • • • • " , ' • , ' • • , , ., • , , • • .,. z „ • : .„. •-• • ' • •,. „, • poS 011 • '' • •• . • , , • EXPIRES 1)Fr 9ri1c DIVERS1E' lErt 1.11MM.111111.1.1.1.=.11111 _ 1901 Newport Blvd. suite #300 - . • Costa Mesa, Ca. 92627 Ph. 949.698.1400 Fax 949.698.1433 www.littleonline.com Thir draping and the design shawl are the properly of Little Diversified Architectural Consulting. The reproduction, copng or other use of this draping mitbout their nntten consent is pmhibited and any ily5ingen2ent mill be subject to legal action. dp Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817-410-2858 FAX 817-251-8411 CLIENT NAME • 0 nuNG.4nErs „ Cr TOUGH - PROIECT NAME .•-• .• •••:- '"' ••• • PRINCIPAL IN CFIARGE HHH PROJECT MANAGER EM DRAWN BY SG/GM NO REASON DATE :),,,MECHANICAL 3D VIEW JAN 08 2008 625-4089-01 12/21/07 M1.1 HEAT GAIN CALCULATION DATA PROJECT NAME LUCKY BRAND JEANS- SOUTHCENTER, TUKWILA, WA SPACE NAME SALES AREA NON -SALES AREAS AREA (SQ. FT.) 2,113 339 CEILING HEIGHT (FT.) Varies varies VOLUME (CU. FT.) 48,599 5,424 varies FACTOR QUANTITY BTUH FACTOR QUANTITY BTUH SENSIBLE GAINS QUANTITY BTUH EXTERIOR LOSSES 0 0 ROOF 0.1 0 0 0.1 0 GLASS (SOLAR) -NORTH 0.95 0 0 ROOF 0.1 0 GLASS (SOLAR) -SOUTH 0 0 0 5 WALL 0 0 GLASS (SOLAR) -EAST 0 0 0 6 GLASS 0 0 GLASS (SOLAR) -WEST 0 0 0 7 PARTITION 0 0 SKYLIGHT 0 0 0 8 CEILING 0 0 GLASS (CONVECTION) 1.13 0 0 9 OUTSIDE AIR 0 0 WALL - NORTH 0.08 0 0 10 SAFETY FACTOR 0 0 WALL -SOUTH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALL - EAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 WALL - WEST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.08 PARTITION 0 0 0 0 14 0 0.95 FLOOR 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 PEOPLE 250 42 10,500 250 1 250 0 INFILTRATION VENT 0 0 0 0 17 0 19 LIGHTS - 3.41 6,339 21,616 3.41 1,017 3,468 20 EQUIPMENT 4 1,000 4,000 4 1000 4,000 21 SAFETY FACTOR 0.03 6,339 1,083 0.03 1,017 232 22 OUTSIDE AIR 0.22 0 0 0.22 0 0 23 SUBTOTAL (4 THRU 16) 37,199 7,950 LATENT GAINS 24 PEOPLE 200 42 • 8,400 200 1 200 25 INFILTRATION VENT 0 24 0 \ti _.. h 0 26 SAFETY FACTOR 0.03 .: 252 0.03 6 27 OUTSIDE AIR 0.14 0 0 0.14 0 0 28 SUBTOTAL (18 THRU 21) 8,652 206 SUMMARY 29 TOTAL LOAD 45,851 8,156 30 SENSIBLE HEAT FACTOR 0 0.97 31 SUPPLYAIRA T(° F.) 20 • • 20 29 SUPPLY AIRQUANTITY(CFM) 1,714 366 30. CFM /SQ. FT. 0.81 1.08 - 31 O.S.A SENSIBLE HEAT 0.87 0 0 0.87 0 0 32 O.S.A. LATENT HEAT 0.54 0 0 0.54 0 0 33 FANS (HP) 1 2,545 1 2,545 34 34 ROOM GRAND TOTAL LOAD 48,396 10,701 36 37 ROOM GRAND TOTAL CFM HEAT LOSS CALCULATION DATA WEll PROJECT NAME LUCKY BRAND JEANS- SOUTHCENTER, TUKWILA, WA SPACE NAME SALES AREA NON -SALES AREAS 1 AREA (SQ. FT.) 2,113 339 2 CEILING HEIGHT (FT.) varies varies 3 VOLUME (CU. FT.) 45,034 5,376 57 FACTOR QUANTITY BTUH FACTOR QUANTITY BTUH EXTERIOR LOSSES DAY CYCLE 4 ROOF 0.1 0 0 0.1 0 0 5 WALL 0.08 0 0 0 0 0 6 GLASS 0.95 0 0 0 0 0 7 PARTITION 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 CEILING 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 OUTSIDE AIR 1.085 0 0 1.085 0 0 10 SAFETY FACTOR 0.03 0 0 0.03 0 0 11 SUBTOTAL (4 THRU 10) 0 0 0 0 0 0 NIGHT CYCLE 12 ROOF 0.1 0 0 0 0 13 WALL 0.08 0 0 0 0 0 14 GLASS 0.95 0 0 0 0 0 15 PARTITION 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 CEILING 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 SAFETY FACTOR 0.03 0 0 0.03 0 0 18 SUBTOTAL (12 THRU 17) 0 0 0 0 0 0 INTERIOR GAINS DAY CYCLE 19 LIGHTS (50% CREDIT) 3.41 3.41 6,339 10,808 3.41 1,017 1,734 20 OTHER (EQUIPMENT) 4 1,000 4,000 4 1,000 4,000 21 SUBTOTAL (19 AND 20) 14 5,734 NET HEAT LOSS DAY CYCLE 22 ROOM LOAD 0 0 23 AVERAGE LOAD /SQ. FT. 0 ^,,� 0 24 \ti _.. h I • 25 TENANT TOTAL HEAT LOSS .: '1...t Via' NIGHT CYCLE 26 TENANT TOTAL HEAT LOSS / 0 VAV TERMINAL BOX SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL SIZE CFM WEIGHT (LBS) REMARKS FPVAV -1 TITUS D1 Q 2710 50 "E -stat" THERMOSTAT WITH REMOTE TEMPERATURING SENSOR. EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE MARK MAN AND MODEL FLOW (CFM) S.P. (IN.H2O) ELECTRICAL REMARKS VOLT /PH WATTS CEF -1 BROAN MODEL 676 100 0.125 120/1 57 INTERLOCKED WITH LIGHT SWITCH WORK INCLUDED: EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS. BID AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE BASED ON SUCH REQUIREMENTS, DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL MECHANICAL WORK WITH THAT OF OTHER TRADES ON THE PROJECT PREVENTING UNNECESSARY CONFLICTS OR DELAYS DURING CONSTRUCTION. IF FOR ANY REASON EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO BE RE -USED NEEDS REPLACEMENT PARTS, THIS COST IS TO BE COVERED UNDER ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT AND WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AS AN EXTRA COST OR EXPENSE. CONTRACTOR MUST INSPECT ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE RE -USED AT TIME OF BIDDING OR NEGOTIATING PERIOD. ,CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE THE SITE, COMPARE IT WITH DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE SUBMITTING A BID. NO ALLOWANCE WILL SUBSEQUENTLY BE MADE IN BEHALF OF THIS CONTRACTOR BY REASON OF ANY ERROR ON HIS PART. CODES AND STANDARDS: ALL CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, AND OTHER LEGAL REQUIREMENTS WITH WHICH COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES SHALL BE ADHERED TO. SCOPE A. THE WORK COVERED BY THIS SPECIFICATION INCLUDES THE COMPLETE HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. B. THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED UNDER THE HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS CONSISTS OF FURNISHING ALL LABOR AND MATERIAL FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF ALL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FOR TENANT SPACE. THE WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: 1. HEATING /COOLING UNITS 2. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 3. DUCTWORK AND AIR CONTROL 4. USE OF CRANE TO PLACE ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT (WHEN REQUIRED) GENERAL: A. THIS SPECIFICATION IS INCLUSIVE FOR EACH ITEM REQUIRING ALL LABOR, MATERIAL, AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO PROPERLY INSTALL, ALTER, ADJUST, AND PUT IN OPERATION, THE COMPLETE HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. B. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROPER LAYOUT AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE WORK INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT. LAWS, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS: A. ALL SYSTEMS IN ALL AND /OR PART SHALL CONFORM TO ALL PERTINENT LAWS, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS OF ALL BODIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AT ALL GOVERNING LEVELS, NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING IN THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS TO THE CONTRARY. IN CASE OF CONFLICT BETWEEN GOVERNING LEVELS, THE MORE STRINGENT LAWS SHALL APPLY. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY ALL FEES AND OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY ANY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION IN CONNECTION WITH HIS WORK MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL BE OF THE TYPE AND SHALL MEET THE T IA AND CAPACITIES OF EQUIPMENT MATERIALS C SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL MA Q S EQUIPMENT UTILIZED SHALL BE MANUFACTURED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. B. ALL EQUIPMENT OFFERED UNDER THESE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE LIMITED TO PRODUCTS REGULARLY PRODUCED AND RECOMMENDED FOR SERVICE, IN ACCORDANCE WITH ENGINEERING DATA, RATINGS, OR OTHER COMPREHENSIVE LITERATURE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE PUBLIC AND IN EFFECT AT THE TIME OF OPENING OF BIDS. C. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR TYPE AND CAPACITY OF EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT USED. WORKMANSHIP: A. ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER MEETING THE ACCEPTED STANDARDS OF THE INDUSTRY. THE WORK SHALL BE DONE BY SKILLED CRAFTSMAN. CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTING: UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE LANDLORD CRITERIA, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING REQUIRED IN CONNECTION WITH HIS WORK ALL FINISHED SURFACES THAT ARE CUT SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND SO THAT THERE ARE NO VISIBLE EVIDENCE OF "PATCH ". PAINTING OF MECHANICAL WORK SHALL BE BY PRIME CONTRACTOR. ALL EQUIPMENT WHICH HAS HAD THE FINISH DAMAGED BY INSTALLATION OR TRANSPORTATION SHALL BE REFINISHED. ROOF AND OTHER PENETRATIONS: EACH CONTRACTOR REQUIRING OPENINGS IN THE ROOF OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE (WHERE REQUIRED) SHALL MAKE ARRANGEMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD FOR SUCH OPENINGS. PROCEDURE AND COST ARRANGEMENTS SHALL BE OUTLINED IN THE LANDLORD CRITERIA. COMPLY WITH ALL LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS. ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE ARRANGED TO PROVIDE A WEATHER -TIGHT INSTALLATION. THE INSTALLATION SHALL INCLUDE, WHERE REQUIRED, VENTILATING COLLARS TO GIVE PROPER CLEARANCE FROM COMBUSTIBLE ROOFS, FLOORS, CEILINGS OR OTHER SUCH STRUCTURES. FIRE - PROOFING SHALL BE PROVIDED USING MATERIALS CONFORMING WITH MUNICIPAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. ALL ROOFING WORK SHALL BE DONE BY LANDLORD ROOFING CONTRACTOR AT G.C. EXPENSE. MARK A B C D SERVICE SUPPLY SUPPLY RETURN RETURN MOUNTING TYPE LAY -I N GYP. BD. APPLICATION LAY -I N GYP. BD. APPLICATION AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE MODULE SIZE 24 "X24" ROUND 24 "X24" 12 "X1 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL TITUS - TMSA TITUS - TMR TITUS - 50F TITUS - 50F DUCTWORK A. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF ASHRAE THE SMACNA MANUAL. B. DUCTWORK SHALL BE "FACTORY MADE" CLASS 1 GALVANIZED SHEET METAL WITH IRON SUPPORTS SECURED TO OVERHEAD MEMBERS AT 5' -0" DUCTWORK MATERIALS SHALL BE PER LOCAL CODE. C. DUCTWORK SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASHRAE AND LATEST SMACNA STANDARDS. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL ELBOWS; AND MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS IN ALL BRANCHES, SPLIT - PER DAMPERS, AIR EQUALIZERS, EXTRACTORS, AND SIMILAR DEVICES WHEREVER NECESSARY TO PROPERLY BALANCE THE SYSTEM AND PRODUCE A QUIET AND DRAFTLESS OPERATION. D. EXPOSED DUCTWORK SHALL BE STANDARD SPIRAL ROUND GALVANIZED SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 24 GAUGE UP TO 36 ", 22 GAUGE -36" TO 50 ". E. THE DUCTWORK SHALL BE OF THE SIZES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. F. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL BE THERMAFLEX "M -KE" WITH ONE INCH EXTER- NAL INSULATION FINISHED WITH A VAPOR BARRIER, U.L. AND 90A LISTED, SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH DAMPER - EXTRACTOR AT THE SHEETMETAL DUCT AND CIRCULAR COLLAR AT THE DIFFUSER, MECHANICALLY SECURED. G. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 FEET IN LENGTH; BENDS SHALL NOT RESTRICT THE INSIDE CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA OF THE DUCT; AND CONNECTION SHALL BE MADE AS DIRECT AS POSSIBLE TO THE MAIN SUPPLY. DUCTWORK INSTALLATION: INSULATE ALL NEW SUPPLY, RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCTWORK WITH MINIMUM 6.0 R -VALVE FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP INSULATION. ALL DUCTWORK, INCLUDING DIFFUSER SURFACES EXPOSED TO THE PLENUM, SHALL HAVE A SEALED VAPOR BARRIER FACE WITH ALL SEAMS TAPED VAPOR BARRIER TIGHT. ALL JOINTS WHERE PRE - INSULATED FLEX TIES TO DIFFUSERS AND DUCT MUST BE DOUBLE SEALED WITH THE INNER SEALED TO THE DIFFUSER OR SPIN -IN AND THE OUTER SEALED TO THE DIFFUSER AND DUCT INSULATION. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE SHEET METAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA STANDARDS. DUCT SIZES SHOWN ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. ALL MATERIALS AND INSTALLATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 5 OF THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE. GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS: GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY KREUGER, HART AND COOLEY, BARBERCOLMAN, OR TITUS. EACH IS TO BE FITTED WITH A VOLUME DAMPER. (OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER) TESTING AND BALANCING CERTIFIED (AABC OR NABB) INDEPENDENT TESTING COMPANY TO TEST AND BALANCE SYSTEM TO CFM AS SPECIFIED. REPORT RESULTS TO TENANT AND ARCHITECT. GUARANTEE: A. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL UNCONDITIONALLY GUARANTEE IN WRITING ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FREE SERVICE FOR ALL EQUIPMENT INVOLVED IN HIS CONTRACT DURING THIS GUARANTEE PERIOD. B. THE GUARANTEE INCLUDE RESTORATION OF ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION OF ALL ADJACENT WORK THAT MUST BE DISTURBED IN FULFILLING THIS GUARANTEE. C. ALL SUCH REPAIRS AND /OR REPLACEMENTS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT DELAY, AND AT THE CONVENIENCE OF THE OWNER. SUBSTITUTIONS: A. APPROVALS OF SUBSTITUTIONS FOR "APPROVED EQUAL ", MUST BE IN WRITING AND SUBSTITUTION MUST BE APPROVED BEFORE INSTALLATION. INSTALLATION WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL MAY RESULT IN CONTRACTOR REMOVING SUBSTITUTION AND REPLACING IT WITH SPECIFIED ITEM AT HIS EXPENSE. B. APPROVAL MAY BE GIVEN BY ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER. REMARKS WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER WITH LOCKING QUADRANT VOLUME DAMPER. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT MOUNTING HEIGHT. THERMOSTAT NOTES 1. THERMOSTAT(s) SHALL BE LIGHSTAT MODEL E -STAT, AB, 24 VAC, SOLID STATE, AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER, MULTISTAGE HEAT /COOL, 2 -WAY COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT. 2. A REMOTE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND SUPPLY AIR SENSOR COME STANDARD WITH EACH E -STAT. 3. THE E-STAT WILL RUN ON DEFAULT SETTINGS OF 68^ HEAT/73^ COOL UNTIL REMOTELY CONFIGURED BY CORPORATE OFFICE. 4. INSTALLATION OF THE E -STAT REQUIRES INDUSTRY STANDARD RJ-45 ETHERNET CONNECTION TO LOCAL AREA NETWORK (AS PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER OR DESIGNATED THIRD PARTY). RJ -45 MUST BE INSTALLED WITHIN 3 FT. BELOW THE E -STAT THERMOSTAT AND TESTED TO VERIFY THAT IT IS ACTIVATED PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE E -STAT THERMOSTAT. 5. ONE (1) 3 FT. CAT5e PATCH CABLE IS SUPPLIED TO CONNECT FROM E -STAT TO THE RJ-45 JACK B NOT 8 ND R #18 AWG WIRE FROM RTU TO E-STAT, REQUIRED, UT O -CO UCTO , 2- CONDUCTOR #18 AWG (NON- SHIELDED) WIRE FROM E -STAT TO REMOTE ROOM SENSOR, 2- CONDUCTOR #18 AWG (NON - SHIELDED) WIRE FROM E -STAT TO SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. - F VA 7. ONE (1) E-STAT IS REQUIRED FEAC HVAC UNIT. ALL NETWORK WIRING AND OUTLET(s) TO THE E -STAT(s) ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CUSTOMER OR DESIGNATED THIRD PARTY REPRESENTATIVE. CUSTOMER SUPPLIED RJ-45 JACK FOR E -STAT TWO -WAY COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT LIGHTSTAT SUPPLIED CAT5/5e, 3 FT. PATCH CABLE 0 NTS LZO ETHERNET SWITCH/HUB LIGHTSTAT CONTACT INFO. 22 W. WEST HILL ROAD BARKHAMSTED, CT 06063 Ph. - 860 - 292 -2444 ex. "0" Fax - 860 - 738 -4123 E -MAIL - orders @Iightstat.corn CUSTOMER SUPPLIED CAT5 /5e WIRING FROM PATCH PANEL TO REMOTE 0 RJ-45 JACK (LESS THAN 320 FT.) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED NETWORK EQUIPMENT E -STAT DIAGRAM os 01/ CUSTOMER SUPPLIED CAT5/5e PATCH CABLE ENABLE COMMUNICATIONS PORT AS REQUIRED LEXPIRES DEC 2 0 2009 MEOWED' D: ARCHflEC RAL CONSyLT i_ 1901 Newport. Blvd: suite #300.: Costa Mesa, Ca. 92627 `= Ph: 949.698:1400 Fax 949.698:1433 _ :::.: www.Iittleonline.com Tbir drawing aisd the design shown are the properly of Little Diversified Arcbitectuml Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other use of this draping without their Written consent is prohibited and any infringement null be subject to legal action. dp CLIENTNAME PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE HHH PROJECT MANAGER EM DRAWN BY SG /GM NO © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKNAY, SURE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 -410 -2858 FAX 817 -251 -6411 fluNG-AfZEs A .EI .I :, REVEION5:,. ',.4! REASON JAN 0 8 2008 GENERAL NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS, CALCULATIONS, AND DETAILS 7550EdATE• Sig; �s "n'�- "'..j�x�^SFIEETND:r�'._A �.'',.:rx:.� %,�: rs;R� -- •- •' -. _,.._..._ 'S �r�''is= " ".':�". -...�' Vii;='- �•% =d'�''� ".,��`rsF;_` 625 - 4089 -01 12/21/07 M2.0 DATE MARK LAV WC WH FD TP WCO MS DF 3 PLUMBING 3D VIEW P1.0 EQUIPMENT TYPE DESCRIPTIVE LAVATORY WATER CLOSET WATER HEATER Chronomite Instant - Flow Model SR -20L, 0.5 GPM @ 57° INSTANTANEOUS Rise, 4.2 KW, 20 Amps. 208v _ 10 - 60. FLOOR DRAIN TRAP PRIMER WALL CLEANOUT DRINKING FOUNTAIN PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE Precision Plumbing Products Trap Primer Model No. P -2, Copper Body, Adjustable with 1/2" Copper Type "L" to Floor Drain. Jay R. Smith Cleanout Tee Model No. 45325. WC AMERICAN STANDARD 0321.075 'DECLYN' 19 "X 1T'. PROVIDE AMERICAN STANDARD CERAMIX2000.101 FAUCET WITH POP -UP DRAIN. AMERICAN STANDARD "CADET" 2377.100 ELONGATED WATER CLOSET WITH OLSONITE SEAT NO. 95, BOLT CAPS AND ANGLESTOP. TRIP LEVER TO BE LOCATED ON WIDE SIDE OF FIXTURE. JOSAM 3" 30000 SERIES, CAST IRON DRAIN WITH NICKLE - BRONZE ADJUSTABLE STRAINER, INSIDE CAULK OUTLET AND CLAMPING DEVICE. TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION. REMARKS 1. UNDERSLAB ROUGH -IN, FINAL CONNECTIONS, AND VENTS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. 2. PROVIDE SHOCK ARRESTORS AT EACH FIXTURE CONNECTION EQUAL TO THOSE MANUFACTURED BY PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS, JOSAM, OR ZURN AND SHALL BE PDI RATED. 3. PROVIDE JOSAM CARRIER 300 WITH CONCEALED ARMS AND BLOCK PA I I LRN FLOOR SUPPORT. 4. PROVIDE 1- 1/2 "'P' TRAP, 3/8" CONTROL STOPS, AND STAIGHT VALVES IN SUPPLY LINES. 5. PROVIDE 3/8" FLEXIBLE SUPPLY RISER WITH STOPS. 6. INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER TO BE MOUNTED BELOW LAVATORY 7. PROVIDE VINYL, INSULATED, ADA COMPLIANT TRAP WRAP ON ALL EXPOSED SINK TRAPS. THERE SHALL BE NO SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES UNDER LAVATORY. FLAT MOP MOLDED STONE SERVICE BASIN MODEL NO. MSB -2424 WITH VINYL BUMPERGUARD. FURNISH WITH MOP SINK AMERICAN STANDARD FAUCET MODEL NO. 8344.112 WITH INTEGRAL VACUUM BREAKER AND STOPS. PROVIDE 42" RUBBER HOSE WITH FAUCET, OR APPROVED EQUAL. HALSEY TAYLOR SELF - CONTAINED, BARRIER -FREE, ELECTRIC, REFRIGERATED, WALL - MOUNTED, BI -LEVEL WATER COOLER #H7V8BL -Q. FURNISHED WITH PLUG -IN, 3 -WIRE GROUNDING TYPE SERVICE CORD. STANDARD 120V, 60 HZ, 1 PH. 120V RECEPTACLE REQUIRED, RATED AT 15 AMP MINIMUM, TO RECEIVE 3 -WIRE PARALLEL BLADE GROUNDING TYPE MALE PLUG. PROVIDE CHROME SUPPLY STOP AND P -TRAP. SEE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER INSTALLATION PER ADA. LAV TP WCO WASTE 2" 4 " 2" 2" 2 " "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID" VENT CW 1 1/2" 1/2" 2 " 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" HW 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" REMARKS 1,2,3,4,7 1,2,5 1 �1 1- PLUMBING PLAN NORTH 1 /4" = 1' -0" /) SYMBOL TW X 0 0 WCO PLUMBING SYMBOL LIST GAS LINE DRAIN LINE DESCRIPTION SOIL WASTE LINE (VV) VENT LINE (V) COLD WATER (C.W.) HOT WATER (H.W.) HOT WATER RETURN TEMPERED WATER BUILDING SEWER FLOOR DRAIN (F.D.) FLOOR SINK (F.S.) ROOF DRAIN (R.D.) OVER FLOW DRAIN WALL CLEANOUT POINT OF CONNECTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION • S.C.O. • F.C.O._ ti< - R.D.L. - Q. D. L. CD — ICW — NOTE: ONLY THOSE SYMBOLS SHOWN ON THE DRAWING APPLY SHUT OFF VALVE (GATE) CHECK VALVE UNION LUBRICATED PLUG VALVE HOSE BIBB (H.B.) BRANCH RISE OFF MAIN SURFACE CLEANOUT FLOOR CLEANOUT GLOBE VALVE BALL VALVE ROOF DRAIN LEADER OVERFLOW DRAIN LEADER CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE INDUSTRIAL COLD WATER NOTES: 1. IT IS REQUIRED THAT THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MUST VISIT THE JOBSITE TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH MAJOR ITEMS SUCH AS STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AND OTHER EXISTING JOB CONDITIONS THAT MAY AFFECT HIS WORK ADDITIONALLY, PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF SUCH ITEMS AS WASTE, VENTS, WATER LINES, ETC. 2. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY PROPER SLOPE OF EXISTING SEWER TO MAIN SEWER PRIOR TO ANY NEW PLUMBING INSTALLATION. 3. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF AND FOLLOW SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS CONTAINED IN DESIGN CRITERIA OF TENANT HANDBOOK. 4. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO CLEAR ALL EXISTING AND NEW DRAIN LINES AND FIXTURES PRIOR TO TURNING OVER SPACE TO TENANT. 2 a PLUMBING NOTES CONNECT (N) 4" SANITARY SEWER LINE TO (E) SANITARY SEWER LINE. ( FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION - MIN. 4" ) CONNECT (N) 3/4" COLD WATER LINE TO (E) COLD WATER LINE. ( FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION - MIN. 3/4" ) CONNECT (N) 2" VENT LINE TO (E) VENT LINE. ( FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION - MIN. 2 ") NOTE: REFER TO SHEET P2.0 FOR DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 Newport Blvd. suite #300.:,; Costa Mesa, Ca. 92627: :`: Ph: 949.698.1400, , Fax 949.698.1433_ .; www.littleonline.com Tbir drawing end the design shawl an the property of Little Dilersified Architectural Cansulling. The reproduction, copying or other sue of this drawing nithout their Written content is prohibited and any infringement gill be subject to legal action. dp HHH PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE 12/21/07 © Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 835 WESTPORT PARKWAY, SURE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 -410 -2858 FAX 817-251-8411 CLIENT NAME Q PROJECT NAME .. PROJECrTEAM. ::.. PROJECT MANAGER EM DRAWN BY RJ /GM NO r REASON I DATE -REVISIONS:. -.,.._ ySHEET %::,v .., ='-• �'�xS:" .�=�'.�'ry,,.- ..._„ -...._ • eiteJeci`rluens�,. ~; y:H "'terF = . PLUMBING PLAN JAN 0 8 2008 625-4089-01 P1.0 PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS SCOPE 1. The work to be performed under the Plumbing Specifications and drawings consists of furnishing all labor and materials for the complete installation of all plumbing systems for Tenant Spaces. The work shall include, but shall not be limited to the following: GENERAL a. Cold and Hot Water systems b. Drainage and Vent systems. c. Insulation 2. This specification is inclusive for each item requiring all labor, material, and equipment 3. The Contractor is responsible for the proper layout and construction of the work included in this contract. WORKMANSHIP 4. All work must be done in a workmanlike manner to the complete satisfaction of the the engineers and shall be performed by qualified mechanics. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 5. All materials and equipment shall be new, and shall conform to the grade, quality and standard specified herein. All materials and equipment utilized shall manufactured in the United States of America. 6. All equipment offered under these specifications shall be limited to products regularly produced and recommended for service, in accordance with engineering date, ratings, or other comprehensive literature made available to the public and in effect at time of opening of bids. 7. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type and capacity of each piece of equipment used. LAWS, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS 8. All plumbing systems in all and /or part shall conform to all pertinent laws, ordinances and regulations of all bodies having jurisdiction, at all governing levels, notwithstanding anything is these Plans and Specifications to the contrary. In case of conflict between governing levels, the more strigent laws shall apply. 9. Contractor shall pay all fees and obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by any authority having jurisdiction in connection with his work. 10. Where applicable, all material shall bear the National Board of Fire Underwriters Seal of Approval. Certificates to this effect to be furnished to Architect upon request. ESCUTCHEONS 11. All exposed pipes, except as otherwise described passing through walls, floors, ceiling, etc. in finished spaces, shall be provided with sold pattern heavy ceiling, floor or wall escutcheons with set screw. Escutcheons end plates shall be of steel or malleable iron with prime coat ready for painting. Escutcheons will not be provided where sleeves intentionally extend above finished floor. 12. All exposed plumbing short branch connections to fixtures and/or equipment passing through wall or floors shall be equipped with pressed brass, chromium plated, sold -type escutcheons. GUARANTEE 13. Each Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee in writing all materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from date of acceptance by Owner. The Contractor shall provide free service for all equipment involved in his contract during this guarantee period. 14. The guarantee shall include restoration to its original condition of all adjacent work that must be disturbed in fulfilling this guarantee. 15. All repairs and/or replacement shall be made without delay, and at the convenience of the owner. TEMPORARY 16. The Contractor, at his own expense and cost, shall install, operate, protect and maintain the respective temporary services as required by his work. TESTS OF PIPING SYSTEMS 17. The systems of piping as installed by this Contractor must be tested with water or air and proven tight to the satisfaction of representative of the Architect. Testing instruments must be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor, 18. Tests must be made with water, except when there is danger from freezing then tests may be made with air. Wooden plugs are not to be used in making tests. STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 19. Before being placed in service all water lines shall be chlorinated to the satisfaction of the Architect in accordance with A.W.W.A. Specifications C601 -537. SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING 20. Soil waste piping shall be service wrought cast iron pipe. Hub type or "no- hub ". 21. Vent piping shall be'service wrought cast iron "no -hub" or galvanized steel pipe. WATER PIPING 22. Water piping under floor shall be type "K" copper. 23. Water piping above floor shall be type "L" copper. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING 24. Condensate drain piping shall be type "L" copper. WATER PIPING INSULATION 25. Insulate all water piping with 1" Armaflex II or approved equal, unless noted otherwise on plan. - WASTE AND VENT PIPING DIAGRAM INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER MID. ON WALL BEL. LAV. ACCESS COVER ELEC. CONDUIT AND J -BOX SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS NOTE INSULATE EXPOSED PIPING BELOW LAV. PER HANDICAPPED REQUIREMENTS. INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER DETAIL FINISHED FLOOR STRUCTURE AT UPPER LEVEL - CONNECT (N) 2" VENT LINE TO (E) VENT LINE. (FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION - MIN. 2 ") CONNECT (N) 4" SANITARY SEWER LINE TO (E) SANITARY SEWER LINE. (FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION - MIN 4 ") FLOOR DRAIN DETAIL DUAL OUTLET ANGLE VALVE MIN. 2' SEAL TO HOT WATER OUTLET FLOW CONTROL TO COLD WATER OUTLET COLD WATER SUPPLY TRAP FINISHED FLOOR CONCRETE SLAB OR FINISHED FLOOR GRADE AT LOWER LEVEL TO TENANTS SANITARY SEWER 17 NOTE ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS MUST BE SLEEVED AND LIQUID TIGHT. FLOOR PENETRATION DETAIL WALL NON - COMBUSTIBLE FIRE STOPPING PIPE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DIAGRAM SLEEVE WALL CLEANOUT WALL CLEANOUT DETAIL CAULK WITH FLEXIBLE FILLER WALL ACCESS COVER CONNECT (N) 3/4" COLD WATER LINE TO (E) COLD WATER LINE. (FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION - MIN. 3/4 ") 7 EXPIRES DEC 2 0 2009 1901 Newport Blvd.. suite #300 Costa. Mesa, Ca.. 92627 h 949.698.1400 = Fax; 949.698:1433 www.littleonline.com 'This draning and the design shoals are the properly of Little Ditersifted Architectural Consulting. The reproduction, copying or other we of thin dranzng without their uritten consent is prohibited and arty infringement nill be su ect to legal action. dp CLIENT NAME • HHH EM N 4 PROTECT NAME. -- DRAWN BY RJ /GM PRINCIPAL IN CHARGE PROJECT' MANAGER 12/21/07 C Little 2007 DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 835 WESTPORT PARKWAY. SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 817 - 410.2858 FAX 817 - 251 -8411 REASON JAN 0 8 2008 0 M - a � W ao V tt co c011 V. J W co �za �, V W vo w ~ M I- 0 . PR03ECT:TEAM imorammumffessississamm SPECIFICATIONS, DETAILS, AND PIPING DIAGRAMS 625-4089-01 DATE P2.0